Saab 2001 9 5 Owners Manual 95us1m01
2015-09-07
: Saab Saab-2001-9-5-Owners-Manual-762922 saab-2001-9-5-owners-manual-762922 saab pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF  .
.
Page Count: 272 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- Owner’s Manual Saab 9-5, Model Year 2001
- Introduction
- Instrument panel
- Exterior
- Interior
- Engine compartment, 4-cyl engine
- Engine compartment, 3.0t V6
- Warning labels
- Safety
- Security
- Instruments and controls
- Saab 9-5 Audio System
- OnStar - Telematics- Using OnStar
- The OnStar Center
- The OnStar Safety and Security Plan
- The OnStar Premium Plan *
- Additional Services- Personal Calling
- Signing Up for Personal Calling
- To sign up for Personal Calling, simply
- Voice Commands
- Voice Command Error Messages
- Universal Commands
- Storing/Deleting Numbers in Memory
- Deleting a Number from Memory
- Setting Tone or Voice Response
- Units Remaining
- Adding More Calling Minutes / Units
- Automatic Replenishment
- Security/Locking your System
- Volume Control
 
- Virtual Advisor
- OnStar Subscriber Website
- Limitations
- Additional Information
 
- Interior equipment and trunk
- Starting and driving- Ignition switch
- Starting the engine
- Important considerations for driving
- Fuel filler flap
- Refueling
- Engine Break-In Period
- Gear changing
- Cruise control
- Braking
- Traction Control System
- Economical motoring
- Driving in cold weather
- Driving in hot weather
- Towing a trailer
- Driving with a roof rack load
- Driving with a load
- Driving considerations with compact spare wheel/tire fitted
- Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open
- Driving in deep water
- Towing the car
- Jump starting
- Parking brake
- Parking
 
- Car care and technical information- Hood release handle
- Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine
- Engine compartment, 6-cyl. (3.0t V6)
- Engine families
- Emission control systems
- Engine
- Engine oil
- Transmission fluid
- Coolant
- Brake and clutch fluid
- Power steering fluid
- Battery
- Drive belts
- Wipers and washers
- Changing bulbs- Headlight bulb for high beam
- Headlight bulb for low beam
- Parking-light bulb
- Front fog lights / cornering lights
- Front turn signal bulbs
- Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan
- Trunk lid light and taillights, 9-5 Sedan
- High-mounted stop lights, 9-5 Sedan
- Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 Wagon
- Rear lights clusters, 9-5 Wagon
- Loading lighting, 9-5 Wagon
- License-plate light
- Side direction indicators
- Courtesy lights (doors and floor) and luggage-compartment lighting
- Dome light, front
- Dome light, rear
- Glove-compartment illumination
- Other bulbs
- Bulb table
 
- Fuses
- Wheels
- Compact spare wheel
- Flat spotting
- Air conditioning (ACC)
- Safety belts
- Upholstery and trim
- Textile carpeting
- Washing the car
- Waxing and polishing
- Engine compartment
- Touching up the paint
- Anticorrosion treatment
- For long trips
- Recovery and/or recycling of automotive materials
- Headlight aiming
 
- Maintenance and owner assistance
- Specifications- General
- Engine
- Fuel
- Engine oil
- Engine variants
- Electrical system
- Drive belts
- Manual gearbox
- Automatic transmission
- Suspension
- Steering
- Brake system
- Wheels and tires
- Plates and labels
- Several of the systems in your Saab car can be adjusted to better fit your individual needs
- Following adjustments can be done by the driver:
 
- Index

1
Owner’s Manual
 Saab 9-5, Model Year 2001
Safety  11
Security  33
Instruments and controls  47
Saab 9-5 Audio System  81
OnStar - Telematics  107
Interior equipment and trunk  119
Starting and driving  147
Car care and technical information  187
Maintenance and owner assistance  241
Specifications   249
Index  263
© Saab Automobile AB 2000
Service Readiness, Saab Automobile AB, Trollhättan, Sweden
Printed in Sweden

2
Introduction 
This manual provides practical guidance on 
driving and caring for your Saab. 
The Saab 9-5 is available with the following 
engine variants: 
• 2.3T Ecopower.
• 2.3 Turbo Ecopower.
• 3.0t V6 Ecopower (SE).
Although the manual describes the most 
important differences between model vari-
ants, it does not include precise specifica-
tions of the different variants. Some differ-
ences also occur to meet special legal 
requirements in different countries.
Importation and distribution of Saab auto-
mobiles, spare parts and accessories are 
handled exclusively by General Motors of 
Canada Limited in Canada and by Saab 
Cars USA, Inc. in the U.S.A.
We recommend that you read through the 
manual before taking the car out for the first 
time and that you keep it in the car for future 
reference. 
To find a specific item, use the overviews 
given on pages 3-7. A list of contents is 
given at the beginning of each section of the 
manual, and there is also a comprehensive 
index at the back of the book. 
Supplied with the car is a Warranties and 
Service Record booklet and a tire warranty 
folder which specifies the regular mainte-
nance to be carried out. The book also con-
tains important warranty conditions.  
Since the policy at Saab is one of continual 
improvement, we retain the right to incorpo-
rate modifications and to alter specifications 
during production without prior notice. 
If you have any queries concerning your car, 
its equipment, the warranty conditions or 
the like, your Saab dealer will be pleased to 
help. 
Best wishes, 
Saab Automobile AB 
Saab Automobile AB does not accept liability for 
any damage caused by the fitting of spare parts, 
exchange parts or accessories that are not 
approved by Saab Automobile AB.
The specifications, design particulars and illus-
trations included in the manual are not binding. 
WARNING
WARNING texts warn against the danger 
of injury if the specified instructions are 
not followed. 
NOTE
NOTE texts warn of potential damage to 
the car if the recommendations are not 
followed. 
IB337

3
Instrument panel 
IB1080
Indicator and warning lights ______  48
Speedometer _________________  55
Odometer and trip meter  ________  54
Fuel gauge  __________________  55
Engine temperature gauge  ______  55
Parking lights ____________  63
High/low beam  __________  63
Daytime running lights _____  63
Rear fog light ____________  64
Instrument illumination_____  65
Changing bulbs _________  205
High/low beam control stalk   63
Turn signal and lane change 
indicator _______________  65
Cruise control  __________  166
Front fog lights ___________  66
Ashtrays ___________________  130
Cigarette lighter ______________  130
Trip computer 
(Saab Information Display, SID)  __  57
Night panel  __________________  61
Clock _______________________  62
Traction Control (TCS) Switch  53,  169
OnStar switch ________________  108
Wipers and washers ______  68
Rear wiper______________  69
Washer fluid  ___________  203
Replacing wiper blades  __  203
Audio system  ___________  81
Steering-wheel controls____  98
Hazard warning lights _____  66
Climate control system: 
automatic _____________  70
Air conditioning: simple 
fault diagnosis  _________  230
Seat heating controls  __________ 123
Ventilated front seats ___________ 123
Audio system steering-wheel 
controls________________  98

4
Exterior 
IB580
Roof-rack load  _______________  176
Mounting holes for roof rack  ____  176
Maximum loads  ______________  250
Rearview mirrors  _____________  125
Hood ______________________  188
Engine compartment: washing  __  233
Central lock  ____________  34
Interior locking buttons  ____  36
Child safety lock catch  ____  37
Trunk/tailgate lid lock  _____  38
Car alarm (anti-theft alarm)   41
Front lights  _____________  63
Headlight switch  _________  63
High/low beam 
control stalk ____________  63
Turn signal & 
lane change indicators  ___  65
Headlight wipers _________  68
Changing bulbs  ________  205
Fuel gauge  __________________  55
Fuel filler flap ________________  154
Refueling ___________________  154
Fuel economy  _______________  170
Fuel grade  __________________  252
Economical motoring __________  170
Tire pressure ___________ back cover
Wheel and tire specifications ____  257
Brakes and braking  ___________  167
Winter driving ________________  172
Wheels and tires  _____________  221
Wheel changing ______________  226
Spare wheel _________________  180
Luggage compartment  _________ 134
Folding down the rear seat, 
9-5 Sedan ___________________ 134
Folding down the rear seat, 
9-5 Wagon __________________ 137
Trunk _______________________ 134
Tool kit ______________________ 144
Spare wheel  _____________ 144, 180
Jack ________________________ 226
Driving with a trailer ______  174
Towing ________________  181
Towrope attachment eyes  _  181
Light switches  ___________  63
Changing bulbs _________  205
• Tail lights  ____________  208
• Stop lights  ___________  208
Sunroof _______________  128
Washing the car  ________  232
Waxing and polishing  ____  233
Touching-up of paintwork  _  234
Anticorrosion treatment ___  234
Service program_________  245

5
Interior 
IB581
Internal rearview mirror  ________  125
Door mirrors _________________  125
Sun visors___________________  130
Safety belts _____________  12
Airbag (SRS)  ___________  26
Child seats  _____________  19
Child safety lock catch  ____  37
Safety belt care  ________  231
Glove compartment  _____  131
Manual transmission  ____  158
Automatic transmission  __  159
Electric windows  _____________  127
Ignition switch  _______________  148
Starting the engine  ___________  149
Break-In period_______________  157
Driving in hot weather  _________  173
Driving in winter ______________  172
Parking ____________________  185
Steering-wheel adjustment   124
Airbag (SRS) ____________  26
Power steering  _________  199
Audio system 
steering-wheel controls____  98
Seat adjustment  ________  120
Seat heating  ___________  123
Ventilated front seats _____  123
Safety belts  _____________  12
Child seats  _____________  19
Folding down the rear seat, 
9-5 Sedan _____________  134
Folding down the rear seat, 
9-5 Wagon ____________  137
Upholstery: cleaning  _____  231
Side airbags (SRS)  _______  28
Interior lighting ________________  67
Sunroof ____________________  128
Interior lighting: changing bulbs __  212

6
Engine compartment, 
4-cyl engine
IB583
Engine: description  ___________  192
Engine oil level: checking  ______  193
Engine oil: changing  __________  194
Engine oil specification  ________  253
Brakes and braking  ___________  167
ABS brakes  _________________  167
Brake system ________________  198
Brake fluid  __________________  257
Brake pads __________________  257
Fuse panels  ___________  215
Changing a fuse  ________  215
Table of fuses  __________  217
Relays _______________  218
Temperature gauge  ______  55
Driving in hot weather ____  173
Driving in winter_________  172
Coolant: 
checking/changing __  196 / 197
Cooling-system capacity  _  252
Power steering __________  199
Steering fluid: grade  _____  199
Wiper/washer control stalk  _  68
Washer fluid: topping-up __  204
Washer jets  ___________  204
Jump starting ________________  183
Battery _____________________  199
Battery charge _______________  199
Manual transmission  __________  158
Automatic transmission  ________  159
Manual transmission oil ________  256
Automatic-transmission fluid  ____  256
Important considerations 
for driving  ___________________ 151
Turbo unit  ___________________ 189
Engine: technical data __________ 252
Ignition system  _________  148
Drive belts  _____________  202
Spark plugs ____________  254
Catalytic converter  ______  152
Warning labels  ___________  8
V.I.N. number  __________  259
Engine number  _________  259
Gearbox number  ________  259
Color code _____________  259

7
Engine compartment, 
3.0t V6
IB585
Warning labels  ___________  8
V.I.N. number  __________  259
Engine number  _________  259
Gearbox number  ________  259
Color code _____________  259
Ignition system  _________  148
Drive belts  _____________  202
Spark plugs ____________  254
Catalytic converter  ______  152
Important considerations 
for driving  ___________________ 151
Turbo unit  ___________________ 189
Engine: technical data __________ 252
Automatic transmission  ________  159
Automatic-transmission fluid  ____  256
Brakes and braking  ___________  167
ABS brakes  _________________  167
Brake system ________________  198
Brake fluid  __________________  257
Brake pads __________________  257
Jump starting ________________  183
Battery _____________________  199
Battery charge _______________  199
Fuse panels  ___________  215
Changing a fuse  ________  215
Table of fuses  __________  217
Relays _______________  218
Engine temperature gauge _  55
Driving in hot weather ____  173
Driving in cold climate ____  172
Coolant: 
checking/changing  _  196 / 197
Cooling-system capacity  _  252
Power steering  _________  199
Steering fluid: grade  _____  199
Wiper/washer control stalk  _  68
Washer fluid: topping-up __  204
Washer jets  ___________  204
Engine: description  ___________  192
Engine oil level: checking  ______  193
Engine oil: changing  __________  194
Engine oil specification  ________  253

8
Battery 
Contains corrosive sulfuric acid (40%) 
• FLAMMABLE GASES formed when car running and during charging 
of battery 
• Always wear eye protection when working on the battery 
• Smoking, open flames and sparks can all cause a battery to explode 
• See Owner’s Manual before using jump leads 
• Battery acid can cause SERIOUS BURNS 
• Keep battery upright 
• Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing 
• If contact made with acid, flush affected area with water and seek med-
ical help 
KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN 
Brake fluid
CLEAN FILLER CAP BEFORE 
REMOVING. USE ONLY DOT 4 
FLUID FROM SEALED CON-
TAINER. 
Radiator fan 
The radiator fan can cut in even 
after engine has been switched 
off. 
WL2
IB336
Drive belt 
Danger! Moving belt 
WL3
A/C system
Refrigerant at high pressure. 
Always drain the A/C system before undoing any connections. Failure to 
follow prescribed procedures can result in injury. System to be serviced by 
authorized personnel only. See Workshop Service Manual for correct pro-
cedures. 
The A/C system complies with SAE J639.
Refrigerant: 875 g of R134a. 
Refrigeration oil: 145 cc of PAG ND-8 oil or Saab 4319752 SK 20 oil 
Warning labels
IB1081
WL35
Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fitting
before  charging  the  A/C  system.  Improper
servicing  methods  may  cause  personal  injury.
SYSTEM TO BE SERVICED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
ONLY. for instructions consult workshop manual.
The  A/C  system  complies   with   SAE   J639
Ne pas desserrer les connexions du systeme A/C
avant l’evacuation du  refrigerant. Une  methode
de  service  erronee  peut  causes  des  lesions.
L’ENTRETIEN DOIT ETRE FAIT PAR UN PERSONNAL
QUALIFIE.  Consulter  le  manuel  de  service.
ca systeme eat conforme a la norme SAE J639
Manufactured by SAAB Automobile AB, Trollhatten, Sweden
4756961
Charge: 875 g R134a
Compressor oil:
145cc PAG oil ND-8 alt
SAAB oil 4319752
SK-20
Charge: 875 g R134a
Muile de compresseur
145cc PAG oil ND-8 ou
SAAB oil 4319752
SK-20
R134a
WARNING
Refrigerant under high pressure
ATTENTION
Refrigerant sous haute pression
WL36
• NO SMOKING
• AVOID SPARKS AND OPEN FLAMES
• KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN
• SEE OWNER’S MANUAL
• WEAR EYE PROTECTION
• FLAMMABLE GAS
•ACID

9
IB336
AIR BAG
WARNING
Flip visor over
WARNING
DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by the air bag.
• The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for children.
• NEVER put a rear-facing child seat in the front.
• Sit as far back as possible from the air bag.
• ALWAYS use SEAT BELTS and CHILD RESTAINTS.
50 10 111
IB1195
CANADA
USA
USA
CANADA
Door mirrors
Do not trap 
your fingers 
when folding 
out the mirrors
Door mirrors
Do not trap 
your fingers 
when folding 
out the mirrors
WL26
Child security lock
Locked.
The door can only be 
opened from outside.
Safety catch (9-5 Wagon)
Locked
The tailgate cannot be 
opened from the inside.

10
IB336
Jack
– Jack is designed only for changing a tire or 
mounting tire snow chains.
– Car must be level and jack must be placed on 
firm and level ground.
– Never crawl underneath car when it is jacked 
up.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 Set parking brake and shift transmission to 
park.
2 Fit top of jack into jacking point next to wheel 
to be changed (See illustrations).
3 Crank jack so that car begins to lift.
4 Remove center cap by inserting a screw 
driver under cap and prying up.
5 Using socket wrench in tool kit, loosen wheel 
bolts one-half turn.
6 Raise car so that tire clears ground. Loosen 
wheel bolts completely and remove wheel.
7 Mount spare wheel and tighten bolts enough 
so wheel is not loose.
8 Lower car. Tighten wheel bolts in crosswise 
order (See illustrations).
IB1705
Jack (Text printed on jack) 
Use on Saab 9-5 & 9-3.Use on level ground only. 
Use vehicle support stands. Safe working load 
2000 lbs. (1,000 kg). For more information see 
your owner´s manual. 
IB994
IB989
Long loads 
Always SECURE LOAD to prevent it from 
shifting during transport.
An unsecured load could cause passenger 
injuries in braking situations or in the event of 
a collision.
Cover sharp edges with a protective wrap.
Max. weight: 33 lbs. (15 kg) 
Max. length: 6" 6 inches (2 m)
See your Owner’s Manual before securing 
loads.

12 Safety
Safety belts 
Three-point inertia-reel safety belts are pro-
vided for all seats. 
Research has established that it is danger-
ous for rear-seat passengers not to wear 
their safety belts. 
Bear in mind that in certain states it is a legal 
requirement for all occupants of the car to 
wear a safety belt.
Safety-belt reminder
When the ignition is switched on, the ”fasten 
belts” reminder will light up until the driver 
fastens the safety belt. In addition an audi-
ble signal sounds for 6 seconds, or until the 
driver fastens his belt. 
WARNING
Safety belts must be worn at all times by 
all car occupants. 
Child safety, see page  19. 
Check that the locking tongue is properly 
locked in the belt lock (see page  20).
The A-pillar area (area beside the wind-
shield) and the headlining of your Saab 
contain padding designed to reduce head 
injuries. No modifications to these areas 
should be made unless done so by your 
authorized Saab dealer.
WARNING
In the event of an accident, the rear-seat 
passengers can be thrown forward 
against the front-seat backrests, impos-
ing much higher stresses on the 
front-seat passengers and belts and 
resulting in needless injury to everyone in 
the car.
WARNING
Adjustments of the safety belt should be 
done when the car is stationary so that 
attention to traffic is not reduced.
IB409
FASTEN BELTS

13Safety
Safety-belt pretensioners
The belts of the front seats are fitted with 
automatic pretensioners, which are acti-
vated in the event of a severe frontal colli-
sion or very violent rear-end collision. They 
serve to reduce the forward movement of 
the body by tensioning the belt. 
The belt pretensioners do not activate in 
less violent frontal or rear-end collisions. 
Correct position for safety belt 
• The lap portion of the belt should be 
pulled as tightly as comfortable and as 
low as possible across the hips, so that it 
is just touching the top of the thighs. The 
shoulder belt should be well in on the 
shoulder but not touching the neck.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted 
or rubbing against any sharp edges. 
• There should not be any slack in the belt. 
Pull the belt tight – particularly important 
when thick outer clothing is worn. 
• Refrain from tilting the backrest more than 
necessary, as the safety belt provides 
better protection when the seat is in the 
more upright position. 
• Only one person per safety belt!
• For most of the time a safety belt is worn, 
the retractor will allow the wearer freedom 
of movement. The retractor locks up auto-
matically if the belt is jerked or withdrawn 
sharply, the car tilts, the brakes are 
applied hard or a collision occurs.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a collision, the 
safety belts, belt pretensioners and other 
components must be inspected by an 
authorized Saab dealer and replaced as 
necessary.
Never make any alterations or repairs to 
the safety belt yourself but visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
WARNING
Proper positioning of the safety belt is 
extremely important. An out of position 
safety belt can result in the wearer sliding 
underneath the belt in a collision (subma-
rining) and injury can result from the lap 
portion cutting into the abdomen.
WARNING
If two people share a belt, they risk injury 
by being crushed together in the event of 
an accident. 
IB410
Correctly positioned safety belt 

14 Safety
• Children who have grown out of a child 
seat should be restrained by the car’s 
standard three-point belts. Make sure that 
the shoulder belt is not in contact with the 
neck or throat. If it is, a booster seat/cush-
ion may be necessary.
Front safety belts 
Fasten the belt by pulling the belt and insert-
ing the tongue in the buckle. Check that it is 
securely fastened.
Grasp the shoulder belt close to the buckle 
and pull the belt towards the shoulder to 
tighten the lap belt part.
Then grip the belt at the shoulder, pull it out 
and, without letting go, allow the slack to be 
taken up by the reel. Make sure that the belt 
is well in on the shoulder.
Because the lower belt-anchorage points 
are on the seat, the belt buckle follows the 
movement of the seat during seat adjust-
ment.
To release the belt, press the red button on 
the belt buckle, as illustrated.
See page  231 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
Never fasten the safety belt with the 
shoulder belt behind the body or pull the 
belt off the shoulder and under the arm. 
IB411
To fasten the belt 
IB412
Press the red button to release the belt 

15Safety
Belt height adjustment
The front safety belts and the outside belts 
in the rear (9-5 Sedan) are equipped with 
automatic height adjustment.
After fastening the belt, grasp it at chest 
height, pull it out and, without letting go, 
allow the slack to be taken up by the reel. 
Make sure that the belt is well in on the 
shoulder.
Safety belt use during pregnancy
Pregnant women must always wear a 
safety belt to protect both themselves and 
the unborn child. 
The lap belt should be placed low, across 
the hips and over the upper thighs.
IB414

16 Safety
Safety belt, rear seat 
Three-point safety belts are provided for all 
three rear-seat passengers. 
Fasten the belt by pulling out the strap care-
fully and inserting the tongue in the lock. 
Check that it is securely fastened.
Then grip the diagonal part of the strap near 
the lock and pull the belt upwards towards 
the shoulder to tighten the lap strap. The lap 
strap should lie low over the hips.
The diagonal part should lie as far in on the 
shoulder as possible.
To release the belt, press the red button on 
the belt lock.
See page  231 for the checking of belt func-
tion, cleaning, etc.
WARNING
• Make sure that the belt does not 
become trapped when the backrest is 
folded down or raised (see page 134).
• If a cargo has to be placed on a seat, 
it must be properly secured with the 
safety belt. This reduces the risk of 
the cargo being thrown about during 
hard braking or a possible collision, 
which could cause personal injury.
• Check that the belt is not twisted or 
lying against sharp edges.
IB???IB415
Safety belt, rear seat 
IB416
Securing an item on the rear seat 

17Safety
WARNING
Safety belts are designed to bear upon 
the bony structure of the body, and should 
be worn low across the front of the pelvis 
or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as 
applicable; wearing the lap portion of the 
belt across the abdominal area must be 
avoided. 
Safety belts should be adjusted as firmly 
as possible, consistent with comfort, to 
provide the protection for which they have 
been designed. A loose belt will greatly 
reduce the protection afforded to the 
wearer. 
Care should be taken to avoid contamina-
tion of the webbing with polishes, oils and 
chemicals, and particularly battery acid. 
Cleaning may safely be carried out using 
mild soap and water. The belt should be 
replaced if webbing becomes frayed, 
contaminated or damaged. 
It is essential to replace the entire assem-
bly after it has been worn in a severe 
impact even if damage to the assembly is 
not obvious. 
Belts should not be worn with straps 
twisted. 
Each belt assembly must only be used by 
one occupant; it is dangerous to put a belt 
around a child being carried on the occu-
pant´s lap. 
No modifications or additions should be 
made by the user which will either prevent 
the safety belt adjusting device from oper-
ating to remove slack, or prevent the 
safety belt assembly from being adjusted 
to remove slack.

18 Safety
Head restraint
The front seats in the Saab 9-5 are 
equipped with Saab Active Head Restraints 
(SAHRs). These reduce the risk of whiplash 
injury if the car is hit from behind.
In the event of a rear-end collision, the body 
is forced back against the backrest. This, in 
turn, causes the mechanism to press the 
head restraint forward and upwards, thus 
limiting the backward movement of the 
head.
The SAHR is a mechanical system, actu-
ated by body weight. The mechanism is built 
into the top of the backrest, where it is con-
nected to the head restraint.
The SAHR does not normally need to be 
replaced after a rear-end collision. 
The head restraint can be raised or lowered 
and is adjustable in various positions. 
• Raising: grasp the head restraint on both 
sides and pull it straight up. 
• Lowering: press the catch on the left-hand 
side of the attaching point and press down 
the head restraint.
Rear-seat head restraints
9-5 Sedan: The rear head restraints have 
three adjustment positions for passenger 
comfort. 
They can also be folded down to increase 
the driver’s rearward vision when the seat is 
unoccupied.
9-5 Wagon: The height of the rear head 
restraints can be adjusted to provide opti-
mum passenger comfort. 
WARNING
• Adjust the head restraint so that the 
head is well supported and the center 
of the head restraint is at ear height, 
thus reducing the likelihood of neck 
injury in an accident.
• The rear head restraint should not be 
folded down when the seat is occu-
pied.
IB460
IB400

19Safety
Child safety Car safety tips Protect your children from getting 
trapped in the trunk of a car
WARNING
• Children must always be suitably 
restrained in the car. All child 
restraints and booster seats are 
designed to be secured in vehicle 
seats by the lap belt or the lap belt of a 
lap-shoulder belt. If the child restraint 
is not properly secured, a child can be 
endangered in a crash.
• NEVER put a child seat in the front.
• Children 12 and under can be killed by 
the airbag.
• According to accident statistics, the 
BACK SEAT is SAFER for properly 
restrained children than the front seat.
• Sit as far back as possible from the air 
bag.
WARNING
• Never leave your children unattended 
in a car, even for a short time.
– Children can suffer heat stroke - per-
haps die - in a matter of minutes.
– Children can put the car into gear and 
hurt themselves or others.
• At gas stations, take the keys from the 
car while filling the tank.
• Never allow children to climb on top of - 
or under motor vehicles.
• Always look for children before backing 
your motor vehicle out of a garage or 
driveway.
• To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning, 
never let a car idle in the garage.
• Supervise young children around buck-
ets of water while washing your car. 
Small children can drown in seconds in 
less than an inch of water.
WARNING
• Teach your kids not to play in or around 
cars.
• Watch your children when loading or 
unloading the car so they don´t get 
locked in by mistake.
• Always lock the doors and trunk of your 
car, and keep the keys out of children´s 
sight and reach.
• Keep the rear fold-down seats closed 
to help prevent kids from getting into 
the trunk from inside the car.

20 Safety
The same attention must be given to child 
safety in the car as is given to adults.
Saab recommends rearward facing child 
restraints.
Children travel most safely when properly 
restrained, but restraints must be suitable 
for the size of the child. Always follow the 
child seat/booster cushion manufacturer´s 
instructions when installing these devices in 
your vehicle. 
Make sure you are acquainted with the 
legal requirements for seating children 
in the car. 
Make sure that it is possible to fit a child 
restraint in accordance with the manufac-
turer’s child seat instructions.
Lockable belt tongue 
In fitting a child seat that is intended to be 
secured in position by the lap portion of the 
safety belt, make use of the locking function 
of the buckle.
Locking the lap portion of the belt lessens 
the risk that the seat will work loose while 
the car is in motion. 
The button for the locking function is located 
on the back of the buckle. 
1 Position the child seat in the back of the 
car. 
2 To activate the locking function, move 
the locking button on the tongue of the 
belt to the position marked 
”CHILD SEAT” (item 1 in the figure) in 
order to activate the locking function. 
3 Secure the base of the child seat with 
the lap portion of the safety belt in accor-
dance with the installation instructions 
accompanying the child seat. 
4 Grasp the shoulder part of the safety belt 
and pull it upwards to tighten the lap por-
tion against the child seat. 
5 Check for correct locking function by 
pulling on the lap portion of the belt. The 
belt must not unreel. 
Saab 9-5 Sedan
Child restraint that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can 
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
If the child restraint is positioned in the 
center place, the child restraint support legs 
should be used and the rear seat armrest 
secured with the safety strap (accessory). 
You must fasten such a child restraint with 
the three-point safety belt and the two 
underside anchorage tethers. 
The tethers should be fixed to the beam 
beneath the driver´s and passenger´s seat. 
The fixing points are color marked.
If you intend to install another make of child 
restraint make sure that it is possible to fit it 
in accordance with the manufacturer’s 
instructions.
IB1204
Fitting the locking strap on the center arm-
rest, Saab 9-5 Sedan (not needed on 
Wagon).
The locking strap is standard equipment 
in certain markets.
IB822
Locking the lap belt
1 Locked
2 Unlocked

21Safety
When fitting child seats in cars you must 
always read the instructions supplied by 
the car seat manufacturer.
Saab 9-5 Wagon:
Child restraint that are approved for rear-
ward facing installation in the rear seat can 
be positioned in any of the three rear places.
If the child restraint is positioned in the 
center place, the child restraint support legs 
should be used. You must fasten such a 
child restraint with the three-point safety belt 
and the two underside anchorage tethers. 
The tethers should be fixed to the beam 
beneath the driver´s and passenger´s seat. 
The fixing points are color marked.
If a child seat from another manufacturer is 
used, ensure that it can be correctly 
mounted, according to the child-seat 
instructions.
When fitting child seats in cars you must 
always follow the instructions supplied 
by the car seat manufacturer.
WARNING
A special accessory is available for lock-
ing the center armrest so that a child seat 
can be installed in the middle seat. See 
your Saab dealer for details.
When a rear-facing child seat is fitted in 
the center position of the rear seat in the 
Saab 9-5 Sedan the center armrest must 
be secured in place with this strap. If this 
is not done, the center armrest could 
swing down in the event of a frontal colli-
sion and cause injury to the child.
IB1686
IB1688
IB425
Child restraints installed in the rear seat  Child restraints installed in the rear seat Fixing points for child restraint tethers

22 Safety
Child tether anchorages for forward 
facing child car seats
Child restraints with a tether strap must be 
anchored according to Canadian law.
If you have any questions regarding child 
tether anchorages please contact your 
Saab dealer.
9-5 Sedan:
1 Open the cover that is right behind the 
child restraint. Make sure it locks.
2 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
3 Route the tether under the headrest.
4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.
5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the 
child restraint is pressed hard against 
the backrest.
6 Secure the lower part of the child 
restraint by means of the safety belt as 
described in the child restraint mounting 
instruction.
WARNING
Child tether anchorages are designed to 
withstand only those loads imposed by 
correctly fitted child restraints. 
Under no circumstances are they to be 
used for:
• Adult safety belts.
• Harnesses.
• Attaching other items or equipment to 
the vehicle.
• Load securing device.
IB1698
Child tether anchorages in parcel shelf, 
Saab 9-5 Sedan

23Safety
9-5 Wagon:
1 Fold the backrest of the rear seat for-
ward, see page 137.
2 Fold the anchor that is right behind the 
child restraint to its upright position.
3 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.
4 Raise the head restraint to its upper 
position and then route the tether under 
the headrestraint. *)
5 Attach the tether to the anchor.
6 Raise the backrest of the rear seat. 
Make sure it locks properly.
7 Tighten the tether so that the back of the 
child restraint is pressed hard against 
the backrest.
8 Secure the lower part of the child 
restraint by means of the safety belt as 
described in the child restraint mounting 
instruction on the previous page.
*) it may not be possible to route the tether 
through the cargo net (accessory), if one is 
fitted. Instead we recommend a cargo guard 
(accessory).
WARNING
Make sure the child-restraint anchorages 
are folded all the way up or down other-
wise it can obstruct locking the rear seat 
backrest.
IB1352
Child tether anchorages, Saab 9-5 Wagon

24 Safety
Integrated booster seat
(accessory)
The integrated booster seat in the back is 
intended for children weighing 33-80 lbs. 
(15-36 kg) and between 38 and 54 inches 
(97 and 137 cm) tall.
When seated in the integrated booster seat, 
the child must wear the standard three-point 
safety belt. 
Whatever the age or weight of the child, it is 
vital that the safety belt be worn correctly. 
The seat should always be kept clean and 
intact to ensure that it continues to function 
as intended. 
Folding down 
To fold the seat down, pull the strap pro-
vided between the seat and the backrest. 
Fastening the safety belt
• Seat the child well back in the seat, snug 
against the backrest. 
• Pull out the safety belt smoothly and 
insert the tongue in the lock. Check that it 
is securely fastened. 
• Ensure that the lap strap is positioned low 
across the hips and that the diagonal 
strap is well in on the shoulder, although 
not touching the neck or in a position that 
creates discomfort. 
• For optimum protection, the safety belt 
should be snug against the body. Pull the 
diagonal strap towards the shoulder to 
take up any slack. 
• After fastening the belt, grasp the strap at 
the shoulder, pull it out and, without letting 
go, allow the slack to be taken up by the 
reel. Make sure that the strap is well in on 
the shoulder. 
• Check that the belt runs freely between 
the reel and the lock.
To fold the seat away 
Fold back the seat and ensure that it is 
locked in position.
WARNING
Never wear a safety belt with the diagonal 
strap positioned behind your back or 
slipped off the shoulder and under your 
arm. 
IB605

25Safety
WARNING
• The standard safety belt must always 
be used in conjunction with the inte-
grated booster seat.
• The seat must not be modified in any 
way.
• Never leave a child unattended.
• Check to ensure that the belt is not 
twisted or rubbing against any sharp 
edges.
• Adjust the head restraint so that it pro-
vides the best possible support when 
there is a passenger in the rear seat.
WARNING
Failure to follow all the manufacturer’s 
instructions on the use of this child 
restraint system can cause your child to 
strike the vehicle´s interior during a 
sudden stop or crash.
Label in integrated booster seat

26 Safety
Airbag (Supplemental 
Restraint System 
"SRS") 
The supplementary restraint system (SRS) 
comprises an airbag in the steering wheel, 
a front passenger airbag and side airbags in 
the front seats.
The system supplements the protection 
provided by the safety belts to further 
enhance the safety of the occupants.
If a fault is detected in the SRS, the 
AIR BAG warning light on the main instru-
ment panel will come on (see pages 50 and 
30). 
When the system is triggered by impact of a 
frontal collision, the airbags in the steering 
wheel and passenger side of the dash board 
are inflated, after which they deflate through 
vents in the back of the bags.
The entire process takes less than 
0.1 second – literally, faster than the blink-
ing of an eye. 
These airbags are triggered only by moder-
ate to severe frontal or near-frontal colli-
sions. They will not be activated by minor 
front-end impacts, rear-end or side impacts, 
or by the car rolling over. 
WARNING
To reduce risk of injury:
•Always wear your safety belt.
•Always adjust your seat so that you 
are as far back as possible but still 
able to reach the steering wheel and 
controls comfortably.
• Children 12 and under or shorter than 
140 cm (55 inches) should always 
travel in the rear as the vehicle is 
equipped with an airbag on the pas-
senger side. 
WARNING
• Even if the car is equipped with SRS 
(airbag), safety belts must still always 
be worn by all occupants. 
• Note that because an airbag inflates 
and deflates extremely rapidly, it will 
not provide protection against a 
second impact occurring in the same 
incident. Always use your safety belt. 
• Always sit with the whole of your back 
in contact with the backrest of the seat, 
and with your seat as far back as is 
practical. This is to reduce the risk of 
injury from contact with the backrest of 
the seat when the airbag inflates and 
also because the airbag needs space 
in which to inflate. 
• Never attach anything to the steering 
wheel or passenger side of the instru-
ment panel, as this could result in 
injury if the airbag should inflate. The 
same applies to anything you might 
have in your mouth, such as a pipe, for 
instance. 
• Some components of the airbag will 
be hot for a short time. In some circum-
stances the airbag can cause burns or 
abrasions to the body when the airbag 
inflates/deflates. 
• Never rest your hands or forearms on 
the steering-wheel center padding.
• If the AIR BAG warning light remains 
on after the car has been started or 
comes on while you are driving, have 
the car checked immediately by an 
authorized Saab dealer. The warning 
light could signify that the airbags may 
not inflate in a crash, or they could 
even inflate without a crash. 

27Safety
IB417
Moment of impact. 
Sensor detects decel-
eration and sends a 
signal via the control 
module to a gas gen-
erator that inflates the 
airbag. 
The inflating airbag 
cushions the driver. 
Airbag now fully 
inflated. 
The airbag starts to 
deflate. 
IB419
Inflated airbag (driver side) 
Inflation and deflation together take less than 
0.1 second. 
IB418
51
4
2
6
3
2
6
5
SRS (airbag) system with belt 
pretensioners 
1 Electronic control module and sensor 
2 Belt pretensioners (for both front safety belts) 
3 Steering wheel with integral airbag 
4 Passenger airbag 
5 Side-airbag sensor 
6 Side airbag 

28 Safety
Front passenger seat 
The airbags are interconnected and have a 
common warning light. The passenger 
airbag module is housed in the fascia above 
the glove compartment and is marked ”SRS 
AIRBAG”. 
Both airbags will be inflated in the event of a 
moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal 
collision, even if the passenger seat is unoc-
cupied.  Side airbags 
Side airbags are housed inside the back-
rests of the front seats and are designed to 
protect the driver and front passenger in the 
event of a side impact. 
In a side impact, only the airbag on that side 
will be activated, and only then if certain pre-
determined conditions are met such as the 
force and angle of the impact, the speed of 
the car on impact, and at which point on the 
car’s side the impact occurs. 
The sensors, which are fitted in the front 
doors, sense the rise in pressure caused by 
the door panel being pressed in during an 
impact condition. The side airbag trigger will 
be commanded based on the characteris-
tics of this pressure rise.
WARNING
Never secure a rear-facing child seat in 
the right front seat of a car equipped with 
a passenger airbag. Inflation of the airbag 
in the event of an accident could seriously 
injure or kill a child. 
WARNING
• Children 12 and 
under can be killed by 
the airbag
• The back seat is the 
safest place for children
• Never allow a child to stand in front of 
the seat or to sit on the lap of a 
front-seat passenger. Serious injury or 
death could result if the airbag is 
inflated in a collision. 
• Never place anything on the dash or in 
front of the seat as, in addition to being 
a hazard to passengers, this could 
interfere with the function of the airbag 
in the event of an accident. The same 
applies to the mounting of accessories 
on the dash. 
• Keep feet on the floor - never put feet 
up on the fascia, on the seat or out of 
the window. 
• Do not carry anything in your lap. 
IB420
Passenger airbag and driver’s airbag both 
inflated 

29Safety
WARNING
• This car is equipped with side airbags 
and no extra interior trim should be fit-
ted. Failure to observe this warning 
could result in the side airbags not 
inflating as intended and thus not pro-
viding the intended protection either.
• Never place any object in the area that 
would be occupied by the inflated air-
bag.
• For optimum protection, sit upright in 
the seat, with your safety belt correctly 
fastened.
• The sensors for the side airbags are 
fitted in the front doors.
• We advise against doing any work on 
the doors that could affect the mois-
ture barrier in the door or the airbag 
sensors. It is essential that the mois-
ture barrier (thick plastic film) in the 
front door is not damaged in any way.
• Improvement of the anticorrosion 
treatment of the doors should only be 
carried out by an authorized Saab 
dealer. Otherwise there is a risk that 
the side impact sensor and the mois-
ture barrier in the front door could be 
damaged.
• The side airbags will inflate only in the 
event of a side impact; not in the event 
of a front or rear-end collision or of the 
car’s rolling over.
• Damage or wear to the seat cover, or 
the seat seam, in the area of the side 
airbag must immediately be repaired 
by an authorized Saab dealer.
• Do not modify the speaker installation 
in the front doors or install speakers 
other than those specifically approved 
by Saab.
IB1182
Side airbag inflated 
IB1707
Side airbag components 
1 Side airbag 
2 Sensor 
3 Moisture barrier 
4 Label on seat 

30 Safety
AIR BAG warning light
SRS servicing
The SRS must be inspected as part of the 
normal service program but otherwise may 
be regarded as maintenance-free. 
Scrapping or working on airbags 
and belt pretensioners  Frequently asked questions on func-
tion of airbags
Do you still need to wear a
 safety b
elt if air-
bags are fitted? 
Yes, always! The airbag merely supple-
ments the car’s normal safety system. 
Moreover, the airbag will only be actuated in 
a moderate to severe frontal, or near-frontal 
collision, which means, of course, that it pro-
vides no protection in minor frontal colli-
sions, major rear-end or side-on collisions 
or if the car rolls over. 
The safety belts help reduce the chance of 
the car occupants from being thrown around 
and injured inside the car. 
But they also ensure that, if a collision 
occurs in which the airbags are inflated, the 
airbag will make the optimum contact with 
the occupant, i.e. square on from the front. 
If the occupant meets the airbag in an offset 
position, the protection afforded will be 
reduced.
In addition, airbags provide no protection 
against a secondary impact occurring in the 
same incident. So there is no doubt about 
the benefit of wearing safety belts at all 
times.
Do not sit too close to the airbag: it needs 
room to inflate.
The airbag inflates very quickly and power-
fully in order to protect an adult person in a 
serious frontal collision.
WARNING
• If the air bag readiness light stays on 
after you start your vehicle, it means 
the air bag system may not be working 
properly.
• The air bags in your vehicle may not 
inflate in a crash, or they could even 
inflate without a crash.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or oth-
ers, have your vehicle serviced right 
away if the air bag readiness light 
stays on after you start your vehicle.
WARNING
• Under no circumstances may any 
modifications be made that affect the 
steering wheel or the airbag’s electri-
cal circuitry. 
• Before starting any welding work on 
the car, always disconnect the nega-
tive (–) battery lead and cover the con-
ductor. 
• Airbags and belt pretensioners must 
be deployed under controlled condi-
tions before the car is scrapped or any 
of the system’s components are 
removed. Airbags or belt pretension-
ers that have been deployed as a 
result of an accident must be replaced 
by new ones. 
• Airbag-system components must 
never be transferred for use in another 
vehicle. 
• All work involving the scrapping or 
replacement of airbags or belt preten-
sioners must only be carried out by 
knowledgeable personnel.

31Safety
How do I position the seat to leave room for 
the airbag to inflate?
Don’t have your seat too far forward.
Recline the seat back to increase the dis-
tance between you and the airbag. For short 
drivers, special accessory pedal extensions 
are available through your Saab dealer.
Airbags inflate extremely rapidly and with 
great force - to be fast enough to protect an 
adult in the seat. 
When do the front airbags inflate? 
The airbag will only be inflated under certain 
predetermined conditions in a moderate to 
severe frontal, or near-frontal collision, 
depending on such factors as the force and 
angle of the impact, the speed of the car on 
impact, and the resistance to deformation of 
the impacting object. 
The airbag can only be activated once in the 
same incident. 
Do not attempt to drive the car after an 
airbag has been inflated, even if it is possi-
ble. 
What won’t trigger the front airbags? 
The airbag will not be activated in all 
front-end collisions. For instance, if the car 
has hit something relatively soft and yielding 
(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid 
object at a low impact speed, the airbag will 
not necessarily be triggered. 
How loud is the inflation? 
The noise of the inflation is certainly loud, 
but it is very short-lived and will not damage 
your hearing. For a short time afterwards 
you could experience a buzzing noise in 
your ears.
Most people who have experienced it 
cannot remember the noise of the inflation 
at all - all they remember is the noise of the 
crash. 
Can you still use a child seat in the front if a 
passenger airbag is installed? 
Definitely not!
Children 12 and under can be injured or 
killed by the airbag.
The BACK SEAT is the SAFEST place for 
children.
NEVER put a child seat in the front.
Are the smoke and fumes given off when the 
airbag operates at all harmful? 
Most people who have remained in a car 
with little or no ventilation for several min-
utes complained only of minor irritation of 
the throat and eyes. Avoid as far as possible 
getting dust on your skin as there is a risk of 
skin irritation.
If this trouble persists, you should consult a 
doctor.
If you suffer from asthma, the incident may 
bring on an attack, in which case you should 
follow the normal procedure advised by 
your doctor. It is advisable to consult a 
doctor afterwards.
WARNING
When an airbag is inflated there is dust in 
the air.
Because the dust sometimes contains 
particles of a substance resembling dish 
detergent, the following precautions 
should be taken: 
• As soon as possible, wash any 
exposed skin using a mild soap and 
water. 
• If there is irritation of the eyes, flush 
them liberally with clean water for at 
least 20 minutes. 

32 Safety
What should I do if the AIR-BAG warning 
light comes on? 
If the warning light is on, it means that a fault 
has been detected in the system. The 
airbag cannot be relied on to operate as 
intended and it might even be activated 
erroneously. You should therefore take the 
car to an authorized Saab dealer as soon as 
possible.

34 Security
Doors
Door handles
Pull the handle to open the door. 
If the door is stuck (e.g. if frozen), hold the 
handle from above to secure a better grip.
Central locking 
Key / Remote control 
The key unit consists of a mechanical key 
with integrated remote control. 
The mechanical key is used for manual 
locking and unlocking.
The remote control is used for remote lock-
ing and unlocking.
The key fits all the car’s locks
The key supplied with the car has a code 
number on a black plastic tag that needs to 
be quoted for ordering additional keys. You 
should therefore make a careful note of the 
number. 
The key contains a unique electronic code 
for your car. When the key is inserted in the 
ignition, the code is checked. If it matches, 
the car can be started. 
Two keys are supplied with the car. It is pos-
sible to have up to four at one time that are 
coded for your car. If one is lost, contact 
your authorized Saab dealer to obtain a 
replacement. 
NOTE: For this reason, we strongly advise 
you to take two keys with you on long jour-
neys and to keep them separate. If all keys 
are lost, it will be necessary to replace costly 
electronic components as well as the keys 
and remotes. This loss and replacement 
cost is not covered by the new car warranty.
If an additional key is to be added, all of the 
original keys must be brought to the dealer 
so that the control module can ”learn” to rec-
ognize the new components.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a 
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the 
ignition key. A child or others could be 
badly injured or even killed.
IB447
Door handle  Key / Remote control
1To lock
2 To unlock
3 Opening the trunk (9-5 Sedan)
Unlocking the tailgate (9-5 Wagon) 
IB1524
3 2
1

35Security
To check the number of keys that are pro-
grammed for the car; see page 45.
Electronic starting interlock 
(immobilizer)
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic starting interlock is acti-
vated and the car is thus immobilized, see 
also page 42.
Reprogramming lock system 
functions
Certain lock system functions can be repro-
grammed by your authorized Saab work-
shop; see page 261.
Locking/unlocking the car 
When the car is locked and unlocked the 
theft alarm is also affected.
Remote locking (1) 
Press   once on the control: all doors 
locked.
The hazard warning lights will flash once 
and the horn chirps once to confirm.
The tailgate cannot be opened now from 
inside using the switch on the driver´s door.
Remote unlocking (2) 
Press   once on the control: the driver´s 
door is unlocked. Press a second time to 
unlock the rest of the doors.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice 
and the horn chirps twice to confirm.
NOTE
The key contains delicate electronics.
• Do not expose it to water.
• Avoid rough handling.
• Do not place the key where it may be 
subjected to high temperatures, e.g. 
on the instrument panel.
• The key may malfunction if it becomes 
very cold. Warm it in your hands for a 
couple of minutes.
Never open the key except to change the 
battery. For changing the battery, see 
page 37.
WARNING
The remote control also works from inside 
the car. Therefore, hold the key in such a 
way that the buttons are not unintention-
ally pressed when the key is turned, or 
inserted or removed from the ignition 
switch.
Otherwise, the doors may be unintention-
ally locked or the tailgate unlocked. On 
Sedan models, the trunk may even be 
opened.
IB1557
Locking/unlocking by remote control.
1To lock 
2 To unlock 

36 Security
Locking by key (1) 
When the car is locked and unlocked the 
theft alarm is also affected.
Turn the key clockwise: all doors locked. 
The trunk lid/tailgate cannot be opened now 
from inside using the switch on the driver’s 
door. 
Unlocking by key (2) 
Turn the key counterclockwise once: the 
driver´s door will unlock.
Turn the key counterclockwise twice: all 
doors, but not trunk lid/tailgate, unlocked. 
The central locking can also be operated 
from inside the car by means of the   
switch on the center console.
• To lock all doors: press the symbol side of 
the switch once.
• To unlock the driver´s door: press the 
switch once.
• To unlock all doors: press the switch 
twice.
This switch is inoperative when the car is 
locked from the outside.
The interior locking buttons on each door 
affect only the respective door.
If the car is left with the doors open, the inte-
rior lighting and the courtesy lights in the 
doors will be switched off automatically after 
20 minutes, to prevent a flat battery. In such 
cases the electrically operated seats will not 
function.
WARNING
Having the doors locked when you are 
driving will reduce the likelihood of:
• Passengers, especially children, 
opening doors and falling out of the 
car.
• Intruders entering the car when it is 
moving slowly or stopped.
• Being thrown out of the car in a crash.
IB451
Switch for operation of central locking 
IB1555
2
1
Locking/unlocking by key
1To lock 
2 To unlock 

37Security
Changing the key battery
When the battery voltage in the key falls 
below a predetermined level the SID will 
issue the following message: ”REPLACE 
KEY BATTERY”. Press the CLEAR button 
on the SID to acknowledge this message. 
You must then replace the battery without 
delay to avoid malfunctions. 
The life of the battery is normally 4 years. 
After changing the battery you must press 
the unlocking button of the key four times (or 
until the door locks cycle) while the car is 
within the range of the key in order for the 
control module to recognize the remote. 
Battery type: Panasonic CR 1632, 3V lith-
ium. The battery type is stamped on the 
inside of the battery cover. Avoid putting fin-
gerprints on the flat sides of the battery. 
Dispose of the old battery properly when 
you buy a new one. These batteries contain 
substances that are environmentally 
hazardous.
Child safety locks
The rear doors are equipped with child 
safety locks that are operated by means of 
a catch adjacent to the door lock. 
Insert a key and turn the catch 45° clockwise 
or counterclockwise as indicated by the 
label on the door. 
When the child safety catch is in the locked 
position, the door cannot be opened from 
the inside.
For the tailgate safety lock, see page  40.
WARNING
Keep the battery and small parts of the 
key out of the reach of children.
IB1288
Change of battery, remote control
Open the battery cover using a thin round tool 
(1.5 mm or less) pressed inwards and down-
wards
IB455
Child safety lock on rear doors 

38 Security
Trunk lid lock, 9-5 Sedan
The trunk lid lock is independent of the cen-
tral-locking system. The trunk lid release 
switch on the driver’s door is inoperative 
when the car is locked from the outside or 
moving at a speed greater than 2.7 mph 
(4 km/h).
Unlocking
The trunk lid is unlocked using:
• The   button on the key
• The trunk lid switch on the inside of the 
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at 
a standstill) or
• Manually, using the key in the trunk lid 
lock.
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
The trunk lid switch on the driver’s door is 
inoperative when the car is locked.
If the alarm is activated (the car is locked), 
the alarm will sound if the trunk lid is 
unlocked with a key. However, if the trunk lid 
is opened using remote unlocking, the 
alarm will not be triggered.
Locking
The trunk lid release is locked automatically 
when closed.
IB457
Trunk lid switch 
IB1561
Opening the trunk with the key, 
9-5 Sedan

39Security
Tailgate, 9-5 Wagon
The tailgate is not unlocked when the other 
car doors are unlocked. The tailgate button 
on the driver’s door is inoperative when the 
car is locked or moving at a speed greater 
than 4 km/h.
Unlocking
The tailgate is unlocked using: 
• The   button on the key
• The tailgate switch on the inside of the 
driver’s door (if the car is unlocked and at 
a standstill) or
• Manually, using the key in the trunk lock. 
Remote unlocking is confirmed by the direc-
tion indicators flashing three times.
If the alarm is activated (the car is locked), 
the alarm will sound if the tailgate is 
unlocked with a key. However, if the tail-
gate is opened using remote unlocking, the 
alarm will not be triggered. 
Locking
The tailgate is locked using:
• The   button on the key
• The   button on the centre console
• The key in the driver’s door.
IB1562
Unlocking the tailgate with a key, 
9-5 Wagon

40 Security
Safety lock 
The tailgate has a safety lock which is acti-
vated with a button to the right of the tailgate 
lock. 
When the button is moved to the left, the tail-
gate can only be opened from the outside, 
assuming that the locking button (LOCK) by 
the inside opening handle has not been 
pushed in. 
WARNING
If small children are carried in the rear 
seat, the safety locks on the tailgate and 
rear doors should be activated to prevent 
unintentional opening from the inside.
IB1225
Safety lock
IB1223
Locking button by the tailgate inside open-
ing handle.
The tailgate is locked when closed if the 
button LOCK is pushed in before the tail-
gate is closed.

41Security
Car alarm 
The car alarm (anti-theft system) is acti-
vated/deactivated when the car is 
locked/unlocked by the remote control or by 
the key, see page  35.
The antenna for the alarm system is located 
in the center console. 
All the doors plus trunk lid/tailgate and hood 
are monitored by microswitches, and win-
dow-glass sensors will trigger the alarm if 
any glass is broken. 
Your Saab 9-5 is equipped with an Elec-
tronic starting interlock (immobilizer), see 
page 42 for details. 
The car alarm is armed 10 seconds after the 
car has been locked by the remote control. 
During this ten-second delay period, the 
doors, trunk lid/tailgate and hood may still 
be opened without the alarm being trig-
gered. 
The LED indicator on the instrument panel 
fascia will be on continuously during this 
period, at the end of which it will start to flash 
(once every other second). 
If a door or the trunk lid/tailgate or hood has 
been left open when the car is locked, the 
LED on the fascia will flash (three times per 
second) for ten seconds to indicate this.
Check to ensure that all the doors, plus 
trunk lid/tailgate and hood, are closed prop-
erly.
If the fault persists (LED flashing when 
renewed attempt made to activate the car 
alarm by remote control), lock the car using 
the key instead. The car alarm will not have 
been activated and you should get in touch 
with an authorized Saab dealer.
To avert inconvenience caused by the 
alarm being triggered inadvertently, make 
sure that anyone else using the car is famil-
iar with how both the car alarm and the lock-
ing system work.
If the alarm is tripped (the direction indica-
tors are flashing and the siren is on) it can 
be turned off by unlocking the car using the 
 button.
WARNING
Leaving children or pets unattended in a 
locked car is dangerous. It is also danger-
ous to leave children in a vehicle with the 
ignition key. A child or others could be 
badly injured or even killed.
IB1524
3 2
1
Remote control 
1 Activate/lock 
2 Deactivate/unlock 
3 Unlock trunk/tailgate

42 Security
Activating the car alarm 
The car alarm cannot be activated if the 
driver’s door is open or if the ignition switch 
is in ON position.
If, on the other hand, one of the other doors 
or the trunk or hood is open or opened and 
not closed again during the 10-seconds 
delay period, it will be excluded from the 
alarm function. 
If it is then closed, a new delay period of ten 
seconds will start, and the door (or trunk or 
hood) will once again be secured by the 
alarm system. 
As usual, the LED will be on continuously 
during the new delay period and will start to 
flash once every other second after the 
10-seconds period has elapsed. 
Window-glass sensor
The car-alarm system incorporates a 
sensor that monitors the window glass for 
the sound of breakage. The sensor is fitted 
inside the rear dome light. 
To avoid false alarms, such as the alarm 
being triggered by noise from passers by 
when the windows have been left open, or 
when children or petsare left inside the car, 
the sensor can be temporarily disabled. 
To disable the sensor 
To disable the sensor, first ensure that the 
ignition has been switched off and key 
removed from the switch. Then, press and 
hold the NIGHT PANEL button until ”DOOR 
ALARM ONLY” appears on the SID and a 
chime sounds. The car alarm must now be 
activated within three minutes, or the glass 
sensor will become active again. 
The glass sensor will be enabled again 
automatically when the car is next unlocked. 
The sensor can also be enabled again by 
repeating the procedure for disabling it. 
When the sensor has been enabled, ”FULL 
THEFT ALARM” will appear on the SID. 
If a fault is detected in the glass sensor, 
”SERVICE THEFT ALARM” will appear on 
the SID. 
Electronic starting interlock 
(immobilizer) 
When the key is inserted in the ignition, a 
signal is sent to the receiver. If the signal is 
verified, the engine can be started. 
Each time the key is removed from the igni-
tion, the electronic immobilizer is activated. 
This means that the car cannot be started 
without the correct key inserted in the igni-
tion and the immobilizer thus deactivated. 
If a fault is detected (e.g. in the transmitter) 
”KEY NOT ACCEPTED” will appear on the 
SID. 
In this case, you can still start the car if you 
turn the ignition key to ON and press one of 
the buttons on the key (providing that the 
receiver gets the right signal from the key).
Take the car to an authorized Saab dealer to 
have the system checked. 
The LED double-flashes when the car is 
immobilized.

43Security
Alarm signals 
When the car alarm is armed, it will be trig-
gered if any door, or the trunk lid or hood, is 
opened or if a window is broken.
The alarm will also be triggered if an attempt 
is made to bypass or short-circuit the igni-
tion switch, or to disconnect the battery. 
If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm 
signals will be set off: 
• Flashing of hazard warning lights for five 
minutes. 
• Siren wailing for 30 seconds. 
The alarm signals will stop if the alarm is 
deactivated (car unlocked) during the alarm 
period.
The alarm siren has a long-life battery 
(approx. 10 years), see ”SERVICE THEFT 
ALARM”, on page 45. When the battery 
goes dead, the siren must be replaced: it is 
not possible to change the batteries. 
Panic-function
In the car alarm system is a function called 
"Panic-function". 
To activate panic function:
• Push and hold one of the buttons on the 
key for 2 seconds. Or, if you are sitting 
inside the car, push the LOCK-switch on 
the center console for 2 seconds.
These actions will trigger the alarm (hazard 
warning lights and siren).
To deactivate panic function:
• Push one of the buttons on the key, push 
the LOCK-switch in the center console, 
turn the key in the driver´s door or turn the 
ignition to ON.
When the panic-function is activated the car 
will be locked/unlocked depending upon 
which button was pushed.
When the ignition is ON the panic-function 
cannot be activated.
NOTE
• It is possible to inadvertently deacti-
vate the car alarm and at the same 
time unlock the car, if the button on the 
key is pressed by mistake when the 
car is still within its range. 
• When locking the car by remote con-
trol in extremely cold weather, it is 
advisable to check that the lock 
system has operated properly. To do 
so, check that the interior locking but-
tons are all down.
If not, unlock and relock the car again. 

44 Security
Overview of functions 
Alarm signals may differ between model variants for different coun-
tries.
Some of the car-alarm functions can be reprogrammed – con-
sult your Saab dealer for further details (see page  261).
Locking/ 
activation  Hazard warning lights flash once and the horn 
chirps once.
The LED will come on for 10 seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation  Hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn 
chirps twice.
The LED will come on for two seconds.
Unlocking/
deactivation of 
trunk lid/tailgate 
alarm 
Hazard warning lights flash three times and the 
horn chirps three times.
The LED will flash three times per second for 10 
seconds.
Alarm triggered  Hazard warning lights flash for 5 min.
Siren wails for 30 seconds.
To switch off the alarm, deactivate the system in 
the normal way (unlocking).
Window-glass 
sensor  The sensor detects if any window is broken and 
triggers the alarm. 
To disable the sensor, see page 42.
Key  TThe range of the key is normally 5-10 yds. 
(5-10 metres), although it can be substantially 
more than this in ideal conditions.
If the key is not working, it may be because the 
code signal has not been synchronized with that 
in the control module for the car alarm. To rectify 
this, press the unlock button on the key at least 
four times in quick succession. When it is recog-
nized, the door locks will cycle.
If a key is lost, the new one will have to be pro-
grammed (all keys must be present) to match the 
car’s unique security code. Get in touch with an 
authorized Saab dealer.
Battery for key The battery for the key will normally have a life of 
4 years. When the battery needs changing, 
”REPLACE KEY BATTERY” will appear on the 
SID.
After fitting a new battery, press the unlock but-
ton on the key at least four times (when the car 
is in its range) in succession, so that the car 
alarm can recognize the signals from the trans-
mitter.
Car-battery 
voltage  If the battery is disconnected while the alarm is 
active (car is locked), for example during an 
attempt to steal the car, the alarm will be trig-
gered.

45Security
Overview of LED signals and SID messages
Some signals may differ between model variants for different 
countries.
Status LED signal
Activation (during 10-second delay). Comes on for 10 seconds.
Alarm activated (after delay). Flashes once every other 
second.
Deactivation. Comes on for 2 seconds.
Alarm not activated. Off.
Door, trunk lid/tailgate or hood open 
or opened during delay period. Flashes three times per sec-
ond for 10 seconds.
Unlocking the trunk lid/tailgate. Flashes three times per sec-
ond for 10 seconds.
Closing of door, trunk lid/tailgate or 
hood after delay period. Comes on for 10 seconds.
Car immobilized but not locked.
Car alarm not activated. Flashes twice at three sec-
onds intervals.
Fault in a switch serving doors, hood 
or trunk lid. Flashing (instead of being 
on continuously) during 
delay period.
SID message Reason/action
SERVICE THEFT ALARM Probably a fault in one of the sensors 
or the alarm siren.
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
KEY NOT ACCEPTED Fault in key transmitter or in igni-
tion-switch receiver.
Turn ignition switch to ON and press 
the unlock button on the key. Start 
the engine. 
Have the car checked by an autho-
rized Saab dealer.
REPLACE KEY BATTERY Fit a new battery in the key, see page 
37.
DOOR ALARM ONLY Window-glass sensor disabled.
FULL THEFT ALARM Window-glass sensor in circuit.
• REMOTE KEY
• TRANSPONDR Turn the ignition key to position ON 
and then press the button for open-
ing the trunk lid. SID displays the 
number of keys and transmitters 
(transponders) coded to the car.

46 Security
Canada only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is 
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not 
cause harmful interference, and (2) must accept any interference 
received, including interference that may cause undesired oper-
ation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manu-
facturer could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may 
not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.

47Instruments and controls
Instruments and 
controls  
Indicator and warning 
lights .................................   48 
Instruments ........................   54 
Trip computer SID..............    57 
Switches .............................  63 
Automatic climate control 
(ACC).................................  70 
ECON OFF ºF
ºC
ECON OFF
CLEAR SET
IB1082
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
RADIO
  BAND
WBAS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR

48 Instruments and controls
Indicator and warning 
lights 
A number of indicator and warning lights will 
come on when the ignition is switched on 
prior to starting. Under normal conditions, 
these should go out a few seconds after the 
engine has started (see page 54). 
Warning, oil pressure 
(engine oil)  
This light will come on together with   if 
the engine oil pressure is dangerously low. 
If the light flashes or comes on while you are 
driving, stop the car, switch off the engine 
and check the engine oil level (see page 
193).  
NOTE
Under no circumstances must the car be 
driven when the warning light is on. Low 
oil pressure can result in serious engine 
damage. 
Main instrument panel 
1 Tachometer
2 Indicator and warning lights 
3 Speedometer 
4 Indicator and warning lights 
5 Pressure gauge
6 Fuel gauge 
7 Engine temperature gauge 
8 Trip meter reset button 
9 Odometer and trip meter 
20
30
40
50 60 70 80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
240 220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
10
9
4 532
7
86
1
IB1690

49Instruments and controls
Warning, charging  
This light will come on together with   if 
the battery is discharging. If it comes on 
while you are driving, stop the car as soon 
as possible and switch off the engine.
Check the alternator drive belt (see page  
202). If the belt has broken, the engine may 
overheat (cooling system will not function 
properly), the battery will not be charged, 
the A/C compressor will not run and power 
assistance for the steering will be lost.
Brake warning light 
This light will come on together with   if 
there is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-
voir (see pages 198 / 198).
If the ABS warning light is on at the same 
time, the ABS system may be inoperative 
because of a fault (see ”Anti-lock brake 
warning”, page 50). 
Parking brake warning 
light 
This light will show when the parking brake 
is on (see page 185).
If the car is driven with the parking brake still 
on,   will also come on and a chime will 
sound. 
The parking brake is mechanical and oper-
ates on the rear wheels.  
WARNING
Never drive the car when these warning 
lights are on. Danger of brake failure! 
Have the brake system checked by an 
authorized Saab dealer. 
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when 
parking, see page  185.
• Always apply the parking brake before 
removing the ignition key.
• Do not apply the parking brake while 
the car is moving.

50 Instruments and controls
Anti-lock brake warning 
This light will come on if a fault has occurred 
in the ABS system.
On certain variants   and   as well 
as   can light up to indicate a fault in the 
electronic brake force distribution system 
(distribution of the brake pressure between 
the front and rear wheels). 
Conventional braking without the ABS func-
tion will still be available.
For safety reasons, stop the car and check 
the level of the brake fluid (see page 198).
If the level is normal, depress the brake 
pedal firmly two or three times. Now check 
the level again. If the level is still normal, you 
may drive the car, with considerable cau-
tion, to the nearest authorized Saab dealer 
to have the brake system checked.  
Airbag warning light  
This light together with   will come on if 
a potentially serious fault has occurred in 
the airbag system.
The light will come on for about three sec-
onds when the ignition switch is turned to 
the Start or Drive position. It should go out 
after the engine has started. 
WARNING
• If the ABS is inoperative, there is a 
danger of the rear wheels locking up 
on hard braking.
• If the level of brake fluid in the reser-
voir is below the MIN mark, the car 
should be towed to an authorized 
Saab dealer.
WARNING
• If the airbag readiness light stays on 
after you start your vehicle, it means 
the airbag system may not be working 
properly. One or more of the following 
conditions may occur:
- Non-deployment of the airbags in the 
event of a crash.
- Deployment of the airbags without a 
crash.
- Deployment of the airbags in 
crashes less severe than intended.
• To help avoid injury to yourself or 
others, have your vehicle serviced 
right away if the airbag readiness light 
stays on after you start your vehicle.

51Instruments and controls
CHECK message indicator 
This light indicates that there is a message 
in the SID. A chime will also sound 
(see page 61). 
Central warning light 
This light will come on and a chime will 
sound if a fault has been detected in any 
system that is critical to safety. Any of the 
following can activate the central warning 
light and alarm: 
• Airbag system.
• Low oil pressure in engine.
• Parking brake is on (when car is moving).
• Brake fluid level low.
• Fault detected in ABS system.
• Electronic brake force distribution (distri-
bution of brake pressure between front 
and rear wheels).
• Engine overheating.
• Alternator not charging properly.
Engine malfunction 
(CHECK ENGINE)
This light indicates a malfunction in the 
fuel-injection or ignition system. The car 
may still be driven with care and with some-
what diminished performance (see page 
151).
Indicator, fuel 
This light comes on when there is less than 
about 2.5 gallons (10 liters) of fuel left in the 
tank.  
WARNING
An illuminated ”Engine malfunction 
(CHECK ENGINE)” indicator light indi-
cates a serious engine-related problem. 
While your car may be able to be driven 
with the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK 
ENGINE)” indicator light illuminated 
(Limp-home mode), you are advised to 
have your car serviced at an authorized 
Saab dealer as soon as possible. 
Continued driving without this problem 
being corrected might cause serious 
further damage to your car and create 
unsafe driving conditions. The operator 
should be prepared to take action if such 
unsafe conditions arise (e.g., apply the 
brakes, disengage transmission, turn off 
the ignition etc.).
NOTE
The car should be checked immediately 
at an authorized Saab dealer to prevent 
more serious faults from arising.
NOTE
If the car runs out of fuel, air can be drawn 
in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause 
the catalytic converter to be damaged by 
overheating. 

52 Instruments and controls
Indicator, cruise control 
This light shows when the cruise-control 
system is active (see page 166). 
Indicator, high beam 
This light shows when the headlights are on 
high beam (see page 63). 
Indicator, rear fog light  
This light shows when the rear fog light is on 
(see page 64). 
The rear fog light is switched off automat-
ically when the engine is switched off. When 
the fog light is next needed, it will have to be 
switched on manually again.
The rear fog light consists of one light so it 
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
Indicator, open door 
If a door has not been closed properly, the 
pictogram will indicate the door concerned 
(or tailgate). 
Indicator, SPORT-mode
This light will come on in cars with automatic 
transmission when the S (SPORT) button 
on the selector lever has been pressed 
(position D, 3, 2 or 1) see page 165. 
In this mode, the gear changes occur later, 
at higher engine revs, giving the engine and 
transmission a sportier feel. 
To cancel the SPORT mode, press the S 
button on the selector lever again. The 
mode is also deselected automatically 
when the selector lever is moved to P or R. 
Indicator, WINTER-mode
This light shows when the WINTER mode 
has been selected in cars with automatic 
transmission (see page 165). 
In the WINTER mode, the car pulls away in 
3rd gear, to help prevent wheelspin on an 
icy road. 
To cancel the WINTER mode, press the W 
button.

53Instruments and controls
Automatic transmission, 
fault indicator
On a car with an automatic transmission, 
this warning symbol is illuminated if a fault 
has been detected in the transmission.
Switch the ignition off and on again to check 
if the fault persists.
Even if the fault persists, it is still possible in 
most cases to drive the car (see page 161).
Have the automatic transmission checked 
by an authorized Saab dealer as soon as 
possible.   
Traction-control-system: 
OFF  
The indicator light goes on when the Trac-
tion Control System is switched off with the 
TCS OFF button.
IMPORTANT: the Traction Control System 
is automatically engaged every time the 
engine is started (see page 169). 
The indicator light also goes on when there 
is a fault in the Traction Control System. In 
this case the light cannot be turned off by 
means of the TCS button. If a fault is indi-
cated, have the system checked by an 
authorized Saab dealer.
See also ”Traction Control System”, on 
page 169.
TCS modulation in 
progress  
The TCS indicator light is located in the 
lower half of the tachometer and will be illu-
minated when TCS regulation is occurring, 
i.e. when there is insufficient traction 
between the tires and the road surface to 
provide the grip required for the accelera-
tion called for. The driver can also sense 
that the engine is not responding normally to 
the accelerator.
Operation of the TCS indicates reduced 
traction between the tires and the road, and 
that extra care should be taken by the driver.
In normal driving, the TCS will improve both 
ride comfort and safety, but must not be 
regarded as a system to enable the driver to 
drive at or maintain a higher rate of speed. 
The same precautions for safe cornering 
and driving on slippery roads must still be 
applied (see page 169).
NOTE
If the control module has actuated the 
Limp-home function for the automatic 
transmission, the car will remain in 4th 
gear when D is selected, making it very 
sluggish. To overcome this, select posi-
tion 2 to prevent unnecessary wear on the 
transmission. The transmission then 
starts in 3rd gear. When the car is moving 
you can select position D or 3.
When the indicator light is on, the car 
must not be driven with a trailer attached.

54 Instruments and controls
Autochecking of lights, 
main instrument panel 
The above warning and indicator lights 
should come on when the ignition is 
switched on prior to starting. They should go 
out after about 3 seconds.
The following lights light up until the engine 
is started, presuming that no fault exists:
• Central warning light  .
• Oil pressure warning light  .
• Warning, charging  .
Instruments
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the engine speed 
in thousands of revolutions per minute. The 
needle may be allowed to enter the broken 
red zone on the dial only for an instant. 
A safety cut-out function (in the fuel system) 
prevents the engine speed from exceeding 
approximately 6,200 rpm. 
Odometer and trip meter 
The odometer records the distance traveled 
in miles on U.S. vehicles and on Canadian 
vehicles the distance indicated is in kilome-
tres, and the trip meter in miles and tenths 
(kilometres and tenths of kilometres on 
Canadian vehicles). 
Reset button 
The reset button has two functions, deter-
mined by whether the ignition is ON or OFF. 
• When the ignition is ON, pressing the 
button will reset the trip meter. 
• When the ignition is OFF, pressing the 
button will bring up the display for 
20 seconds to allow the odometer and 
trip-meter readings to be viewed. 
IB1279
IB340
IB341
1 Cars with automatic transmission

55Instruments and controls
Speedometer (U.S. speedometer 
shown)
The speedometer receives signals from the 
wheel sensors in the ABS system. 
If the NIGHT PANEL mode has been 
selected, the scale will be illuminated up to 
87 mph (140 km/h). The remainder of the 
scale will be illuminated if the speed of the 
car exceeds 84 mph (135 km/h).
Fuel gauge 
Fuel-tank capacity, 18.5 US gal. (70 liters). 
The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left 
in the tank. When this is down to about 
2.5 gal. (10 liters), a warning light on the 
main instrument panel will come on (see 
page 51). 
Use the Saab Information display (SID) to 
check the approximate distance that can be 
traveled on the remaining fuel 
(see page 57).
Temperature gauge 
The temperature gauge shows the temper-
ature of the coolant. The needle should be 
in the middle of the scale when the engine 
is at normal operating temperature. 
If the needle approaches the red zone, 
which can occur in very hot weather or when 
the engine is under a heavy load, drive in the 
highest gear possible, keep the engine revs 
low and avoid shifting down.
If the needle enters the red zone, the   
warning light will come on and an alarm 
chime will sound.  
IB606
IB345
IB343

56 Instruments and controls
Check fuse 15 (radiator fan) in the fuse 
panel under the hood, see page 219. 
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone, 
stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and 
check the coolant level by looking at the 
level visible through the plastic tank - do not 
remove the cap. 
If the coolant level falls below the MIN mark, 
the SID will display the message ”FILL 
COOLANT FLUID”. 
Pressure gauge
The turbo gauge indicates the air volume for 
combustion, which is equivalent to the 
engine load.
At low loads, the needle will move within the 
white zone. At higher loads and during 
heavy acceleration, the needle will enter the 
yellow area. At very high loads (certain var-
iants only) the needle may enter the first part 
of the red zone without indicating that there 
is a fault.
Under certain barometric conditions the 
needle may enter the first part of the red 
zone without necessarily indicating that a 
fault has arisen. 
If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone 
and the engine at the same time loses 
power, because the monitoring system is 
holding the charging pressure down, you 
should contact an authorized Saab dealer. 
If the speed exceeds 143 mph (230 km/h), 
the increase in speed will be limited by the 
lowering of the boost pressure. The pres-
sure gauge then moves towards the middle 
of the orange zone, indicating reduced 
engine output and thus reduces the speed 
of the car as well. 
NOTE
If the needle, despite the above action, 
enters the red zone, stop the car immedi-
ately, let the engine idle.
If the needle stays in the red zone, stop 
the engine.
WARNING
Never open the cap of the expansion tank 
completely when the engine is hot, open 
with care. The pressure in the cool-
ing-system can cause hot coolant and 
steam to be released.
IB344

57Instruments and controls
Selector lever indication
(Automatic transmission) 
The position of the selector lever is indi-
cated on the main instrument panel. 
Trip computer SID  
(Saab Information Display (SID) 
The SID displays CHECK messages and 
has eight trip-computer functions (Saab Car 
Computer, SCC)
The SID is also used by the Audio System. 
SCC
Selecting the function 
Use the   button to scroll through the 
following functions: 
Use the   button to scroll through the 
following functions: 
WARNING
It is strongly recommended that the SID 
settings be changed only when the car is 
stationary. The driver’s attention can 
otherwise easily be distracted from the 
road.
DIST  Distance to destination / Trip 
meter.
ARRIV  Estimated time of arrival.
ALARM Alarm function.
SPD W  Speed warning (chime).
TEMP  Outdoor temperature and Date.
D.T.E.  Estimated range (distance to 
empty fuel tank).
FUEL ∅       Average fuel consumption 
since function last reset.
SPD ∅       Average speed since function 
last reset.
NIGHT PANEL
CLEAR SET
IB346
IB1280

58 Instruments and controls
Outdoor temperature 
(Frost warning)
Regardless of which function has been 
selected, except Night Panel Mode, SID will 
automatically display the outdoor tempera-
ture when it is between 26° and 38°F (-3° 
and +3°C). This also applies if the 
temperature has moved outside the range 
of 21° to 43°F (-6° to +6°C) but is again 
between 26° and 38°F (-3° and +3°C). 
Entering values for the functions 
Values can be entered for the following 
functions: SPD ∅, DIST, ARRIV, ALARM 
and SPD W. 
1 Select the desired function using   or  
. 
2 Press the SET button for at least one 
second (figures start to flash and a 
chime sounds). 
3 Use   or   to increase or decrease 
the value (press CLEAR to reset). 
4 Press SET to record the value.
Setting the date
1 Use   to select TEMP. 
2 Press the SET button for at least one 
second (year starts to flash and a chime 
sounds). 
3 Set the year using   or  . 
4 Touch SET. 
5 Set the month in the same way. 
6 Touch SET. 
7 Set the day in the same way. 
8 Press SET to save the date setting. 
WARNING
Remember that roads can be icy even at 
temperatures of above 38°F (+3°C), 
especially on bridges and stretches of 
road that are sheltered from the sun. 

59Instruments and controls
Turning the Alarm and Speed 
warning on or off 
1 Select the Alarm or Speed-warning 
function. 
2 Press SET to turn on the function.
Press CLEAR to turn off the function. 
When either function is on, ALARM/SPD W 
respectively will be visible on the display. An 
asterisk * will be visible on the far right of the 
display when either function is selected.
The Alarm and Speed-warning settings will 
not be cancelled when the engine is 
switched off. 
When the Alarm has been set to come on at 
a specified time, it will only be activated 
once – it will not come on at the same time 
every day. Press SET to turn it on again. 
The Alarm will continue to beep for one 
minute if not switched off. 
Calculation of arrival time and 
average speed 
The settings must be made before the jour-
ney is started. 
Calculation of arrival time: 
1 Select DIST using the   button. 
2 Set the destination distance. 
3 Press SET. 
When ARRIV is selected during the journey, 
the arrival time based on the average speed 
over the past 20 minutes will be displayed. 
The trip computer will include any stops in 
the calculation of the estimated time of 
arrival.
Press DIST and the distance remaining to 
the destination will be displayed in the same 
way. 
After the distance to destination has 
decreased to zero, the DIST will function as 
a trip meter (see ”Using DIST as a trip 
meter”). The starting value for the trip meter 
will be the last distance set in the DIST 
function. 
Example: The DIST setting was 100 miles. 
Once 100 miles (160 km) has been cov-
ered, the DIST will start to function as a trip 
meter, the initial reading of which will be 
100 miles (160 km). 
Using DIST as a trip meter 
If no value has been set for the DIST func-
tion, DIST will now function as a trip meter 
(indicated by an arrow on the far right of the 
display). 
Press CLEAR to reset the trip meter.
Under 1000 miles the distance will be 
shown in increments of 0.1 miles, 
there-after, the reading will change in incre-
ments of 1.0 mile.
Metric units: for just under a kilometer, the 
distance will be shown in increments of 
10 meters, there-after, the reading will 
change in increments of 100 meters.
When DIST is functioning as a trip meter, 
the ARRIV function will display the current 
time. 

60 Instruments and controls
To calculate the arrival time if a specified 
average speed is maintained 
1 Select DIST using the   button. 
2 Set the distance to be covered. 
3 Press   to select SPD Ø.
4 Set the average speed you intend to 
drive. 
5 Press SET to display the estimated 
arrival time. 
At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø 
and ARRIV functions will display current 
values. If values are set during the journey, 
the new values will be displayed after a 
delay of about 10 seconds. 
Calculating the requisite average speed: 
1 Press   to select DIST. 
2 Set the distance to be covered. 
3 Press   to select ARRIV. 
4 Set the desired arrival time. 
5 Press SET to display the average speed 
you need to maintain to arrive at the 
desired time. 
At the beginning of a journey, the SPD Ø 
and ARRIV functions will display current 
values. If values are set during the journey, 
the new values will be displayed after a 
delay of about 10 seconds.
Resetting values 
To reset the values, press CLEAR for at 
least four seconds. 
The following functions will be reset 
simultaneously: 
• Estimated range on remaining fuel 
(function based on a fuel consumption of 
28 mpg).
• Average fuel consumption.
• Average speed.
• Arrival time (function based on current 
speed).
Programmed values for DIST, ALARM and 
SPD W will not be reset (see the respective 
function). 

61Instruments and controls
CHECK messages 
When the engine is started, CHECKING will 
appear on the display for about four sec-
onds, while the SID checks are being per-
formed. 
When a CHECK message is generated 
while the car is being driven, a chime will 
sound, INFO DISPL will illuminate on on the 
main instrument panel, and the message 
will appear on the SID. The number of mes-
sages that can be displayed by the SID 
varies with the specification of the car. 
If more than one CHECK message has 
been generated, the + symbol will appear to 
the left of the text on the display. The mes-
sages appear in order of priority. 
If a new fault occurs while another message 
is being displayed, the message relating to 
the new one will appear for 10 seconds, 
after which the display will return to the ear-
lier one. 
Press CLEAR once to acknowledge a mes-
sage, whereupon it will be cleared from the 
display. It will not be displayed again before 
the ignition has been switched off and then 
on again. 
The following messages may be displayed: 
1  This message will be displayed approxi-
mately 600 miles (1,000 km) before the next 
scheduled service is due, or when 365 days 
have elapsed since the last service. The 
message should be cleared at the time of that 
service (see the Saab Warranties & Service 
Record Booklet). 
This message can also be deleted by first 
briefly pressing the CLEAR button, then 
depressing it a second time for at least eight 
seconds until ”SERVICE” appears on the dis-
play and a chime sounds. The message can 
only be deleted when it is shown on the SID. 
Night panel
To improve night-driving conditions inside 
the car, the Night Panel mode can be 
selected. In this mode, the amount of infor-
mation displayed is reduced, and only the 
most important instruments and displays 
will be illuminated. 
When the Night Panel button is pressed, 
only the speedometer will be illuminated (up 
to the 87-mph or 140-km/h graduation), all 
the other instruments illumination being 
extinguished and their needles moved to 
zero. Both the SID and the ACC displays will 
be extinguished and the backlighting for 
switches and other controls will be dimmed. 
Note: All indicator and warning lights, 
together with the display of CHECK mes-
sages, will operate as normal, except ”Out-
door temperature (Frost warning)”, see 
page 58. 
Message  See
page
FRONT LIGHT FAILURE   205
REAR LIGHT FAILURE   208
FOG LIGHT FAILURE   209
BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE   208
WASHER FLUID LEVEL LOW   204
FILL COOLANT FLUID   196
REPLACE KEY BATTERY   37
KEY NOT ACCEPTED   45
SERVICE THEFT ALARM   45
TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING   162
TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP  154
TIME FOR SERVICE 1)  242

62 Instruments and controls
The following conditions will wake up the 
respective displays in the Night-Panel 
mode: 
• Setting of the Audio system, SID or ACC 
(display comes on for ten seconds). 
• CHECK message generated in the SID. 
• High engine revs cause the rev counter to 
be illuminated until the engine speed has 
fallen again. 
• If the quantity of fuel remaining falls below 
4 gallons (15 liters), the fuel gauge will be 
illuminated. 
• If the engine temperature rises above nor-
mal, the temperature gauge will be illumi-
nated. 
• If the speed of the car exceeds 84 mph 
(135 km/h), the entire speedometer will 
be illuminated. 
• In cars with automatic transmission, if the 
selector lever is moved from D to position 
3, 2 or 1, the selector indication on the 
main instrument panel will be illuminated. 
To restore the displays and lighting to the 
normal mode, press the Night-Panel button. 
Units and language versions
The SID has four sets of units: 
CHECK messages can be displayed in six 
language options: English, Swedish, 
German, French, Italian and Spanish. 
Selecting units and language 
1 Press CLEAR and SET simultaneously 
for four seconds until a chime sounds. 
2 Press   or   to select the required 
units. 
3 Touch SET.
4 Press   or   to select the required 
language. 
5 Touch SET.
Clock 
Set the clock by means of the two buttons 
under the digital clock on the left of the dis-
play. 
When the ignition key is in the OFF position 
or removed, the clock can be illuminated 
(approx. 10 seconds) by pressing one of 
the SID buttons (not the NIGHT PANEL but-
ton).
METRIC IMP. 1  IMP. 2  US 
km miles miles miles 
km/h mph  mph mph 
liters  UK gal  UK gal  US gal 
°C °F  °C °F 
24-hour 12-hour  12-hour 12-hour 
IB1156
CLEAR

63Instruments and controls
Switches  
Daytime running lights
The parking lights and daytime running 
lights come on automatically when the igni-
tion switch is ON. 
Note to owners in the U.S.: If you do not 
want Daytime Running Lights, this feature 
can be disconnected: switch off the engine 
and remove fuse No. 35 (see page 217).
Note to owners in Canada: Daytime Run-
ning Lights must not be disconnected as 
they are a Canadian Federal legal require-
ment.
Parking lights
The parking lights can be switched on 
regardless of the position of the ignition 
switch. Do not use parking lights when driv-
ing.
Note: The lighting switch must be in parking 
light or headlight position (low beam posi-
tion only) to operate the fog lights (see page 
66).
Headlights
The headlights come on automatically when 
the ignition is ON and go off when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the LOCK position. 
The parking lights, however, can be on 
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-
tion. 
High/low beam
To switch between high and low beam, lift 
the control stalk fully towards you 
(position 2). When the high beam is on, the 
indicator on the main instrument panel will 
be illuminated.
High beam flasher 
The headlights come on to high beam when 
the stalk is lifted to the first spring-loaded 
position (position 1) and remain on until the 
stalk is released. 
IB1594
12
1 High beam signal
2 High/low beam switching
IB350
Light switches 

64 Instruments and controls
Courtesy Headlight Feature
A delay function allows the headlights to 
remain on low beam for about 30 seconds 
after the driver’s door has been closed. 
To activate this function, 
• Switch off the ignition and remove the key
• Open the driver’s door
• Pull the high/low beam control stalk 
towards the steering wheel like you are 
flashing the high beam, see page  63. The 
low beam headlights will now come on 
immediately after the driver’s door has 
been closed (within 30 seconds) and will 
remain on for about 30 seconds.
The length of time for this function can be 
adjusted by your authorized Saab dealer. Rear fog light
Press the button to switch on the rear fog 
light, which will only come on if the head-
lights are on.
The rear fog light will go off automatically 
when the engine is switched off. When the 
fog light is next needed, it will have to be 
switched on manually again. 
The rear fog light consists of one light so it 
should not be mistaken for brake lights.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the 
use of rear fog lights.
WARNING
In poor visibility, avoid following the tail 
lights of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle 
stops suddenly, you may be unable to 
avoid a collision and therefore risk injury 
to yourself and others. 
IB351
Rear fog light

65Instruments and controls
Instrument illumination
The brightness of the instrument illumina-
tion can be varied by means of the dimmer 
switch adjacent to the headlight switch. 
(See also Night panel on page 61).
In daylight or other equally bright light, the 
instrument and switch illumination is auto-
matically extinguished.
Turn signal and lane change indica-
tors
To switch on the turn signals/lane change 
indicators, move the stalk up or down.
The stalk has fixed positions for indicating a 
right or left turn, and the indicators are can-
celled automatically (stalk returns to off 
position).
The stalk also has an intermediate, 
spring-loaded position that is useful for sig-
nalling when changing lanes or passing.
The respective indicator lights on the instru-
ment panel flash at the same frequency as 
the direction indicators.
IB352
1
0
2
IB1595
Turn signal and lane change indicators 
1 Right indicators 
2 Left indicators 
Instrument illumination

66 Instruments and controls
Front fog lights
The front fog lights can be activated in both 
dimmed headlight and parking light posi-
tions. Fog lights should only be used in poor 
visibility conditions.
Make sure you are familiar with the appli-
cable provincial/state law regarding the 
use of fog lights. 
Reversing lights
The reversing lights come on automatically 
when reverse gear is engaged or selected 
with the ignition switched on.
Hazard warning lights
When this button is pressed, all the turn 
signal indicators and a symbol in the button 
flash simultaneously. If the ignition is on, 
both indicator lights on the instrument panel 
will also flash. 
If the hazard warning lights are left on for 
some time, the flasher frequency will be 
reduced to save the battery.
Hazard warning lights should only be used 
if the car constitutes a hazard to other road 
users.
WARNING
Switch on the hazard flashers if the car 
has to be left at the roadside on account 
of an accident, engine trouble or a punc-
ture. If you carry a warning triangle or 
flares, they should be set up along side of 
the road 300 ft. (100 m) behind your vehi-
cle. If the car is not clearly visible (e.g. 
over the brow of a hill or bridge), place the 
triangle/flare even further back. 
IB355
IB356
Hazard warning lights 

67Instruments and controls
Interior lighting 
The interior lighting consists of one dome 
light in the front and one in the back, a 
map-reading light in the front, two reading 
lights in the back, floor courtesy lights in the 
front (in some model variants) and door 
courtesy lights on all doors. 
The courtesy lights come on automatically 
when the respective door is opened. Each 
reading light has its own switch adjacent to 
the lamp.
The switch for the dome lights is on the front 
overhead panel. When the switch is in the 
mid-position (door-activated), the interior 
lighting will come on: 
• When the car is unlocked from the out-
side.
• When any door is opened.
• When the ignition key is withdrawn from 
the ignition switch.
When the switch on the overhead panel is in 
the mid-position, the lighting is switched off 
automatically 30 seconds after the last door 
has been closed or when the ignition is 
switched ON. 
There is also a light in the sun visors. The 
light comes on when the cover over the 
vanity mirror is opened. 
When the ignition is OFF, if a door has been 
left open for 20 minutes, the interior lighting 
will be switched off automatically to save the 
battery. 
Luggage-compartment lighting
The luggage-compartment lighting comes 
on automatically when the trunk is opened 
and goes out when the trunk is closed. 
The lighting will also be switched off auto-
matically after 20 minutes if the trunk has 
been left open. 
1
2
3
IB357
1 Interior lighting on continuously 
2 Lighting comes on when a door is opened 
3 Lighting always off 
12
1
IB358
1 Reading lights 
2 Dome light 

68 Instruments and controls
Wipers and washers  
There are three intermittent wiper positions.
Moving the control stalk to the 
spring-loaded position between 0 and 2 will 
produce a single sweep of the wipers.
The wipers are designed for optimal clean-
ing at all driving speeds. At higher speeds, 
it may be possible to detect a slight ”sweep-
ing” sound. This may be due to the 
increased air pressure on the blades at 
higher speeds.
Washers 
When the washers are operated, the wipers 
will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on 
how long the washers were kept on. If the 
speed of the car is less than 12 mph 
(20 km/h), the wipers will make an addi-
tional sweep after 9 seconds. 
Headlight wipers
The headlight wipers will operate at the 
same time as the windshield washers are 
activated. The headlights cannot be wiped 
separately.
IB359
0
4
1
2
3
0 OFF 
1 Intermittent operation
2 Low speed 
3 High speed 
4 Washers 
1
2
IB569
Control for setting wiper delay
1 Long delay
2 Short delay

69Instruments and controls
Rear-window wiper (9-5 Wagon)
The rear-window wiper and washer are 
operated with the same stalk switch as 
used for washing and wiping the windshield 
and headlights.
This stalk has two additional switches, 
ON/OFF  and .
The ON position provides intermittent wip-
ing.
The   position provides washing and 
wiping. After a few sweeps the wiper stops 
or reverts to intermittent wiping, if this has 
been chosen. About 15 seconds after com-
pletion of the washing/wiping of the rear 
window, the wiper makes a single sweep to 
wipe away any remaining washer fluid.
A spring-loaded position between the OFF 
and ON positions allows for a single sweep 
of the rear-window wiper.
Intermittent wiping of the rear window 
occurs when reverse gear is engaged if the 
windshield wipers are in position 1, 2 or 3, 
see page  68.
2
1
IB1207
Rear-window wiper
1 Intermittent wiping
2 Washers

70 Instruments and controls
Automatic climate 
control (ACC) 
The ACC system automatically works to 
maintain the desired temperature inside the 
car.
The system will achieve the desired temper-
ature in the quickest possible way. Note that 
selecting a higher or lower temperature than 
that desired will not speed up the process. 
For the ACC system to be most effective, all 
windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be 
closed. 
Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an 
inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the 
windshield. The air flows through a filter 
upstream of the ACC system before deliv-
ery to the cabin. Cabin air is evacuated via 
openings in the rear parcel shelf and then 
through outlets on either side of the car 
behind the rear bumper.
The incoming air is treated in three stages: 
first it passes through a filter; it is then dehu-
midified and cooled and, finally, if required, 
heated.
The filter is a combined particle and char-
coal filter. It is so efficient that levels of nox-
ious substances such as benzene and tolu-
ene are also reduced.
To reduce the likelihood of misting on the 
insides of the windows, the glass should be 
cleaned with a quality window cleaner. How 
often this will need to be done depends on 
how clean the air is – if there are smokers in 
the car, cleaning will need to be done more 
frequently. 
AUTO
ECON OFF
AUTO
ºF
ºC ºF
ºC
ECON OFF
IB367
91
5
4
2
36
87
ACC panel 
1 Temperature setting: LH side 
2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically 
3 Manual setting of fan speed 
4 Manual setting of air distribution 
5 Rear-window heating: ON/OFF 
6 Recirculation: ON/OFF 
7 A/C compressor: ON/OFF 
8 ACC system: ON/OFF 
9 Temperature setting: RH side 

71Instruments and controls
The system has five sensors: 
• Outdoor temperature sensor.
• Interior temperature sensor.
• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the 
fascia).
• Two blended-air temperature sensors 
(mounted inside the front floor vents).
Caution If anything is placed over the sun 
sensor, the ACC system will not function 
properly. 
Panel vents 
The panel vents swivel universally, so that 
air can be directed as desired. In winter, for 
instance, the outer vents can be directed 
onto the door windows for enhanced 
demisting. 
The flow of air through the panel vents can 
be controlled individually for each vent by 
means of the adjacent control. The climate 
control system works best if the panel vents 
are open. If you find the air cold or that it is 
draughty, start by directing the air away 
from the body. If the center vent is aimed up, 
it will cool the interior temperature sensor 
and you may need to adjust ACC up or 
down, depending upon temperature 
desired.
IB362
Panel vent 
IB368
1
2
1 Interior-temperature sensor 
2 Sun sensor 

72 Instruments and controls
Temperature control 
The cabin is divided into two temperature 
zones: 
• The driver’s zone.
• The passenger zone (front and rear 
seats).
The desired temperature can be set 
between 58 and 82°F (15 and 27°C). In 
addition, there are also HI and LO settings 
(see below). The HI and LO settings for the 
passenger zone can only be selected if they 
are also selected for the driver’s zone. 
The displayed temperature is not the abso-
lute temperature but corresponds to the 
comfort level normally experienced at that 
temperature after allowance has been 
made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar 
radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside 
the car. 
• The most usual temperature setting is 
64-76°F (18-24°C), depending on per-
sonal preference and what clothing is 
worn. 
• It is recommended that changes in the 
temperature setting be made in steps of 
2°F (1°C).
• Once the desired climate has been 
achieved, the rear center vents can be 
closed to prevent warm air being distrib-
uted at face height.
Settings when HI selected: 
• Maximum heat.
• Air distribution to windshield and floor.
• Recirculation OFF (even if manually 
selected before).
• Fan: high speed.
• Settings shown on ACC display.
Settings when LO selected: 
• Maximum cooling (A/C compressor will 
run even if ECON manually selected 
before).
• Air distribution through panel vents.
• Fan: maximum speed.
• Recirculation ON.
• Settings shown on ACC display.
IB369
Air vent at rear side window 

73Instruments and controls
Functions
Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings. 
If a manual function is selected it will be locked in but other functions 
will be controlled automatically. 
The selected temperature is always maintained automatically. 
Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and 
recirculation will all be controlled automatically.
In falling temperatures the A/C compressor is 
switched off at 32°F (0°C).
In rising temperatures the A/C compressor is 
switched on at 41°F (+5°C).
If at the start the outside air temperature is 32 - 41°F 
(0 – +5°C), the A/C compressor is switched off.
• Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous 
manual selections.
• Pressing AUTO a second time will result in all the 
automatically selected settings being displayed. 
When the engine is started, the A/C system is in 
AUTO mode, apart from any currently set program, 
see page 76 and 77). 
IB370
A/C compressor OFF. 
No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution 
and fan speed still under automatic control. 
ACC system OFF. 
Fan OFF. 
A/C compressor OFF. 
Warm air OFF. 
Air-distribution selections locked in current settings. 
Recirculation can be selected manually. 
Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into 
automatic mode. 
Pressing the OFF button again will result in the sys-
tem reverting to any previous manual settings. 
IB371IB372

74 Instruments and controls
The rear-window and door-mirror heating is 
controlled manually. 
Switch off the heating as soon as the rear window 
is clear, to avoid imposing a heavy load on the bat-
tery longer than necessary. Note, however, that the 
heating will go off automatically after 5-10 minutes 
(depending on the outdoor temperature) or sooner 
if the voltage in the electrical system falls below 
10 V
.
The ACC system can be programmed to switch on 
the heating automatically when the outdoor temper-
ature is below 41°F (+5°C) and the temperature 
inside the car is below 50°F (+10°C) (see ”Program-
ming I and II”, on pages 76 and 77). 
Recirculation is selected automatically for effective 
cooling, but it can also be switched on/off manually. 
Although recirculation does not substantially affect 
the air quality, it is useful to prevent unpleasant 
smells or fumes being drawn into the car from 
outside. 
IB373
IB374
To increase the fan speed in steps. 
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the 
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed 
until the engine is running. 
To decrease the fan speed in steps. 
If the fan is set to 0, the A/C compressor will cut out 
and ECON will appear on the display. 
If, after being off, the ignition is switched on but the 
engine is not started, the fan will run at low speed 
until the engine is running. 
IB375IB376

75Instruments and controls
Air distribution
Press once: Defrosting of all windows will take 
place (air flow to rear side windows shut off) with:
• The fan running at high speed.
• Air being distributed to the defroster vents.
• Normal temperature control will operate.
• Recirculation will be OFF.
• Heating of the rear window and door mirrors will 
be switched ON.
The defroster function will continue to operate until 
a new selection is made, although the heating for 
the rear window and door mirrors will be switched 
off automatically after 5-10 minutes, depending on 
the temperature outside.
Press twice: Air will be directed onto the windshield 
with no increase in the fan speed. The heating for 
the rear window will not be switched on.
To revert to the previous selection, press the AUTO 
button.
ACC65
Defroster & floor vents 
Floor vents and rear side windows 
Floor & panel vents 
ACC66
A
CC67
A
CC68

76 Instruments and controls
Starting in cold weather
To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster set-
ting, maximum heat and low fan speed. 
As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor 
vents and the fan speed will be increased. 
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the 
fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by 
the system. 
Starting in hot weather
The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents 
at high fan speed and will switch on the A/C compressor (unless the 
ECON switch has been pressed). 
If the outdoor temperature is above 86
°
F (30°C), the system might 
select recirculation after approximately 45 seconds if this is required 
in order to reach the desired temperature.
As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan 
speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system. 
Programming I
Manual selections can be programmed into the ACC system so that 
these will take effect when the car is started. Note that the ignition 
must be switched off for at least ten minutes after programming for 
the selections to be saved in the system’s memory. 
1 Make sure the ignition is ON. 
2 Select the desired settings. 
3 Press  and , simultaneously 
(the display will flash to confirm that the settings have been 
recorded). 
Example: If you want air distribution through the panel vents when 
you start the car, press   and then save the setting by pressing 
 and  . 
Cancelling the programmed settings (I) 
To cancel the programmed settings, press   and   
simultaneously (the display will flash to confirm that the settings 
have been cancelled). 
Panel (and center rear vent) 
A
CC69

77Instruments and controls
Programming II
It is also possible to customize the ACC system, e.g. to adapt to 
driving and weather conditions. 
Function  Operation in AUTO mode 
after Programming II  Standard operation 
in AUTO mode 
The A/C compressor will not 
activate unless the outdoor 
temperature is above 55
°
F 
(+13°C).
–This function saves fuel by 
delaying the activation of the 
A/C compressor. However, 
in wet weather it is advisable 
to have the A/C compressor 
running when outdoor tem-
peratures are below
57° 
(+14°C), as the A/C system 
reduces the likelihood of the 
windows’ fogging up. 
A/C compressor cuts 
in when outdoor tem-
perature is above 41
°
F 
(+5°C) 
Recirculation will be 
switched on if the speed of 
the car is less than 6 mph (10 
km/h) and will be switched off 
when the speed has risen 
above 20 mph (30 km/h), but 
not if the ECON mode has 
been programmed according 
to ”Programming II”.
–This function is useful to 
prevent fumes being drawn 
into the car in traffic jams. 
Recirculation is 
switched on about 
45 seconds after start-
ing if the outdoor tem-
perature is above 86
°
F 
(+30°C) and the 
selected temperature 
for the cabin is well 
below the actual tem-
perature in both tem-
perature zones. 
The heating will come on 
about five seconds after the 
engine has started if the out-
door temperature is below 
41
°
F (+5°C).
–This function helps to pre-
vent ice or mist forming on 
the rear window in cold, 
damp weather. Fuel con-
sumption may increase 
slightly. 
Rear-window heating 
can only be switched 
on manually. 

78 Instruments and controls
To program a function or to cancel a programmed function, press 
and hold in the relevant button until the corresponding symbol has 
flashed four times on the display and a chime has sounded. 
Make sure the ignition is ON. 
Example: To have the ACC system switch the heating for the rear 
window and door mirrors ON/OFF automatically, press and hold in 
 until the symbol has flashed four times on the display and a 
chime has sounded.
The display shows:
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL
Once a function has been recorded under ”Programming II”, it will 
remain in the system until you cancel the program. 
AUTO will still show on the display after a function has been saved 
in ”Programming II”. 
Calibration 
If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the system will 
need to be recalibrated. 
To start the calibration procedure:
1 Start the engine.
2 Press  and  simultaneously.
Calibration takes about 30 seconds. During this time and for about 
3 seconds after the operation has been completed, the number of 
fault codes (if any) stored in the system will appear in the tempera-
ture display on the left. The fault codes themselves will be shown in 
the temperature display on the right. 
Useful tips 
(Before driving the car to an authorized Saab dealer) 
• If AUTO is not shown on the display, see ”Cancelling the pro-
grammed settings (I)” on page 76.
• If you suspect that the ACC system is not functioning properly, 
cancel (delete) all programmed settings and then recalibrate the 
system.
See ”Cancelling the programmed settings (I) and (II)”, pages 76 
and  77, and ”Calibration” above.
Note that AUTO will show on the display even if you have com-
pleted Programming II, but that this does not apply to Program-
ming I.
• If the battery has been disconnected or has died, the ACC system 
will need to be recalibrated. See ”Calibration” above.
Function Text displayed on SID 
during programming  Text displayed on SID 
when cancelling 
program 
ACC: LO TEMP
A/C CTRL ACC: NORMAL
A/C CTRL
ACC: RECIRC
ACC: SPEED CTRL ACC: RECIRC
ACC: NORMAL CTRL
ACC: AUTO
RDEFR CTRL ACC: MANUAL
RDEFR CTRL

79Instruments and controls
Condensation 
When the A/C system is running, the intake 
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets 
underneath the floor of the car, in the vicinity 
of the front doors. 
It is therefore perfectly normal for water to 
be seen dripping from these outlets when 
the car is parked. Greater amounts of con-
densation will result in warmer, more humid 
ambient air.
Formation of ice and mist in 
extremes of weather 
It is only in the most extreme conditions that 
icing and misting of window glass are likely 
to be a problem, e.g. in torrential rain or 
severe cold coupled with high relative 
humidity, or when passengers are perspir-
ing heavily or wearing wet clothes. 
The following measures are recommended 
if such problems should occur: 
1 Select AUTO and 70
°
F (21°C) for both 
temperature zones. 
2 Select Defroster. 
If this is not enough... 
3 Increase the fan speed. 
If this is not enough... 
4 Select a higher temperature. 
The following measures are recommended 
if the occupants feel that it is cold and drafty 
in the car:
1 Make sure that all the air vents are fully 
open, including the center rear vent. 
If this is not enough...
2 Direct the air flow away from the body 
(but not towards the interior temperature 
sensor). 
If this is not enough...
3 Raise the temperature setting a degree 
or two. If this is not enough...
4 Lower the fan speed.
Fault diagnosis and maintenance, 
see page 230.

80 Instruments and controls
Afterheater, V6-engine 
cars
The afterheater enables a comfortable tem-
perature to be maintained inside the car 
even after the engine has been switched off. 
The heater can be activated up to 10 min-
utes after the engine has stopped, although 
the coolant temperature must be at least 
104°F (40°C) for the heater to operate. 
To start the heater: 
1 The ignition should be OFF. 
2 Press and hold the AUTO button on the 
ACC panel for about a second, until a 
chime is sounded and the following 
appears on the SID: 
”AFTERHEATER
ACTIVATED”. 
After five seconds, the SID will indicate how 
much heat is available (0 – 100%). 
To switch off the heater: 
1 Press the OFF button on the ACC panel. 
The heater will also be switched off if the 
ignition is turned ON. 
The following settings will be used when the 
heater is running: 
• Air distribution in AUTO mode.
• Recirculation not active but can be 
selected manually.
• Fan speed is automatic and cannot be 
changed.
• Only the fan speed is shown on the dis-
play. If AUTO is pressed, the system 
selections will be indicated. 
The following controls do not operate while 
the afterheater is on: 
• Rear-window heating.
• ECON.
• User presets.
Some of the functions can be repro-
grammed. For further information, please 
consult your Saab dealer (see page  261). 

81Saab 9-5 Audio System
Saab 9-5 Audio 
System
Quick guide to the Saab 
9-5 Audio System...........    83 
Sound controls.................    85 
Radio.................................   86 
Cassette player ................    88 
CD player ..........................    91 
CD changer.......................    93 
Programmable functions.    97 
Steering-wheel controls..    98 
Security lock.....................    98 
Technical data..................    99 
Installation of car phone 
(option)............................   103 
Fault codes.......................    104 
IB1198

82 Saab 9-5 Audio System
To get the best out of your Saab 9-5 Audio 
System, we recommend that you read 
through this entire section.
The Saab 9-5 Audio System is available in 
two versions: Premium on the 9-5 and Pres-
tige on the 9-5 SE and 9-5 Aero (Prestige 
system is also available as an option in the 
U.S. on the 9-5 model.) Both models have 
been specially matched to the Saab 9-5 
cabin.
The two models are comprised of a radio, 
CD player and cassette player.
A six-disc CD changer for installation in the 
luggage compartment is available as a 
dealer-installed accessory/option.
The Premium model has seven speakers: 
three mounted in the fascia (the center 
speaker further enhances the overall sound 
image) and one in each door.
The Prestige model (Harman/Kardon) has 
nine speakers (9-5 Wagon has eight speak-
ers): three mounted in the fascia (the center 
speaker further enhances the sound 
image), one in each door and two subwoof-
ers in the rear window shelf (9-5 Wagon: 
one subwoofer in the luggage compart-
ment). The subwoofers enhance reproduc-
tion of the lowest bass notes.
The Audio System is connected to the Saab 
Information Display (SID), which is at the 
top of the main instrument panel. Mes-
sages, indicators and the like for the Audio 
System are shown on this display.
Indicator 
AS  Radio is in Autostore mode 
RDM  Random playback of CD 
tracks when CD player 
selected 
(DOLBY B/C) 
DOLBY B/C noise reduction 
on for cassette player 

83Saab 9-5 Audio System
Quick guide to the 
Saab 9-5 Audio System 
Radio (see page  86)  
ON 
To switch the system ON, press the volume but-
ton. The last settings used will be activated. 
If the Audio System is switched on when the igni-
tion key is not in the switch, the system will auto-
matically be switched off after one hour has 
elapsed since a control button on the radio was 
last pressed. 
OFF 
To switch the system OFF, press the volume but-
ton or remove the ignition key. 
VOL 
To adjust the volume, rotate the VOL control. 
BAL 
To adjust the balance between the left and right 
channels, pull out and turn the VOL control. 
BAS 
Press to release the button, and adjust the bass 
level. Lock the setting by pushing the button in. 
TRE 
Press to release the button, and adjust the tre-
ble. Lock the setting by pushing the button in. 
FAD 
Press to release the button, and adjust the fade 
between the front and rear sets of speakers. 
Lock the setting by pushing the button in. 
VOL BALON PULLPUSH
TRE FADBAS
Preset station buttons 
Press once: play the preset station. 
Press & hold briefly: store a new station.
Auto tuning 
Press once: auto (seek) tuning.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound): 
manual tuning. 
Press once: Autostore ON/OFF.
Press & hold briefly: automatic tuning and 
storing of the 6 strongest stations.
Press once: change waveband.
Press once: activate Weather Band.
213
546
SEEK
AS
SEARCH
RADIO
BAND

84 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player. See page 88 
CD player. See page  91 
CD changer (accessory/option). See page  93 
Press once: Selects cassette player when 
other source active.
When tape playing: Dolby B/C ON/OFF.
Switch to playback other side of tape.
Eject.
Press once: Music search (next track).
Press & hold briefly: Fast forward/rewind. 
Press SEEK (mid-segment) (a chime will 
sound): Blank skip ON/OFF. 
Press once: switch to CD player when other 
source active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound): 
Random playback. 
Press once: Track search.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play (passage 
search) or Fast track search.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once (a chime 
will sound): Switches between Rapid play 
(PLAY) and Fast track search (TRACK). 
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a 
chime will sound): Scan disc.
SEEK
CD
RDM
SEEK
Remove CD.
Press once: Change to CD changer when CD 
player is active.
Press twice: Change to CD changer when radio 
or cassette player is active.
Press & hold briefly (a chime will sound): 
Random playback of entire magazine. 
Press once: Track search on current disc.
Press & hold briefly: Rapid play.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once: Switch 
between Rapid play (PLAY) and Fast track 
search (TRACK). 
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold briefly (a 
chime will sound): Scan/disc.
Press SEEK (mid-segment) & hold 
(2 chimes): Scan/magazine.
Selects disc in magazine.
CD
RDM
SEEK
213
546

85Saab 9-5 Audio System
Sound controls
ON/OFF 
The Audio System will come on: 
• When the volume control is pressed. 
• When the ignition is switched ON, if the 
Audio System was on when the ignition 
key was last removed. 
The Audio System will be switched off: 
• When the volume control is pressed. 
• When the ignition key is removed.
• One hour after the ignition was switched 
OFF, if the ignition key has not been 
removed.
• When one hour has elapsed since a con-
trol button on the Audio System was last 
pressed after the ignition key was 
removed. 
VOL - Volume 
BAL - Balance 
Pull out and rotate the VOL control to adjust 
the balance between the left and right 
speakers. When the control is released, it 
reverts to the volume function. 
BAS - Bass 
TRE - Treble 
Rotate clockwise to increase the level and 
counter-clockwise to reduce it.
The Bass and Treble controls must be 
pressed first to release them.
FAD - Fader 
The fader control adjusts the balance 
between the front and rear sets of speakers. 
The Fader controls must be pressed first to 
release it. 
IB1154
DOLBY B NR

86 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio 
Press the RADIO/BAND button (3) to switch 
to the radio when another source is active. 
Preset station buttons (1) 
Press once (release within a second) to 
select a preset station, e.g. 
The small figure on the far right of the dis-
play is the number of the preset button 
selected. 
Presetting a station 
Press and hold in the desired button (for 
more than a second) to store the currently 
tuned station. During this time, the radio will 
be mute. The sound will return as soon as 
the station has been stored. 
Tuning (2) 
Automatic seek tuning: 
Press   briefly to search for higher fre-
quencies or   for lower frequencies. 
Manual tuning: 
To switch to the manual-tuning function, 
press   or   and release quickly 
(a chime will sound and the M indicator will 
appear on the display). 
The function will revert to automatic seek 
tuning two seconds after the last manual fre-
quency change has been made. 
Waveband selector (3) 
Press the RADIO/BAND button repeatedly 
to move through the waveband selections: 
FM1, FM2, and AM. 
AS, Autostore (4) 
The autostore mode provides an additional 
preset function that can be used to search 
for and to store stations when you are in an 
area where you are unfamiliar with the sta-
tions and their frequencies. 
Press the AS/SEARCH button to switch the 
Autostore mode ON/OFF. When the 
Autostore mode is ON, the AS indicator will 
show at the bottom of the display. 
IB1088

87Saab 9-5 Audio System
Press and hold in the AS/SEARCH button 
for more than a second to initiate a search 
for the six strongest stations. 
Each time the system finds and stores a sta-
tion, the number on the far right of the dis-
play will change. If the system cannot find 
six stations with good reception, the remain-
ing preset buttons will be empty. If one of 
these empty buttons is pressed, U**** (FM) 
or AM**** will appear on the display. 
When the system leaves the AS mode, it 
returns to the station that was selected 
before the AS mode was activated. 
The AS mode can also be used in the AM 
band. 
WB (Weather Band) (5)
Press the WB button to select the Weather 
Band mode. The radio will automatically 
search for the strongest national weather 
service station in the area. When a weather 
band station is received, the display indi-
cates ”WB”. The strongest station generally 
provides the most accurate information for 
the area in which you are traveling.
To exit the Weather Band mode, depress 
the WB button again. Weather Band recep-
tion is available in CD, TAPE and RADIO 
mode. If the radio is unable to find a suffi-
ciently strong station to lock onto, the unit 
will continue to search and the display will 
indicate ”NO WB”.

88 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Cassette player 
Before playing a tape, make sure that the 
label is secure and that the cassette is not 
warped, otherwise the cassette can 
become jammed in the deck. The cassette 
player automatically senses whether the 
tape is normal or metal (Type I or Type II). 
TAPE (1) 
Turn on the cassette player by pressing 
 or by inserting a cassette in the 
deck, with the exposed tape to the right. 
Playback will start with the side that is facing 
up (indicated by A on the display). The dis-
play will now be as follows: 
Playback direction (2) 
To play the other side of the tape, 
press . 
The deck will automatically change the play-
back direction when the end of the tape is 
reached, be it during playback, fast 
forward/rewind or music search. 
Dolby® noise reduction (3) 
Press TAPE/DOLBY to switch on Dolby NR 
B/C. 
Dolby B/C should be on for playback of 
tapes recorded with Dolby B/C, and off for 
those recorded without Dolby B/C. 
Eject button (4) 
To stop playback of a tape, press the eject 
button   or select another source. 
If you select another source without press-
ing the eject button, the tape will remain in 
the deck but the head and pinch rollers will 
be clear of the tape. The same applies if the 
Audio System is switched off while a tape is 
being played. Tapes can still be ejected 
when the system is turned off. 
IB1090
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
  BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
 SEEK
3
5
2 4
1

89Saab 9-5 Audio System
Music search forward/reverse (5) 
To search forward for a track, press   
and release quickly (within half a second). 
The following will now appear on the dis-
play: 
To perform a backward search, press 
 instead. 
A forward search will continue until a gap of 
at least 4 seconds is found, or until you 
press   or   (mid-segment). 
Pressing and holding the button during a 
search will initiate the fast-forward function. 
Fast forward/rewind 
Press and hold   to start fast-
forward to the end of the tape. The following 
will now appear on the display: 
Press   once to cancel fast-forward. 
Press and hold   (mid-segment) 
briefly to switch to music search. 
Fast rewind (<< WIND) is performed in the 
same way as fast forward. 
Auto music search (Blank skip) 
To switch the Blank-skip function ON/OFF, 
press and hold   (mid-segment). 
When the Blank-skip function is active (dis-
play: BL SKIP ON), unrecorded gaps that 
are longer than 15 seconds will automati-
cally be skipped. 
When auto music search is in progress, the 
following will show on the display: 
If a track has been recorded at an unusually 
low level and is therefore identified incor-
rectly as a gap between tracks, it could ini-
tiate a spurious ”auto music search”. 
To cancel such a search, press and hold 
 (mid-segment) during playback. 
The following will now appear on the dis-
play: 

90 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Type II (metal) tapes 
The cassette has an automatic tape-type 
selector. 
Cleaning-due indicator 
After 30 hours’ playing time, the following 
message will appear on the display: 
The message will be displayed for ten 
seconds each time the cassette player is 
selected. 
A cleaning tape should be used to clean the 
heads inside the cassette player to maintain 
good reproduction and to prevent unneces-
sary wear. 
To reset the playing-time meter: 
1 Remove the current tape. 
2 Load the cleaning tape and play it for the 
required time. 
3 Remove the cleaning tape and reload 
the other one. 
Tape care 
Do not expose cassette tapes to direct sun-
light or to extremes of temperature as this 
can damage the cassette and the tape. 
Always keep cassettes in their boxes when 
not in use. 
If a cassette should become jammed in the 
deck, seek help from an authorized Saab 
dealer. 

91Saab 9-5 Audio System
CD player
To select the CD mode, load a CD into the 
deck or, if one is already loaded, press the 
CD/RDM button.
Insert the CD, label-side up, and allow the 
mechanism to load it automatically. Play-
back of the first track will start and the follow-
ing message will appear on the display: 
A tiny, amber-colored LED indicator to the 
left of the disc tray is illuminated when a disc 
is loaded. 
When all the tracks have been played, the 
CD player will restart playback from track 1. 
To cancel playback, press the eject, RADIO 
or TAPE button. 
Track search (1) 
Press   or   repeatedly to move 
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing 
 once will restart playback from the 
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play 
the preceding track, press   twice. 
Rapid play (passage search) 
When   or   is pressed and 
held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time 
and track showing on the display, e.g.: 
If the button is depressed for more than 
5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster. 
Rapid play stops when the button is 
released. 
NOTE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio 
System. In certain cases, this type of CD 
is only suitable for home use and can 
therefore cause operational problems.
IB1096
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
  BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
 SEEK
2
1
3

92 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Fast track search 
Press   (mid-segment) once to 
switch between the CD-PLAY and 
CD-TRACK modes. 
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes 
change the function of   and  . 
The selected mode will also be active the 
next time the system is switched on. 
Choose the mode that you find most conve-
nient:  
Random playback (RDM) (2) 
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to 
select/deselect random playback of the cur-
rent disc. When this function is selected, 
RDM will appear at the bottom of the dis-
play. 
Press   once to move from the current 
track to the next during random playback. 
Press   once to repeat the current 
track during random playback. 
Pressing and holding   or   will 
start Rapid play. 
SCAN 
To start the SCAN function, which enables 
you to hear a sample of each track on the 
disc, press and hold   (mid-seg-
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in 
progress and which track is currently being 
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN 
while playing the first track, the following 
display will appear: 
The sample playback starts 30 seconds 
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds. 
When all the tracks on the disc have been 
scanned, the system will revert to playback 
of the track that was playing when SCAN 
was selected. 
Press any segment of the SEEK button 
during scanning to play the current track 
from the beginning and simultaneously 
cancel the SCAN function. 
Eject (3) 
Press   to remove the disc. 
If you press the eject button to open the tray 
but do not remove the disc, the CD player 
will automatically close the tray again after 
10 seconds, without restarting playback. 
CD PLAY  Pressing and holding 
 or   briefly 
starts Rapid play 
CD TRACK  Pressing and holding 
 or   briefly 
starts Fast track search 

93Saab 9-5 Audio System
CD changer
(accessory)
Important! Always keep the sliding cover 
closed to keep dust out of the CD changer, 
so that it will continue to provide satisfactory 
service for a long time. 
To load the CD changer (which is installed 
in the luggage compartment and can 
accommodate six CDs) proceed as follows: 
1 Slide the top back. 
2 Lift out the CD magazine. 
3 Press back the catch on the magazine. 
4 Withdraw one CD tray at a time and 
swap/load the CD (label side up). Slide 
the tray back into the magazine. 
Note the position of the magazine for load-
ing (see picture). 
Insert the entire magazine carefully inside 
the CD changer and slide back the cover.
To select the CD changer 
• If the Audio System is in the RADIO or 
TAPE mode, press the CD/RDM button 
twice. 
• If the CD player is active, press the 
CD/RDM button once. 
If the CDs in the magazine have not been 
changed, the system will start playback 
from where it left off before. 
If there is no magazine in the CD changer, 
the following will appear on the display: 
NOTE
Do not use writeable CDs in your Audio 
System. In certain cases, this type of CD 
is only suitable for home use and can 
therefore cause operational problems.
IB383
4
3
Changing a CD 
IB1341
2
1
CD changer in luggage compartment, 
Saab 9-5 Sedan
IB1208
CD changer in luggage compartment, 
Saab 9-5 Wagon

94 Saab 9-5 Audio System
If the magazine in the CD changer is empty, 
the following will appear on the display: 
If the CD changer is activated right after a 
magazine has been loaded, the following 
will appear on the display: 
The CD number will change as each CD is 
played. 
After a magazine has been loaded, play-
back will start with the first track on the first 
CD when the CD changer is selected, and 
the following will appear on the display:  Selecting CDs (1) 
When the CD changer is operating, the 
radio preset buttons work for the six CDs in 
the magazine. Press the button for the 
corresponding CD. 
If the selected CD is already being played, 
playback will restart from the first track. 
If the selected CD-tray is empty, the follow-
ing will appear on the display: 
After two seconds, the status of the trays in 
the magazine (i.e. loaded or empty) will be 
shown on the display, e.g.: 
IB1104
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
  BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
 SEEK
3
12

95Saab 9-5 Audio System
If for some reason the CD selected by the 
preset button cannot be played, playback of 
the current CD will continue. 
Track search (2) 
Press   or   repeatedly to move 
to preceding or following tracks. Pressing 
 once will restart playback from the 
beginning of the current track. Thus, to play 
the preceding track, press   twice. 
Rapid play 
When   or   is pressed and 
held, rapid play will be initiated, with the time 
and track showing on the display, e.g.: 
If the button is depressed for more than 
5 seconds, the rapid play will be even faster. 
Rapid play stops when the button is 
released. 
Fast track search 
Press SEEK (mid-segment) once to switch 
between the CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK 
modes. 
The CD-PLAY and CD-TRACK modes 
change the function of   and  . 
The selected mode will also be active the 
next time the system is switched on. 
Choose the mode that you find most 
convenient:  
CD PLAY  Pressing and holding 
 or   briefly 
starts Rapid play 
CD TRACK  Pressing and holding 
 or   briefly 
starts Fast track search 
IB1104
VOL
TRE
BALON
FADBAS
PULLPUSH
CD
RDM
RADIO
  BAND
AS
SEARCH
213
546
DOLBY B NR
 SEEK
3
12

96 Saab 9-5 Audio System
SCAN 
Scanning the current CD: 
To start the SCAN function, which enables 
you to hear a sample of each track on the 
disc, press and hold   (mid-seg-
ment). The display shows that SCAN is in 
progress and which track is currently being 
sampled. For instance, if you started SCAN 
while playing track one, the following dis-
play will appear: 
The sample playback starts 30 seconds 
after the start of the track and lasts for 8 sec-
onds. 
When all the tracks on the disc have been 
scanned, the system will revert to playback 
of the track that was playing when SCAN 
was selected. 
Press any segment of the SEEK button 
during scanning to play the current track 
from the beginning and simultaneously 
cancel the SCAN function. 
Scanning the entire magazine: 
Press and hold   (mid-segment - 
two chimes) to start a scan of the entire 
magazine. A message similar to the follow-
ing will appear on the display: 
The sample playback starts 30 seconds 
after the beginning of the first track on each 
CD and lasts for 8 seconds. 
After the first track of each CD has been 
sampled, the CD changer will revert to play-
back of the track that was playing when 
SCAN was selected. 
Press any segment of the SEEK button 
during scanning to play the current track 
from the beginning and simultaneously 
cancel the SCAN function. 
Random playback (RDM) (3) 
Press and hold the CD/RDM button to 
select/deselect random playback of the 
CDs in the magazine. When this function is 
selected, RDM will appear at the bottom of 
the display. 
Press   once to move from the current 
track to the next during random playback.
Press   once to repeat the current 
track during random playback. 
Pressing and holding   or   will 
start Rapid play. 
To stop playback from the CD changer, 
simply select once to move from the current 
track to the next during random playback 
(RADIO/TAPE/ CD). The CD changer will 
now enter stand-by mode. 

97Saab 9-5 Audio System
Programmable 
functions
Volume-preset mode
To select the volume-preset mode, press 
and hold the WB button at the same time as 
you switch the Audio System on.
Use the   button to select the 
desired function. 
The following volume settings can be 
preselected: 
•STARTVOL - maximum volume level 
when the Audio System is switched on 
• TEL VOL - preset volume level when an 
in-car phone is activated 
• SP D VOL - speed-dependent volume. 
The Audio System will automatically 
adjust the volume level to adjust to an 
increase in vehicle speed. 
• LOUDNESS ON/OFF - boosting of the 
highest and lowest frequency ranges to 
enhance the sound image when the 
volume is set to a low level. 
Adjusting the volume 
The default setting for START VOL is 
volume setting 9, and that for TEL VOL is 
volume setting 14 (the highest volume set-
ting is 30).
•Maximum START VOL 
•TELVOL
To change the volume setting:
– Press and hold the WB button at the 
same time as you switch on the Audio 
System.
– Adjust the volume
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new 
volume setting.
Speed-dependent volume 
(SP D VOL) ON/OFF 
To change the default setting:
The default setting for this function is ON. 
– Press and hold the WB button at the 
same time as you switch on the Audio 
System. 
– Select SP D VOL using   
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control. 
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new 
default setting. 
Loudness ON/OFF 
To change the default setting: 
The default setting for this function is ON. 
– Press and hold the WB button at the 
same time as you switch on the Audio 
System. 
– Select LOUDNESS using   
– Select ON/OFF using the VOL control. 
– Wait 10 seconds or press one of the but-
tons on the bottom row of the Audio Sys-
tem, e.g. RADIO/BAND, to save the new 
default setting. 
WARNING
These functions should only be carried 
out when the car is stationary.

98 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Steering-wheel controls 
To facilitate use of the Audio System and to 
promote safer driving, most of the functions 
can be operated using the integral remote 
controls on the steering wheel. 
Control functions: 
NEXT: 
RADIO mode: preselect buttons 
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒... 
TAPE mode: Play other side of tape.
CD mode: Inoperative.
CD-changer mode: Select CD in magazine 
1⇒2⇒...⇒ 6⇒1⇒... 
<< SEEK >>: 
RADIO mode: Auto/manual tuning.
TAPE mode: 
Music search/Fast forward or rewind.
CD/CD-changer mode: 
Track search/Rapid play.
SRC (source)
Press repeatedly to switch between 
RADIO ⇒ TAPE ⇒ CD ⇒ (CD changer) 
⇒RADIO ⇒... 
VOL +/-: 
Volume adjust.
Security lock 
The Audio System is equipped with an elec-
tronic security lock. The special code is 
unique to the car in which the Audio System 
is fitted. 
Each time the Audio System is switched on, 
a check is made to ensure that the codes 
match. 
If not, the following will appear on the dis-
play: 
If a CD changer has been installed, it will 
also have been security coded. 
If the security code for the CD changer does 
not match when the changer is selected, the 
following will appear on the display: 
If a CD changer is to be retrofitted or if you 
wish to move the main Audio System 
module and/or CD changer to another car 
(Saab 9-5), you 
must 
consult an authorized 
Saab dealer so that the modules can be 
given the correct security codes. 
IB1613
Audio System controls on steering wheel 

99Saab 9-5 Audio System
Technical data 
• These specifications comply with the new IHF Standard
• Since the policy at Saab is one of continual improvement, we retain the right to alter 
specifications and design without prior notice. 
• Dolby noise reduction is produced under licence from Dolby Laboratories Licensing 
Corporation 
• ”Dolby” and the double-D symbol   are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licens-
ing Corporation
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer for compliance 
could void the user´s authority to operate the equipment.
Tone controls 
Bass  ______________________ ±10 dB at 100 Hz 
Treble  _____________________ ±10 dB at 10,000 Hz 
Power output 
Premium __________________ 150 W
110 W at 1% THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Prestige __________________ 200 W
150 W at 1% THD (total har-
monic distortion) and 13.5 V
Radio module 
Radio system  _______________ PLL dual-synthesizer tuner
Number of presets:
FM  ______________________ 3 x 6 
AM  ______________________ 2 x 6 
Frequency range:
FM  ______________________ 87.9 – 107.9 MHz 
MW  ______________________ 530 – 1710 kHz 
WB  ______________________ 162.40 – 162.55 MHz 
Tuning steps:
Automatic seek tuning:  _______ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
WB 50 kHz 
Manual tuning:  _____________ FM 200 kHz
AM 10 kHz
Frequency range (FM)  ________ 40-15000 Hz
±1 dB 
Distortion (FM)  ______________ < 0.5% 
Cassette player 
Fast forward/rewind  __________ < 120 seconds (C-60) 
Frequency range _____________ 40 – 16000 Hz
±2 dB 
Wow and flutter ______________ 0.2% WRMS 
Signal-to-noise ratio  __________ 45 dB 
Dolby B/C NR effect  __________ 8/16 dB 
CD player and CD changer 
1-bit system and 8 x oversampling 
Frequency range _____________ 20-20000 Hz
±0.5 dB 
Distortion __________________ < 0.008% 
Dynamics  __________________ > 80 dB (1 kHz) 
CD-changer capacity__________  6 discs

100 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Antennas 
The Audio System has three antennas 
incorporated in the rear window; two for FM 
diversity and one for AM. 
The car has a factory-fitted roof antenna for 
a mobile phone. Roof loads may negatively 
affect telecommunication.
Multipath propagation 
Multipath propagation occurs when radio 
waves from an FM transmitter are reflected 
by, e.g. large buildings, causing them to 
arrive slightly later than the direct waves. 
This can create interference to radio recep-
tion. To avoid this problem as much as pos-
sible the system is equipped with two FM 
antennas, so called FM diversity.
NOTE
Refrain from placing hard or sharp 
objects on the rear parcel shelf, to avoid 
damaging the antenna leads. 
Do not use sun protective film which con-
tains metal particles on the rear window, 
this can be the cause of radio interfer-
ence.
IB386
IB389

101Saab 9-5 Audio System
Shadow effect 
Because FM radio waves travel in straight 
lines from the transmitter, a shadow effect 
can occur when tall buildings or hills 
obstruct the propagation path from the 
transmitter to the car. 
Sources of FM interference 
Interference to FM reception can be caused 
by the electrical systems in other vehicles, 
particularly if the signal from the transmitter 
is weak. 
Cross-modulation 
When the radio is tuned to a weak transmit-
ter in the vicinity of a stronger one, the car’s 
antennas will receive signals from both. 
Such interference is apparent when the 
unwanted broadcast can be heard faintly in 
the background. 
IB391
IB390
IB387

102 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Radio waves, FM/AM 
FM radio waves radiate in straight lines from 
the transmitter. Because such waves do not 
follow the curvature of the Earth, their 
strength becomes weaker the further they 
travel.
AM waves, on the other hand, are reflected 
off the ionosphere, thus greatly extending 
their range. 
Sources of AM interference 
AM reception is prone to interference, e.g. 
from electrical systems on other vehicles, 
high-tension power lines and lightning. 
Adjusting the frequency steps North 
America/Europe 
If the car is taken from North America to 
Europe, the radio’s frequency steps can be 
adjusted. 
• Press and hold   (mid-segment) 
and switch the radio on at the same time. 
The preset stations will be cancelled and 
replaced by default frequencies.
IB392
IB388
AMFM

103Saab 9-5 Audio System
Installation of car phone 
(option)
Provision has been made on the Saab 9-5 
for the installation of a hands-free car 
phone.
A car-phone mount is available as an acces-
sory.
Your Saab dealer has details of proper 
phone installation procedures.
Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
Provision for hands-free phone
• Car phone connects to car’s circuitry.
• External antenna is fitted.
• Microphone for hands-free phone use 
incorporated in overhead panel at front.
• Audio System mute function when phone 
activated.
• Phone conversation amplified through 
Audio System speakers.
• TELEPHONE appears on the SID when 
phone in use.
• Volume level for ongoing conversation 
can be adjusted by volume controls on 
steering wheel or on Audio System 
module (see also ”Volume-preset mode”, 
page 97).
• If the sound is distorted, adjust by means 
of the volume control on 
telephone set
.
• Phone battery charging when phone is in 
its cradle.
Please refer to the instructions supplied with 
the phone for details of how to make and 
receive calls. In order to fully utilize the 
hands-free function, certain circuits must be 
available from the telephone to be installed. 
Your authorized Saab dealer has this infor-
mation available.
WARNING
To prevent crashes while using a cell 
phone:
• Don’t use the phone in distracting traf-
fic situations. Turn it off if traffic is 
heavy. 
• Dial sensibly, at a stoplight or safely off 
the road.
• Consider installing hands-free or 
speaker phone.
• Avoid stressful and intense phone 
conversations.
• Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of car phones 
while driving.
• Do not use the phone when refueling 
the vehicle. Gasoline fumes are highly 
explosive.
NOTE
The A-pillar area (area beside the wind-
shield) and the headlining of your Saab 
contain padding designed to reduce head 
injuries. No modifications to these areas 
should be made unless done by your 
authorized Saab dealer.

104 Saab 9-5 Audio System
Mobile phones and
communications radios
Mobile phones and communications radios 
that do not have a separate external 
antenna radiate an electromagnetic field 
inside the car.
Saab therefore recommends that a car 
phone/radio transmitter should always be 
connected to an external antenna. 
An external antenna also provides 
improved transmission/reception and a 
greater range. Roof loads can negatively 
affect telecommunication.
Mobile phones and communications radios 
that are not supplied as standard equipment 
by Saab can interfere with the car’s electri-
cal system and cause spurious fault codes 
to be generated.
Fault codes
The Audio System has a built-in diagnostics 
function. If a fault is detected, a fault code is 
generated to help dealer technicians to 
diagnose the fault. Below are the codes for 
some faults that you might be able to rectify 
yourself.
WARNING
The electromagnetic field produced, for 
example, by a mobile telephone in the 
passenger compartment may be detri-
mental to health. We therefore recom-
mend the use of an external antenna.
Do not use the phone when refueling with 
gasoline. Gasoline fuels are highly explo-
sive.
NOTE
The electromagnetic field can cause 
interference to other electrical systems in 
the car, such as the Audio System.
WARNING
Always consult an authorized Saab 
dealer for installation guidance.
If you feel that any of the warnings or fault 
indications are unclear, have the equip-
ment checked by an authorized Saab 
dealer.
NOTE
Great care should be exercised in trying 
to rectify a fault. If you are at all unsure, 
contact an authorized Saab dealer. 
Fault code  Possible cause 
CD/CDC 
ERROR 
12/17/19 
CD is dirty, loaded 
wrong side up or defec-
tive.
TAPE ERR 01  Tape broken or 
mechanical fault in 
deck.
TAPE ERR 
02/03  Tape snarled up or 
mechanical fault in 
deck.
TAPE ERR 11  Cassette jammed: can-
not be loaded/ejected.

105Saab 9-5 Audio System
OnStar System
Your vehicle may be equipped with OnStar, 
a vehicle telematics communications and 
navigation system. Please consult the sep-
arate chapter in this owner’s manual, page 
107.
WARNING
The CD player/CD changer is classified 
as Class 1 laser equipment 
• Service and repair work must only be 
carried out by authorized technicians. 
• If the casing is damaged, hazardous 
laser radiation can occur. 
NOTE
All work on the Audio System must be 
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.

106 Saab 9-5 Audio System
(This page has been left blank)

107OnStar - Telematics
OnStar - Telematics
Using OnStar...................   108
OnStar is Easy............................   108
OnStar Services Button..............   108
Emergency button ......................   109
Call answer/end button...............   109
System status light .....................   109
The OnStar Center..........   110
Connecting to the OnStar center   110
Your personal identification number 
(PIN)...........................................   110
The OnStar Safety and 
Security Plan.................   110
Automatic notification of air bag 
deployment .................................   110
Emergency services ...................   110
Roadside assistance...................   111
Stolen vehicle tracking................   111
Accident Assist™........................   111
OnStar Med-Net..........................   111
Hands-free communication.........   111
The OnStar Premium Plan   111
Route support.............................   111
Ride Assist..................................   111
Information and Convenience ser-
vices ...........................................   111
Concierge services.....................   112
Additional Services.........   112
Personal Calling:........................   112
Virtual Advisor: ...............   116
OnStar Subscriber 
Website ..........................  117
Limitations.......................  117
Additional Information....   118
Warranty ....................................   118
A Note About Privacy.................  118
Transferring OnStar....................  118
OnStar Subscription Information  118

108 OnStar - Telematics
Your new vehicle comes equipped with 
advanced telematics hardware and a full 
year of Onstar premium service. Saab 
Telematics is a sophisticated in-vehicle 
system allowing convergence of wireless 
communications, GPS (Global Positioning 
System) satellites and advanced vehicle 
electronics.
You must activate immediately to ensure 
you receive your full year of service, as your 
prepaid subscription begins at the time of 
delivery.
Here’s how to activate your OnStar ser-
vice:
1 Push the blue OnStar button located in 
your Saab. You will be greeted by a live 
OnStar Advisor. The Advisor will acti-
vate your OnStar service.
2 Provide the information requested by 
the Advisor to activate your account and 
set up your personal profile. This will 
take approximately 10-15 minutes.
Using OnStar
Welcome to OnStar. This section gives you 
all the information you need to get started 
using OnStar, including descriptions of all 
OnStar services. It also introduces the 
added services of Personal Calling, Virtual 
Advisor, and the Onstar Subscriber Web-
site. For a complete explanation of these 
additional services, please see pages 112,  
116 and 117.
OnStar is Easy
It’s easy to start using your OnStar system. 
In fact, pressing the OnStar button is usually 
all you need to do. Once you are connected, 
an OnStar Advisor will help you with the ser-
vices in your plan.
Your onboard OnStar System consists of 
three buttons:
OnStar Services Button
Press this button, and you are 
connected to an OnStar Advi-
sor. You will hear a chime, fol-
lowed by the words 
”Connecting to OnStar.” Allow 
20-30 seconds for initial con-
nection to the OnStar Call Cen-
ter. The Advisor will then help 
you with any of the services 
included in your OnStar plan.
If cellular service is unavail-
able, OnStar will generate a 
fast busy tone. The OnStar sys-
tem will retry calls a number of 
times before returning to the 
ready mode. To cancel the 
automatic dialing, press the 
Call Answer/End button.

109OnStar - Telematics
System status light
Solid Green — Indicates the OnStar 
system in the vehicle is powered ON and 
ready to make calls or receive calls from the 
OnStar Center. 
Blinking Green — The light blinks green to 
indicate a call is being connected or in 
progress. If you notice this light blinking 
while you are not on a call, press the Call 
Answer/End button.
Red — This signals that your OnStar 
system may not be functioning properly. 
Press the OnStar button to attempt to con-
tact an OnStar Advisor. If the connection is 
made, the Advisor will assist you in making 
sure your OnStar system is operating prop-
erly. If you cannot contact the OnStar Cen-
ter, please take your car to the nearest Saab 
dealer for diagnosis and service.
The OnStar Center is the heart of your ser-
vice — staffed 24 hours a day, 7 days a 
week with knowledgeable OnStar Advisors. 
Even on weekends and holidays, there is 
always someone ready to help.
OnStar uses sophisticated Global Position-
ing System (GPS) satellites to locate your 
Saab, and wireless technology to provide 
the communications link and seamless inte-
gration into your Saab. This system allows 
our OnStar Advisors to pinpoint your Saab´s 
location precisely. This way, Advisors can 
provide you with a range of helpful services 
to protect you and your Saab. Plus, with our 
Premium Plan* included for 12 months with 
your Saab, Advisors can also access an 
extensive database to assist you with direc-
tions, making reservations and other conve-
nience services.
*) New retail deliveries only.
Emergency button
In an emergency, press this 
button to connect with an 
OnStar Advisor. Your call will 
be given the highest priority, 
and you will hear a tone fol-
lowed by the words ”Connect-
ing to OnStar Emergency.” The 
Advisor will locate your Saab, 
find out what kind of assistance 
you require, and contact the 
nearest emergency services 
provider who can dispatch 
ambulance, fire, police or other 
emergency services. Please 
use this button only for true 
emergencies.
Call answer/end button
Press this button at the end of a 
call. You’ll hear the words 
”OnStar Request Ended.” Also, 
press this button to answer a 
call from the OnStar Center, or 
cancel a call if one of the other 
buttons is accidentally 
pressed. This button is also 
used to access OnStar Per-
sonal Calling services which 
are described on page 112.

110 OnStar - Telematics
The OnStar Center
Connecting to the OnStar center
In addition to using the 3-button system 
found in your Saab, there are two other 
ways to connect to the OnStar Center.
Toll-Free Call
To take advantage of your OnStar Services 
from outside your Saab, you can call OnStar 
toll-free at 1-888-4-OnStar 
(1-888-466-7827). Remember to have your 
Personal Identification Number (PIN) 
handy.
Automatic Notification
A priority signal will be sent to the OnStar 
Center with your exact location if an airbag 
deploy.
(Vehicle electrical system and cellular service 
must be operable.)
Your personal identification number 
(PIN)
When you signed up with OnStar, you were 
asked to provide a Personal Identification 
Number (PIN). You’ll need your PIN to 
access many of OnStar’s services. If, for 
example, your vehicle has been stolen, an 
Advisor will ask for your PIN in order to pro-
vide assistance.
Changing your PIN is easy. Call the OnStar 
Center and provide the Advisor with your 
current number, and he or she will assist 
you in setting up a new number. If you have 
forgotten your PIN, just call the OnStar Cen-
ter. For security reasons, we will send your 
PIN to you in the mail.
The OnStar Safety and 
Security Plan
The OnStar Safety and Security Plan is part 
of the Premium Plan that comes with your 
vehicle.* With it, you have access to a com-
plete range of services providing you with 
an unsurpassed level of safety and security 
— 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. And you 
have it all at the touch of a button.
So whether you’re on a lonesome country 
road or stuck in highway traffic, you have at 
your disposal a complete range of services 
providing you with unsurpassed security. 
And you have it all at the touch of a button.
Automatic notification of air bag 
deployment
Should your front air bags deploy, a priority 
signal will be sent to the OnStar Center with 
your Saab´s location (as long as cellular 
service and the vehicle’s electrical system 
are operable). An Advisor will attempt to 
contact you to assess the nature of your 
emergency, and then notify the necessary 
emergency services provider.
Emergency services
Should you require emergency assistance, 
press the red emergency button and we will 
contact the nearest emergency services 
provider with your exact location and your 
request for help.
* New retail deliveries only.

111OnStar - Telematics
Roadside assistance**
There’s nothing worse than being stranded 
on the road with car trouble. No matter what 
the problem is (flat tire, out of gas, or engine 
trouble), just call OnStar. We will contact the 
help you need to get you quickly back on the 
road.
Stolen vehicle tracking
OnStar doesn’t just protect you, it protects 
your Saab, too. If your vehicle is ever stolen, 
just contact OnStar by calling 
1-888-4-ONSTAR. We will put you in touch 
with the authorities and aid them in locating 
your Saab. Ask your insurance carrier about 
possible premium discounts.
Accident Assist™
Accident Assist™ provides step-by-step 
guidance about what to do in case of an 
accident. Working with leading insurance 
companies we have developed a ”best 
practices” list to assist you through most 
accident situations. OnStar Accident 
Assist™ can make the process of complet-
ing a police report and/or insurance claim 
less stressful. 
OnStar Med-Net***
OnStar MED-NET securely stores your per-
sonal medical information (e.g., physician’s 
name, emergency contacts, medications, 
chronic conditions) and, in an emergency, 
can quickly send it to a medical facility. This 
important information can help assist with 
diagnosis and treatment. 
**There will be no charge for Roadside Assistance as 
long as your vehicle is under warranty.
***Requires activation and additional fee.
Hands-free communication
Talking to an OnStar Advisor is easy and 
hands-free. Simply press the OnStar but-
ton, and a small microphone picks up your 
voice while the OnStar Advisor talks to you 
through your stereo speakers. You can 
even adjust the volume to your liking with 
the steering wheel controls or the radio 
volume knob. Your hands remain on the 
steering wheel, while your eyes remain on 
the road.
Being safe on the road is important, but 
there’s more to life than security. There’s liv-
ing. That’s why we have created the OnStar 
Premium Plan. It gives you not only the 
important protections of the Safety and 
Security Plan, but also a whole range of ser-
vices which truly change driving from a 
chore to a luxury. All new Saab models 
come with a full year of the OnStar Premium 
Service Plan.* 
* New retail deliveries only.
The OnStar Premium 
Plan *
Route support
With OnStar Route Support, an Advisor can 
help you find your way, no matter how far off 
course you are. You can get exact street 
directions, or guidance to nearby gas sta-
tions, restaurants, hotels or ATMs.
Ride Assist
If you need a lift, anytime of the day or night, 
just call OnStar. We’ll contact transportation 
and send it right to you.
Information and Convenience ser-
vices
Our Advisors have access to over five mil-
lion service listings including hotels, restau-
rants, gas stations, dealerships, hospitals, 
ATMs and airports — more than 250 service 
categories in all. Our Advisors can even 
assist you with hotel and restaurant reser-
vations.
*All Saab models come with a full year of Premium Ser-
vice. New retail deliveries only.

112 OnStar - Telematics
Concierge services
From the simple to the extraordinary, 
OnStar Concierge is always ready to help. 
Whether it’s tickets to that ”hard-to-get” 
play, or even complete planning of your next 
vacation, OnStar Concierge can make all 
the arrangements you need — at home or 
on the road. There is no additional cost to 
you for the efforts of the OnStar Concierge. 
You will not pay more than retail value for 
goods and services, or current market value 
for tickets, specialty items or unique ser-
vices. For your convenience, we will bill your 
credit card for any purchases and/or ship-
ping you authorize.
Additional Services
Personal Calling
As an OnStar Safety and Security Plan or 
Premium Plan subscriber, you have access 
to OnStar Personal Calling. OnStar Per-
sonal Calling provides you with a nation-
wide wireless phone service in your Saab 
that you can activate simply by pressing a 
button and using your voice. You can use 
Personal Calling in your Saab to place or to 
receive calls. The voice-activated system 
will dial the number. Your party will answer 
through your stereo speakers.
With OnStar Personal Calling, you can 
enjoy the simplicity of a one-touch wireless 
connection. Whether you are placing or 
receiving a call, once you press the button, 
you never have to take your hands off the 
wheel or your eyes off the road. The ease of 
the hands-free communication service 
allows you to enjoy an even greater level of 
safety, security and convenience while driv-
ing.
This new service is not yet available in all 
areas. Complete availability in the U.S. is 
anticipated in the first quarter of 2001*. For 
system limitations and details, call OnStar 
at 1-800-ONSTAR-7.
* Availability in Canada was undetermined at time of 
publication. Please contact your local dealer in Canada.
Signing Up for Personal Calling
As an OnStar subscriber, the Personal Call-
ing capability is already built into your 
Saab’s OnStar hardware. In order to use 
this service, an OnStar Advisor must set up 
your cellular account. You must also pro-
vide a credit card in order to establish your 
prepaid cellular account. Usage charges 
will be deducted from this prepaid account 
of ”units.” Units are easily replenished using 
the credit card on file at OnStar. Once you 
sign up for OnStar Personal Calling, you will 
be given your own personal phone number 
that others can use to call into your Saab. 
To sign up for Personal Calling, 
simply
• Press the OnStar button in your Saab.
• Inform the Advisor that you would like to 
sign up for Personal Calling.
• The Advisor will set up your account.
You will need to provide account and 
credit card information.

113OnStar - Telematics
Voice Commands
Personal Calling is made available through 
your voice commands to the system. This 
allows you to verbally control all of the 
phone functions. 
Your OnStar wireless phone system has 
been programmed to respond to a wide vari-
ety of voices and accents. You should 
speak distinctly in a normal speaking vol-
ume. It is not necessary to exaggerate your 
voice or to speak loudly. Speak numerical 
digits one at a time, and then wait for confir-
mation before going to the next digit.
Voice Command Error Messages
Pardon – The system has not been able to 
match your command with a word that it 
knows. Repeating the command distinctly 
should fix the problem.
Slower Please – Repeat the command 
after a short pause. This response normally 
happens if you say a command before the 
system is ready for it or if there is substantial 
background noise.
Universal Commands
Help – The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands.
Clear – When you are entering digits, this 
command will erase the last digit entered.
Cancel – This command takes you from the 
current function to the ”Ready” prompt. If the 
last response from the system was ”Ready,” 
this command will exit voice recognition.
Placing a Call
There are three ways to place a call:
1 By using a particular number, say ”DIAL”
2 By using a stored nametag, say ”CALL”
3 By dialing the last number, say 
”REDIAL”
To dial a number:
To dial using a ”Nametag”:
To redial the last number dialed:
Receiving a Call
If someone calls your wireless phone num-
ber, the entertainment system in your Saab 
will mute (if it is on), and you will hear a 
phone ringing sound. To answer the call, 
simply press the DOT button.
Ending a Call
When your call is finished, press the DOT 
button to end the call. It is not possible to 
end a call using voice commands.
1 Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”DIAL” OnStar will respond 
”Number Please”
3 Say the 1st 
Digit OnStar will repeat the 
number
4 Say the 2nd 
Digit OnStar will repeat the 
number
Continue saying numbers in this man-
ner until finished
5 Say ”DIAL” OnStar will respond 
”Dialing <number>,” 
then make the call
1Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”CALL” OnStar will respond 
”Nametag Please”
3Say ”<stored 
nametag>” OnStar will respond 
”Calling <nametag>”, 
then make the call
1Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”REDIAL” OnStar will respond 
”Redialing”, then 
make the call

114 OnStar - Telematics
Storing/Deleting Numbers in 
Memory
(Nametags)
Storing a number
Your OnStar system can store up to 20 
numbers (up to 32 digits each) in memory 
that can be dialed by simply repeating the 
”nametag.”
To store a number:
Deleting a Number from Memory
To delete a nametag:
Setting Tone or Voice Response
Your system comes from the factory with 
voice responses to your commands to con-
firm that the system received the command 
or number you intended. For example, 
when you are entering a number, OnStar 
repeats the number back to you. You may 
change the system to respond with a tone 
response if you prefer. A ready tone, a digit 
tone, or a goodbye tone will respond instead 
of the voice. All other responses will still be 
by voice.
Units Remaining
OnStar keeps track of the amount of calling 
time you have purchased and used in units. 
The number of total remaining units is 
stored within the OnStar system, and can be 
accessed easily.
Adding More Calling Minutes / Units
You can charge additional calling units with 
automatic refill by contacting OnStar, or by 
authorizing automatic unit refill on the 
OnStar Subscriber Website. For more infor-
mation about the OnStar Subscriber Web-
site, please see page  117.
Automatic Replenishment
If you run out of units during a call, your call 
will be terminated and you will be connected 
to OnStar for approval to replenish. You will 
be warned at the beginning of a call when 
you have ten or fewer calling units remain-
ing.
1Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”STORE” OnStar will respond 
”Number Please”
3 Say the 1st 
Digit OnStar will repeat the 
number
4 Say the 2nd 
Digit OnStar will repeat the 
digit
Continue saying numbers in this manner 
until finished
5 Say ”STORE” 
again OnStar will respond 
”Nametag Please”
6Say ”<new 
nametag>” OnStar will respond 
”Again”
7Say ”<new 
nametag>” OnStar will respond 
”Once More”
8Say ”<new 
nametag>” OnStar will respond 
”Storing <nametag>”
1 Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”DELETE” OnStar will respond 
”Nametag Please”
3Say 
”<nametag>” OnStar will respond 
”Delete <nametag>, 
YES or NO”
4 Say ”YES” OnStar will respond 
”Deleting <nametag>”
1 Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2Say ”Voice 
Feedback” OnStar will respond 
”Voice Feedback is 
now ON/OFF”
1Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”Units” OnStar will respond 
”Verify or Add”
3 Say ”Verify” OnStar will respond 
”You have # units 
remaining”

115OnStar - Telematics
Contact OnStar
You will need your OnStar Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN) to authorize the 
charge to your credit card on file.
If you are not in your Saab, you may call an 
OnStar Advisor at 1-888-4-ONSTAR 
(1-888-466-7827) to request unit replenish-
ment.
Security/Locking your System
You can set up a four-digit Personal Secu-
rity Code to ensure that unauthorized 
people do not use the calling capability of 
your system. With security set to ON, the 
system will not allow any personal calls. You 
must turn security OFF before calls can be 
made.
Volume Control
If your Saab is equipped with steering wheel 
controls, the volume of the audio portion of 
Personal Calling is controlled with your 
steering wheel volume control. In vehicles 
without steering wheel controls, and in 
some other vehicles, you can control the 
volume with the radio volume knob.
1Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”Units” OnStar will respond 
”Verify or Add”
3 Say ”Add” You will be connected to 
OnStar for replenish-
ment 1 Press the 
OnStar DOT but-
ton
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2 Say ”Security” OnStar will respond 
”Enter Four-Digit 
Security Code”
3 Say the 1st Digit OnStar will repeat 
the digit
4 Say the 2nd Digit OnStar will repeat 
the digit
5 Say the 3rd Digit OnStar will repeat 
the digit
6 Say the 4th Digit OnStar reply ”Secu-
rity (code # # # #) is 
now ON/OFF”

116 OnStar - Telematics
Virtual Advisor
(expected availability fourth quarter 2000)
Once you have activated Personal Calling, 
you can enjoy your time in your Saab even 
more with the OnStar Virtual Advisor. This 
service allows you to listen to your favorite 
news and information topics, such as 
weather reports, stock quotes and sports 
scores. You can even listen to your e-mail, 
whenever you want, without ever taking 
your eyes off the road. Using simple voice 
commands, you can browse your personal 
topics and skip or listen to those you 
choose. You can also search for additional 
information on special topics that interest 
you.
To find out how to set up a customized pro-
file, visit the OnStar Subscriber Website at 
www.onstar.com, or turn to the OnStar Sub-
scriber Website section on page 31 of this 
guide. If you do not have Internet access, 
you can still take advantage of the OnStar 
Virtual Advisor services as a default profile 
will be set up for you.
Calling the Virtual Advisor
Getting Information from the Virtual 
Advisor
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will prompt you 
for information you desire. These offerings 
will change to provide you with services and 
information that you and other subscribers 
want and need. The prompts are very clear 
and easy to understand and use.
Information Available
OnStar will continue to add new features 
and categories to the Virtual Advisor. The 
following general categories will give you an 
overview of the types of information avail-
able to you. For complete up-to-date cate-
gories, you can go to the Saab Cars USA, 
Inc. Website at www.saabusa.com or the 
OnStar Website at www.onstar.com, and 
then click on the link to the Subscriber Web-
site.
Weather
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will deliver an 
up-to-date weather forecast for the current 
location of the vehicle. The forecast 
includes current temperature, daily 
high/low, tomorrow’s high/low, precipitation 
forecast, and unusual conditions.
Stock Quotes
The OnStar Virtual Advisor can provide you 
with current quotes for the stocks you have 
specified in your customized profile as well 
as other requested stocks. All market data 
is delayed by twenty minutes. If you have 
not set your profile, you can still access the 
stock quote feature through your default 
profile and then request the stock of your 
choice.
Sports Scores
The OnStar Virtual Advisor can provide you 
with scores for your favorite college and pro-
fessional teams with up-to-the- minute high-
lights, even if they are being broadcast on a 
local station. See the team selection option 
in your Mobile Profiler section of the sub-
scriber section of OnStar.com.
If you have not set your profile or are still 
using the default profile, you can access the 
sports option of the Virtual Advisor and ask 
for an update on your favorite sport. You 
always have access to the options in the Vir-
tual Advisor.
1 Press the 
OnStar DOT 
button
OnStar will respond 
”Ready”
2Say ”Virtual 
Advisor” You will be connected 
to Virtual Advisor

117OnStar - Telematics
News Headlines
The OnStar Virtual Advisor will provide cur-
rent headlines for many different catego-
ries, including:
• International News Headlines
• National News Headlines
• Technology Headlines
• Business Headlines
• Sports Headlines
• Entertainment Headlines
E-mail Reader
The OnStar Virtual Advisor allows you to lis-
ten, and soon respond, to your e-mails any 
time you want. E-mail availability is based 
on the address(es) you provide to OnStar. 
Every Virtual Advisor enrollee will receive 
an E-mail account.
OnStar Subscriber 
Website
(Expected availability Fourth Quarter 2000)
As an OnStar subscriber, you have access 
to the OnStar Subscriber Website. The Sub-
scriber Website will provide you with impor-
tant facts about your OnStar subscription 
and allow you to customize your Virtual 
Advisor Mobile Profile. All this allows you to 
access up-to-the-minute information that 
can make your driving experience safer and 
more enjoyable. 
The Subscriber Website was designed to 
provide you with easy access to personal-
ized information, learn more about OnStar, 
update your account information, plan your 
travel, receive weather information and 
interact with OnStar.
You can also act like an OnStar Advisor and 
pinpoint your Saab. To access the Sub-
scriber Website, simply go to 
www.onstar.com, and then click on the 
OnStar Subscriber link. The OnStar Sub-
scriber Website is a secured site that is 
password protected. You will be required to 
provide your OnStar account number and 
personal identification number (PIN). If you 
do not know your account number or PIN, 
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR. For 
security reasons, your PIN will be mailed to 
your address on record.
Limitations
Notwithstanding anything contained herein, 
OnStar's nonperformance hereunder shall 
be excused if caused by act or omission of 
a cellular carrier or a third-party service pro-
vider, equipment failure, acts of god, strikes, 
equipment or facility shortage, or other 
causes beyond OnStar’s reasonable con-
trol. In addition, the liability of OnStar, if any, 
for any mistake, omission, interruption, 
delay, error, defect or other failure in the ser-
vice furnished, or in the equipment used in 
furnishing service, shall in no event exceed 
the amount of OnStar’s charges to sub-
scriber for said service during the period so 
affected, provided that no liability shall 
result for outages of 24 hours or less.
This manual includes the latest information 
at the time it was printed. We reserve the 
right to make changes in the products and 
services without prior notification.
In order to provide you with excellent ser-
vice, any call to the OnStar Center may be 
monitored or recorded.
All features may not be available on all mod-
els. Please consult your dealer for details.

118 OnStar - Telematics
OnStar Operation:
OnStar uses existing emergency service 
providers and cellular and satellite technol-
ogies. OnStar requires cellular service to be 
available and operating for features to func-
tion properly.
Personal Calling:
Existing OnStar service agreement 
required. Additional usage charges apply 
for Personal Calling. Interim 2001 model 
year availability in select markets. For 
system limitations and details, call 
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.
Virtual Advisor:
Existing OnStar and Personal Calling ser-
vice agreement required. Additional usage 
charges apply for Personal Calling. Interim 
2001 model year availability in select mar-
kets. For system limitations and details, call 
1-800-ONSTAR-7 or visit www.onstar.com.
Additional Information
Warranty
OnStar is warranted as part of the General 
Motors new vehicle limited warranty.
A Note About Privacy
At OnStar, we know you want to protect your 
privacy, and we take subscriber privacy 
very seriously. We never provide your per-
sonal information to another company or 
person unless you authorize it, or we are 
required to by the legal process, or in such 
cases where you have provided it for billing 
purposes or you have requested a hotel res-
ervation, are sending flowers, etc. Having 
this information on file with OnStar is a real 
advantage and helps you avoid repeating 
your credit card information over a cellular 
connection. Your trust is what we most 
value.
Transferring OnStar
Because your OnStar 3-button system is an 
integral part of your Saab, it cannot be trans-
ferred to another vehicle. Each OnStar 
System stays with the original car or truck in 
which it was installed.
The one-year OnStar prepaid subscription 
applicable to new retail deliveries cannot be 
transferred to another vehicle. However, if 
you’ve purchased additional years of ser-
vice and decide to dispose of your Saab, 
any remaining service will be refunded to 
you. Or, if you choose, you can have it trans-
ferred to another vehicle on your account. 
Any service that is refunded or transferred 
will be prorated at the monthly rate in effect 
at the time of transfer.
OnStar Subscription Information
To renew your subscription or upgrade your 
plan, just push the OnStar button, or call the 
OnStar customer service department at 
1-888-864-2801 between 8 am and 6 pm 
EST.

119Interior equipment and trunk
Interior equipment 
and trunk 
Seats ................................   120 
Steering-wheel 
adjustment.....................   124 
Rear-view mirrors ...........    125 
Electric windows.............    127 
Sunroof ............................   128 
Sun visors........................    130 
Ashtrays...........................   130 
Glove compartment ........    131 
Cup holders.....................    133 
Trunk................................   134 
Spare wheel and tools....    144 
Fuel filler flap...................    145 
Opening the fuel filler flap 
in an emergency............    145 
IB394

120 Interior equipment and trunk
Seats  
Both front seats are electrically operated. 
On certain models the driver´s seat is 
equipped with a memory function.
To facilitate getting into the car, both seats 
can be adjusted when either of the front 
doors is open.
For safety reasons, if the door is closed, the 
seat can only be adjusted when the ignition 
is ON. 
Note, however, that both seats can be 
adjusted for 30 seconds after both doors 
have been closed. 
The following seat adjustments can be 
made to achieve a comfortable driving 
position: 
•Height.
• Legroom.
• Backrest rake angle.
• Lumbar support.
• Head-restraint height.
We recommend that adjustments to the 
driver’s seat be performed in the following 
order: 
1Height.
2 Legroom.
3 Seat tilt angle.
4 Backrest rake angle.
Lastly, adjust the steering wheel (see page  
124). 
Side airbags 
(see page  28).
Head restraint
(see page 18).
Height 
To raise the seat, lift the lower control 
straight up. 
To lower the seat, press the lower control 
down. 
The same control can be used to adjust the 
height of the front and rear edges of the seat 
independently. 
WARNING
The seats are actuated by powerful 
motors. Ensure that nothing can be 
trapped when adjusting the seat. 
Bear in mind that children can be injured 
if they play with the electrically-operated 
seats
WARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat except 
when the car is stationary. 
IB401

121Interior equipment and trunk
Legroom adjustment 
To adjust the legroom, push the lower con-
trol forward or back. 
Backrest rake angle 
To adjust the backrest, move the upper con-
trol forward or back.
Lumbar support
Turn the smaller wheel for stepless adjust-
ment of the lumbar support. 
WARNING
The backrest should be upright during 
driving, so that the safety belt, airbag and 
backrest can provide optimum protection 
in the event of emergency braking or an 
accident. 
IB403
IB402
IB1161

122 Interior equipment and trunk
Programmable driver’s seat (certain 
models only) 
In certain models the driver´s seat is 
equipped with a programmable memory 
function. This function also includes the 
door mirrors.
Adjust the seat and door mirrors.
To save the settings, press and hold the M 
button and, at the same time, press one of 
the preselect buttons (1, 2 or 3). The SID will 
chime to confirm that the settings have been 
saved.
To recall the programmed settings, press 
the appropriate preset button, whereupon 
the seat and mirrors will be adjusted auto-
matically.
To change the settings stored in a preset 
button, adjust the seat and mirrors as before 
and save the new settings by pressing M 
and the appropriate preset button.
To facilitate reversing, the passenger side 
door mirror can be tilted down automati-
cally, e.g. to show the curb. To do this, 
select reverse and press the tiny button 
adjacent to the door-mirror control. When 
you deselect reverse, the mirror will return 
to its original setting automatically (see 
page 125).
IB404

123Interior equipment and trunk
Ventilated front seats (option)
Ventilated front seats, that enhance seating 
comfort in hot weather, are available as an 
option on cars equipped with leather-uphol-
stered and electrically adjustable seats. 
Ventilated seats are equipped with two fans 
that extract the moist air from between the 
seat and the body. 
The fans have three speeds and are OFF 
when the switch is set to 0. 
Electric heating, front seats (option)
Both front seats have adjustable and ther-
mostat-controlled heating of the seat cush-
ion and backrest, available as an option.
Heating is adjustable in three stages. In 
position 0 it is turned off.
Electrically heated seat cushions in 
the rear seat (option)
Electrically heated seat cushions for the two 
outer seats in the rear are available as an 
option. 
The ON/OFF control button for the cushion 
heating is located on the back of the center 
console. 
The warming-up time varies with the tem-
perature outside. 
The button has an integral indicator that is 
illuminated when the heating is on. 
IB406
IB407
IB405

124 Interior equipment and trunk
Steering-wheel 
adjustment 
Fore-and-aft and tilt adjustment of the steer-
ing wheel is possible.
Push down the lever to release the locking 
mechanism. Move the steering wheel to the 
desired position and then lift the lever to lock 
it. 
Make sure that the lever is fully locked 
before driving off. 
Horn
The horn is sounded by pressing the central 
part of the steering wheel. Press closest to 
the steering wheel rim.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel unless 
the car is stationary. 
IB408
To adjust the steering wheel 
IB1563

125Interior equipment and trunk
Rear-view mirrors
The rear-view mirror has day/night positions 
that can be selected by means of a knob 
beneath the mirror. Adjust the mirror in day 
position.
Door mirrors
The passenger side door mirror is of the 
wide-angle ‘‘aspheric” type.
The adjusting switch is on the driver’s door. 
If the car is equipped with a programmable 
driver’s seat, the settings of the door mirrors 
can also be stored in the preset buttons for 
the seat (see page 122). 
The mirrors are heated, and the heating 
comes on and goes off with the rear-window 
heater. 
The door mirrors are designed to fold back 
if knocked. They can also be fully retracted 
for parking in tight spaces, such as on the 
car deck of a ferry. Remember to fold them 
out again before driving off. 
WARNING
Take care not to trap your fingers 
between the door and the mirror when 
folding the mirror out again. 
NOTE
The door mirrors must be fully retracted 
before the car enters an automatic car 
wash.
IB426
2
1
Rear-view mirror 
1 Day position 
2 Night position 
IB1157
1
2
Adjusting the door mirrors 
1 Select mirror 
2 Use touch pad to adjust mirror 
IB428
Door mirror folded in 

126 Interior equipment and trunk
Cars equipped with a programmable 
driver’s seat also have a facility for angling 
the passenger’s mirror down on reversing, 
e.g. for a better view of the curb.
After selecting reverse, press the tiny button 
adjacent to the door-mirror switch to tilt the 
mirror. The mirror will be reset automatically 
when reverse gear is deselected.
Rear-view mirror with auto dimming 
function
The interior rear-view mirror has two sen-
sors, one forward-facing and one rear-fac-
ing.
The system is activated when the for-
ward-facing sensor detects that it is dark 
outside and the rear-facing sensor detects, 
for example, if the car following has not 
dimmed its headlights. The rear-view mirror 
is then darkened to prevent the strong light 
source from dazzling the driver. This dark-
ening is stepless.
The mirror returns to its normal state when 
the strong light source diminishes.
The auto dimming function can be turned 
OFF with the switch on the lower edge of the 
rear-view mirror.
The system is turned off when reverse gear 
is engaged or selected.
Towing a trailer can cause the system to 
malfunction, as the rear-facing sensor may 
sense light from the trailer.
IB568
Button for angling passenger’s mirror 
down on reversing 
IB1284
1
2
3
1 Forward-facing sensor
2 ON/OFF switch, auto dimming function
3 Rear-facing sensor

127Interior equipment and trunk
Electric windows
The electric motors of the front windows are 
equipped with overload protection (inte-
grated thermal protection). This protection 
operates when the windows are wound 
down automatically (switch pressed fully 
down).
To open:
Front windows: press the front of the switch 
Rear windows: Press the back of the switch. 
The switches for the front windows have a 
third position for automatic opening of the 
window. Press the switch fully down to lower 
the window completely.
To cancel automatic lowering of the win-
dow, lift the switch briefly.
To close:
Front windows: Lift the front of the switch.
Rear windows: Lift the back of the switch.
The actuating motor will be switched off 
automatically when the window is fully 
closed or when the switch is released. 
WARNING
• Bear in mind the pinch hazard when 
the side windows are being raised. 
Make sure that all passengers keep 
their heads, hands and fingers clear of 
the window openings before raising 
the windows. Serious personal injury 
may otherwise be caused.
•Always remove the ignition key when 
leaving the car to avert the danger of 
injury arising from unattended children 
operating the windows.
IB429
1 Window switches 
2 Switch for rendering rear-door window switches inoperative

128 Interior equipment and trunk
Child safety: rear windows (ON/OFF)
The window switches on the rear doors can 
be rendered inoperative by the ON/OFF 
switch in the panel on the center console.
When the switch is ON, the rear side win-
dows can be operated by the switch on each 
rear door. The switch’s back lighting will be 
activated.
When the switch is OFF, the rear side win-
dows can only be operated from the panel 
on the center console. When off, the 
switch’s back lighting will also be switched 
off.
Sunroof 
(Option in Canada) 
The sunroof is operated by the switch on the 
overhead panel above the rearview mirror. 
The sunroof can be opened partially or fully. 
WARNING
• Bear in mind the pinch hazard when 
operating the sunroof. Make sure that 
all passengers keep their heads, 
hands and fingers clear of the opening 
before operating the sunroof. Serious 
personal injury may otherwise be 
caused. 
•Always remove the ignition key when 
leaving the car, to avert the danger of 
injury arising from unattended children 
operating the sunroof. 
IB445
Switch for rear side window 

129Interior equipment and trunk
To open: 
• Slide the control towards the rear to open 
the sunroof to the comfort position.
To open it fully, slide the control back a 
second time. Press the control to stop it 
earlier. 
To close: 
• Slide the control forwards until the sun-
roof is closed. 
Ventilation position 
• Press the middle of the control (when sun-
roof closed). 
• To close: slide the control forwards. 
To fully open the sunroof from the ventila-
tion position, slide the control back. 
The sunroof incorporates an interior, man-
ual, sliding sun blind. 
After the car has been waxed, the sunroof 
may squeak or squeal on opening to the 
ventilation position. If this should occur, fully 
open the sunroof and, using washer fluid, 
wash the seal along the front edge, together 
with the paintwork that is in contact with the 
seal when the roof is closed. 
Emergency operation of sunroof
In an emergency (e.g. if there is an electrical 
failure) the sunroof can be operated by a 
screwdriver. Remove the cover at the front 
of the sunroof opening, insert a screwdriver 
in the groove, and rotate. 
Rotate counterclockwise to close sunroof. 
IB430
13
2
Sunroof control 
1 To open 
2 To close 
3 Ventilation position 
IB431
Manual operation of sunroof 

130 Interior equipment and trunk
Sun visors
The car is equipped with double sun visors. 
One section of the visor can be indepen-
dently pivoted to the side window. 
A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the 
sun visors. The vanity mirrors are illumi-
nated when the cover is raised. 
Ashtrays
(accessory) 
The car can be equipped with three ash-
trays: one in the instrument panel fascia, 
and one in each rear door. A cigarette lighter 
is fitted adjacent to the front ashtray, and 
there is also one in the back of the center 
console. 
Front ashtray 
1 To open the ashtray, push gently on the 
center/upper part of the front and 
release to allow it to spring out. 
2 Close the ashtray in the same way.
To remove the ashtray, open it and after that 
pull left side out at an angle. 
To refit, line up the slots on either side and 
slide it closed. 
Rear ashtrays 
Open the lid to use ashtray. 
To remove the ashtray, fully open the lid and 
lift the ashtray straight out. 
To refit the ashtray, make sure it engages 
the two square recesses in the door trim. 
IB1180
Sun visor with vanity mirror 
IB1285
1
2
Front ashtray 
1 Press soft to open/close 
2 Pull out one side at an angle 
IB434
Rear ashtray 

131Interior equipment and trunk
Cigarette lighters 
(certain markets only)
The car is provided with cigarette lighters 
next to the front ashtray and in the rear end 
of the centre console.
The cigarette lighter socket can also be 
used as power point, e.g. for a mobile 
phone. The ignition should be in the ON 
position.
The cigarette lighter sockets can also be 
used for accessories (e.g. to charge a 
mobile phone) when the ignition is ON. 
Glove compartment 
The glove compartment can be cooled by 
the air conditioning (ACC) system. Cold air 
can be directed to the glove compartment 
for keeping drinks chilled, etc. 
Slide the cover towards you to admit cold 
air. 
Additional storage facilities are provided 
(see next page). 
WARNING
The maximum combined load for the two 
cigarette lighter sockets is 240 W (20 A). 
WARNING
Keep the glove compartment closed 
when not in use. The lid could cause 
injury in the event of an accident. 
IB1115
1
2
Glove compartment 
1To lock 
2 To unlock 
IB1286
Sliding cover in glove compartment to 
admit cold air 

132 Interior equipment and trunk
IB436
IB437
IB439
IB440
IB441 IB438
On the back of the front seats 
Center armrest for rear seat 
At bottom of door pillars adjacent to 
front-seat backrests 
On leading edge of front seats 
Console between front seats 
In the doors 

133Interior equipment and trunk
Cup holders 
Cup holders are provided in the instrument 
panel fascia, in the center console compart-
ment between the front seats, and in the 
rear-seat armrest.
To access the cup holder in the instrument 
panel, press the symbol and release. 
To access the cup holder in the rear-seat 
armrest, lower the armrest and press the 
front edge of the holder. Close in the same 
way. 
The number of cup holders provided may 
vary between models. 
WARNING
• The cup holder should not be used to 
hold cups made of china, glass or hard 
plastic as these can cause injury in the 
event of an accident. 
• Use only for paper cups or aluminium 
cans. 
• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot 
drinks.
IB1153
1
2
Cup holder in center console 
IB443
Cup holder in rear armrest
Press the edge to open/close. 
IB444
Cup holder in fascia 
1 Press symbol to open 
2 Lift bottom to close 

134 Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan
The rear seat is split and the two sections can be folded indepen-
dently. Folding down of the rear seat is easier if the front seats are 
not all the way back, and the rear head restraints are folded down.
1 Lift the seat cushion by pulling the loop located between the 
cushion and the backrest. 
2 Tip the seat cushion forward. 
3 Press the button adjacent to the respective backrest to release it. 
4 Fold down the backrest. 
WARNING
• Rear-seat passengers should always ensure that the head 
restraint is raised and in proper position.
• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.
• Never place heavy objects on the rear window shelf. There is 
always a danger of loose objects flying about and causing 
injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in an 
accident.
• Before folding up the backrest, hang the outer safety belts 
onto the hook on the respective courtesy handle to prevent 
them from becoming trapped.
• Check that the back rest release button (3) is flush with the 
surround before entering the rear seat.
IB459
1 2
4
3
IB461
Outer safety belt hooked onto courtesy handle 

135Interior equipment and trunk
WARNING
• Place heavy items closest to the backrest and stow smaller 
and lighter items on top. 
• Secure heavy and bulky items using the four tie down points 
provided in the trunk. This will avert the danger of luggage 
flying around if the car should brake suddenly or be involved 
in an accident (see page 136). 
• When the backrest is folded down or the trunk pass-through 
hatch is open, even small items can be thrown around inside 
the car. It is therefore advisable to secure these as well. 
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its 
handling characteristics (see page 250). 
• Make sure that the seat cushions and backrests are properly 
secured when folding them back to their normal position. 
Check that the button (item 3 on page 134) is flush with the 
surround before entering the back seat.
The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot during 
driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading the car so 
that children, for example, do not burn themselves.
IB462

136 Interior equipment and trunk
Trunk pass-through hatch 
A trunk pass-through hatch is incorporated in the rear-seat backrest 
to enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car. 
Items should not weigh more than 33 lbs. (15 kg) nor be more than 
2 yards (2 metres) in length. See the label on the hatch. 
1 Fold down the armrest. 
2 Raise the hatch by lifting the handle. 
Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and 
apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off 
suddenly if a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into 
gear. 
Tie Downs
Four tie downs for securing the load are fitted inside the trunk. Place 
the load as far in as possible. 
WARNING
• Anchor the load securely (e.g. using middle safety belt) to 
avoid danger of injury resulting from displacement of load on 
hard braking. 
• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its 
handling characteristics (see page 250). 
IB463
IB464

137Interior equipment and trunk
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon
Both the narrow and wide sections of the rear seat can be folded 
separately. Folding is facilitated if the front seats are not located too 
far back. The wide section cannot be folded separately if a cargo net 
is mounted on the rear of the backrest.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position.
2 Put the safety belts for the outer seat places in their respective 
belt clips, which are located near the backrest (see illustration).
3 Lift the seat cushion by pulling the loop located between the 
cushion and the backrest.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising 
the opening handle on the right-hand side.
5 Fold the wide section of the backrest forward in the 
corresponding manner.
6 Adjust the front seats for optimal driving/passenger comfort.
Alternative location of the parcel shelf if this is removed: 
• Folded up on the floor at the rear of the luggage compartment.
• On edge behind the backrests of the front seats.
NOTE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in 
their respective belt clips near the backrest to prevent them being 
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position.
IB1211
IB1212
Safety belt located 
in its belt clip

138 Interior equipment and trunk
Folding the narrow section of the backrest
The folding is facilitated if the front seat is not too far back.
1 Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position.
2 Put the safety belt in the belt clip near the backrest.
3 Lift the seat cushion by pulling the loop located between the 
cushion and the backrest.
4 Fold the narrow section (right) of the backrest forward by raising 
the opening handle.
5 Adjust the front seat for optimal passenger comfort.
WARNING
• Do not travel in the back seat without ensuring that the head 
restraint is set at a suitable height.
• Never allow anyone to sit on a folded backrest.
• Always be aware of the risk of pinching when handling moving 
parts of the seating.
• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always 
a danger of loose objects flying about and causing injury if the 
car should brake suddenly or be involved in an accident.
• Make sure that the backrests are locked when they are folded 
back upright. Check that the two red warning-indication flags 
are fully down. This indicates that the backrests are locked.
• Check that the safety belt lock is not trapped under the seat 
cushions when these are raised back up.
• If the car is equipped with a pull-out cargo net on the rear of the 
backrest, take extra care when folding the rear seat so that no 
one is injured by the net’s storage cassette on the right-hand 
side.
NOTE
The safety belts for the outer seating positions should be put in 
their respective belt clips near the back rest to prevent them being 
pinched when the rear seat is raised to the upright position, see 
illustration page 137.
IB1213

139Interior equipment and trunk
Load anchoring 
Driving with the trunk lid/tailgate open, see 
page 180.
WARNING
• Put heavy loads as low down and as 
far forward as possible in the luggage 
compartment, i.e. against the back of 
the rear seat.
• Never stack cargo so high that any part 
of the cargo lies above the edge of the 
backrest, if a cargo guard (accessory) 
is not being used.
• Always tie down the cargo so that it 
cannot be thrown forward during 
heavy braking or in the event of a 
collision.
• Unsecured and heavy cargo can 
increase the risk of injury during hard 
braking, sudden avoidance maneu-
vers and in the event of a collision.
• For the best load anchoring, use the 
special cargo bolt and load straps 
(accessory).
• Load the cargo bolts evenly. Never 
attach more than one strap to each tie 
down eye.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to 
prevent damage to the load straps.
• Never use the elastic floor net and 
elastic side net when the rear seat is 
folded down. These nets are only 
intended to keep light objects tidy, not 
for the anchoring of loads.
• If possible, avoid having the rear seat 
folded down when driving with a heavy 
load because the anchoring possibili-
ties are restricted when the rear seat is 
in this position. That the rear seat is in 
the upright position is a basic require-
ment for protection against cargo dis-
placement in the event of a collision.
• Cargo can intrude into the passenger 
compartment during a sudden stop or 
front crash if the outer safety belts are 
not fastened. Check that the two red 
warning-indication flags are fully 
down. This shows that the backrests 
are locked.
WARNING
• The driving characteristics of the car 
can be affected because the center of 
gravity is altered when there is a cargo 
in the luggage compartment. There-
fore match the speed and driving style 
according to how the car is loaded.
• An object weighing 55 lbs. (25 kg) cor-
responds to a weight of 2200 lbs. 
(1000 kg) in a head on collision at 
32 mph (50 km/h).
• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and 
luggage) so that the gross vehicle 
weight or the axle weight is not 
exceeded, see page 250.

140 Interior equipment and trunk
On the floor of the luggage compartment 
there are two longitudinal aluminium rails 
(CargoTracks™) where special cargo bolts 
can be mounted.
The protective strip on the CargoTracks™ is 
removed by lifting its back edge and pulling 
it straight upwards. Replace the strip by 
pressing it down on the CargoTracks™. 
When the cargo bolts are not being used the 
protective strip should be in place.
The cargo bolts are mounted by lifting their 
locks and inserting them into the rail. Each 
cargo bolt is moved in the following way: pull 
up its lock and at the same time move it for-
wards or backwards to the desired position.
Items for load anchoring:
• Cargo bolts (standard).
• Special load straps (accessory).
Items to keep light objects tidy:
• Elastic floor cargo net.
• Elastic side cargo net for the right-hand 
side of the luggage compartment.
The elastic nets may only be used to keep 
light objects tidy, not for anchoring.
The floor net should be attached to the 
cargo bolts that are mounted on the Car-
goTracks™. Place the tie down eyes as far 
forward and as far back as possible on the 
CargoTracks™.
The side netting should be attached to the 
two tie down eyes which are included in the 
accessory kit and to two of the eyes 
mounted on the right-hand CargoTrack™ 
on the floor.
The cargo bolts, load straps and elastic nets 
are stored in the two floor lockers on the 
right- and left-hand side of the luggage com-
partment. The lockers are opened by lifting 
the respective fabric loop.
NOTE
Do not place any objects so that the 
demisting and antenna elements on the 
inside of the window could be damaged.
IB1214
Cargo bolts mounted on the longitudinal 
rails 
IB1216
Example of cargo anchoring 
IB1215
Elastic cargo net for lighter objects. 

141Interior equipment and trunk
Cargo net
The pull-out cargo net’s storage cassette is 
mounted on the rear of the backrest.
1 Remove the covers near the two rear 
fixing points in the roof. Carefully bend in 
the lower edge of the cover with a screw-
driver.
2 Pull the cargo net out directly back-
wards.
3 Snap the net’s two fasteners into the two 
fixing points on the roof.
4 Make sure that the hooks on the net’s 
own storage cassette fit against the net 
mesh.
The pull-out cargo net can also be used 
when the whole rear seat is folded. There 
are two front attachment points in the roof 
for this purpose.
Removing the cargo net storage cas-
sette
1 Fold down the entire rear seat (see 
page 137).
2 Push the cassette to the right.
WARNING
• The cargo in the luggage compart-
ment must be anchored properly, 
even if the cargo net is correctly in 
position. The only purpose of the net is 
to prevent objects from being thrown 
about in the cabin during heavy brak-
ing or in the event of a collision.
• Take extra care when tipping the wide 
section of the rear seat forwards if the 
car has a pull-out cargo net on the rear 
of the backrest. Make sure that no one 
is injured by the cargo net’s storage 
cassette on the right-hand side where 
the backrest is already folded.
IB1217
Cover over the fixing point for the cargo 
net 
IB1218
Attaching the cargo net to the roof
IB1219
Hooks on the net’s storage cassette

142 Interior equipment and trunk
Sliding floor (accessory)
The function of the sliding floor is to facilitate 
loading and unloading.
Securing loads, see page 136.
When the car is parked and the floor is 
pulled out, it can bear the weight of two 
people (maximum 440 lbs./200 kg).
The maximum load that can be anchored by 
anchorage straps and cargo bolts is 
170 lbs./80 kg.
Setting up
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold out the support wheels.
3 Set the floor down on the support 
wheels.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury take note of the 
following:
• Do not leave children unsupervised 
when the sliding floor is drawn out.
• Be aware of the risk of pinching when 
handling the sliding floor.
• Never drive the car with the sliding 
floor pulled out.
• Always use the car’s regular cargo 
anchoring when transporting a cargo.
• Provide protection on sharp edges to 
prevent damage to the anchoring 
straps.
• The sliding floor must not be changed 
or modified in any way.
• Put the sliding floor in the folded- down 
position when it is not in use.
IB1220
Setting up the sliding floor 

143Interior equipment and trunk
Loading/Unloading
1 Lift the handle and pull out the sliding 
floor to the outer locking position. Make 
sure that the floor is locked correctly.
2 Put on the cargo, but make sure that it 
does not cover the handle.
3 Lift the handle and push in the floor to 
the inner locking position. Make sure 
that the floor is locked correctly.
4 Tie down the load with Saab’s load 
straps according to the instructions, see 
page 139.
When the floor is not in use
1 Lift up the floor.
2 Fold down the support wheels.
3 Lay down the sliding floor and make sure 
that it is locked in its lower position.
IB1221
Loading 
IB1222
Folding down the sliding floor 

144 Interior equipment and trunk
Spare wheel and tools
The spare wheel, together with the jack and 
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye 
and toolkit, are stowed away underneath 
the trunk. There is a bag for covering the 
changed wheel. There is also room for a 
spare bulb wallet (accessory).
Driving considerations with compact spare 
wheel/tire fitted, see page 180.
Warning triangle
9-5 Sedan
There is provision for stowing a warning tri-
angle in the luggage compartment.
To release the ties, lift the lugs. Make sure 
they are securely fastened when replacing 
the warning triangle.
9-5 Wagon
The warning triangle is stowed under the 
luggage compartment floor.
WARNING
Stow all tools carefully away after use, so 
that they cannot get loose and cause 
injury in the event of an accident.
Keep plastic bags away from children.
IB465
Stowage of spare wheel and tools under 
trunk floor 
IB1554
IB596
Jack location, between spare wheel and 
sill Warning triangle, 9-5 Sedan

145Interior equipment and trunk
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is opened by means of a 
button on the driver’s door. The flap is 
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
Refueling, see page 154.
Opening the fuel filler 
flap in an emergency
If the fuel filler flap fails to open after the 
button on the driver’s door has been 
pressed, it can be opened manually from 
inside the trunk.
9-5 Sedan:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page 217). 
A thin cable on the right-hand side in the 
trunk is connected to the catch for the filler 
flap. To open the flap, pull the yellow plastic 
arrow on the end of the cable. 
9-5 Wagon:
Start by checking fuse 25 (see page  217).
On the right-hand side of the luggage com-
partment, in the storage locker, is a thin wire 
that is tied to the locking arm of the filler flap. 
To open the flap pull the yellow plastic arrow 
attached to the end of the wire.
IB1231
To open filler flap in an emergency,
9-5 Wagon
IB467
To open fuel filler flap in an emergency
9-5 Sedan
IB466
Button for releasing filler flap 

146 Interior equipment and trunk
(This page has been left blank)

147Starting and driving
Starting and driving
IB597
Ignition switch .................    148 
Starting the engine..........    149 
Important considerations 
for driving.......................    151 
Refueling ..........................   154 
Engine Break-In Period ...    157 
Gear changing .................    158 
Cruise control ..................    166 
Braking .............................   167 
Traction Control System.    169 
Economical motoring......    170 
Driving in cold weather...    172 
Driving in hot weather ....    173 
Towing a trailer................    174 
Driving with a roof rack 
load.................................   176 
Driving with a load ..........    179 
Driving considerations 
with compact spare 
wheel/tire fitted..............    180 
Driving with the trunk 
lid/tailgate open.............    180 
Driving in deep water......    180 
Towing the car.................    181 
Jump starting ...................    183 
Parking brake ...................    185 
Parking..............................   185 

148 Starting and driving
Ignition switch
The combined ignition switch and 
gear-lever lock is located in the center con-
sole between the front seats. The ignition 
key can only be removed when reverse is 
engaged (automatic transmission: selector 
in ”P” position). 
The key fits all the locks on the car. The key 
number is specified on the small plastic 
strap that comes with the keys when the car 
is delivered. Keep a note of the key number 
in a safe place, as you will need to quote it if 
ordering a replacement key. 
See also page 34. 
LOCK position 
Engage reverse and turn the key to LOCK.
Automatic transmission: select ”P”.
The gear lever is locked. This is the only position in which the key can be 
removed.
The parking lights, hazard warning lights and interior lighting all work. 
OFF position 
Gear lever no longer locked.
Certain electrical circuits operational
ON position 
All electrical circuits working. Do not leave the key in the ON position 
when the engine is not running. Turn the key to OFF to switch off the 
electrical circuits. In the ON position certain warning and indicator lights 
come on as a check, and they normally are extinguished after about 
3 seconds.
ST (starter) position 
The starter operates when the key is turned to this position. When 
released, the key will spring back to the ON position. If the engine fails to 
start, the key must first be turned back to the position between OFF and 
LOCK before the starter can be operated again. 
When the starter motor is running, several electrical circuits are 
disconnected to facilitate starting. 
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
L
O
C
K
O
F
F
O
N
S
T
IB1120

149Starting and driving
       If the car does not start
If the text ”KEY NOT ACCEPTED” is shown 
on the SID, after a failed start attempt, the 
cause could be a fault in the transmitter in 
the key, or in the receiver in the ignition lock. 
The following should be done:
• Turn the key back to the LOCK position.
• Turn the key to ON.
• Press one of the buttons on the remote 
control (the LED stops blinking).
• Start the engine.
Try another key. If this works, then the fault 
is in the first key.
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for 
checking and rectification.
Starting the engine 
NOTE
Take care not to spill drinks or to drop 
crumbs over the ignition switch. If dirt or 
liquid gets into it, the switch may not 
operate properly. 
WARNING
• Always remove the key before leaving 
the car. 
• Always apply the parking brake before 
removing the ignition key. 
WARNING
• When starting the engine:
- Sit down in the driver’s seat.
- Depress the clutch pedal fully. If gear 
lever is not in the neutral position, the 
clutch pedal must be fully depressed 
or the car will jump forwards or back-
wards, which may cause an acci-
dent.
- Never start the car from outside the 
vehicle, e.g. through a wound down 
window. This could lead to serious 
personal injury.
• Engage reverse (R) (position P for 
automatic transmission) to remove the 
ignition key. The key can only be 
removed in this gear position.
• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colorless, 
odorless, poisonous gas. Be alert to 
the danger of CO – always open the 
garage doors before starting the 
engine in the garage. 
• There is also a danger of CO poison-
ing if the exhaust system is leaking. 

150 Starting and driving
It is possible for air to enter the lubricating 
system in conjunction with an oil or oil-filter 
change, or if the car has been stored for 
some time. This air can cause the hydraulic 
cam followers to emit a ticking noise, which 
can persist for up to 15 minutes after start-
ing. Although this is quite normal and does 
not indicate any malfunction, it is advisable 
not to exceed 3,000 rpm before the noise 
has disappeared. 
The hydraulic cam lifters are completely 
service free; the valve clearance is set up at 
the factory and will not need any subse-
quent adjustment. 
Starting the engine
Avoid racing the engine or putting a heavy 
load on it before it has warmed up. Drive 
away as soon as the oil warning light has 
been extinguished to enable the engine to 
attain its normal temperature as quickly as 
possible.
The engine has an automatic choke and 
should be started as follows:
Cars with manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must 
be fully depressed.
1 Depress the clutch pedal fully but do not 
touch the accelerator.
2 Start the engine. Let the ignition key 
spring back as soon as the engine has 
started and is running smoothly – at very 
low temperatures, you may need to run 
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait 
20-30 seconds before running the 
starter again, to give the battery time to 
recover.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do 
not open the throttle wide for at least 
2-3 minutes after starting. 
Cars with automatic transmission 
1 The selector lever must be in the P or N 
position. 
2 Keep your foot on the brake pedal. 
3 Start the engine. Let the ignition key 
spring back as soon as the engine has 
started and is running smoothly – at very 
low temperatures, you may need to run 
the starter for up to 25 seconds. Wait 
20-30 seconds before running the 
starter again, to give the battery time to 
recover.
Let the engine idle for about 10 seconds. Do 
not open the throttle wide for at least 
2–3 minutes after starting. 
Useful tips on cold climate starting 
If the engine has failed to start after several 
attempts in very cold weather, press and 
hold the accelerator down to the floor and 
run the starter for 5–10 seconds. This will 
prevent the engine being flooded (exces-
sively rich fuel-air mixture). 
Now start the engine in the normal way – do 
not touch the accelerator. 
If the engine stalls immediately after starting 
(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly), 
do not touch the accelerator when restarting 
the engine. 
• The tail pipe of the exhaust system 
can become very hot during driving. 
Bear this in mind when loading and 
unloading the car.
• Do not rest or sleep in the car when 
parked with the engine running. There 
is a risk of depressing the accelerator 
which could lead to engine damage.

151Starting and driving
Limp-home mode
The car’s engine-management system 
includes a diagnostic function that checks 
numerous internal functions after the 
engine has been shut off. If a fault is 
detected in the throttle system, the 
engine-management system puts the throt-
tle system into the limp-home mode. This 
limits idling control, disables the cruise-con-
trol system and limits the capacity of the A/C 
compressor. 
If the limp-home mode is in operation 
(”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” 
light on, see below) and the outside temper-
ature is close to or below freezing, you may 
need to use some throttle on starting (some 
pressure on the accelerator).
If the diagnostic system has detected a fault 
in the engine-management system, the 
”Engine malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” 
light   on the main instrument panel will 
come on (see page 51), indicating that you 
should have the car checked as soon as 
possible by an authorized Saab dealer.
Important 
considerations for 
driving
The engine-management system in the 
Saab 9-5 is called Saab Trionic T7. The 
system manages the ignition, fuel injection 
and turbo boost pressure. 
The Trionic T7 system developed by Saab 
is an intelligent engine-management 
system designed to achieve optimum driv-
ability under differing driving conditions. 
The system makes adjustments automati-
cally, for instance, if the car is being driven 
at altitude (oxygen-deficient air), for differ-
ent grades of fuel (AON 87–93) and for dif-
ferent load conditions. 
1 Starting and driving 
• Refrain from using full throttle before 
the engine has warmed up (before 
needle in mid-range on temperature 
gauge). 
• A safety function prevents the engine 
from revving faster than 6,000 rpm by 
limiting the induction air. 
2 Stopping the engine 
• Do not rev the engine immediately 
before switching it off - stop the engine 
when it is idling. 
3 Regulating the boost pressure 
• The system is optimized for fuel with an 
octane rating of AON 90. The 2.3 T 
(Aero) and 3.0t V6 are optimized for 
NOTE
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light   
starts to flash, ease off the accelerator 
slightly. If the light does not cease to flash 
within 5 seconds, stop the car in a suita-
ble place as soon as possible and turn off 
the engine. The car must be towed to an 
authorized Saab dealer.
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light 
flashes, it indicates that the engine is 
misfiring which can result in damage to 
the catalytic converter.

152 Starting and driving
AON 93. One of the advantages of the 
system is that it enables the engine to 
be run safely on lower-grade fuel, 
although not lower than AON 87. 
• The maximum boost pressure is 
adjusted automatically to the knocking 
or pinging tendency of the engine. 
Occasional, short-lived knocking when 
the engine is under a heavy load is per-
fectly normal; the extent will depend on 
the grade of fuel in the tank. 
• Isolated instances of knocking are 
more likely to occur with low-octane 
fuel. This controlled form of knocking, 
followed by a reduction in the boost 
pressure, is a sign that the wastegate is 
functioning and is perfectly safe for the 
engine. 
Important considerations with cata-
lytic converters
The catalytic converter is an emission-con-
trol device incorporated in the car’s exhaust 
system. It consists of a metal canister with a 
honeycomb insert, the cells of which have 
walls coated in a catalytic layer (mixture of 
precious metals). 
To ensure that the catalytic converter con-
tinues to function properly, and also to avoid 
damage to the converter and its associated 
components, the following points must be 
observed: 
• Have the car serviced regularly in accor-
dance with the service program. The fuel 
and ignition systems are particularly 
important in this context. 
• Always be alert to any misfiring of the 
engine (not running on all cylinders) and 
any loss of power or performance. At the 
first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed 
and take the car to an authorized Saab 
dealer as soon as possible. 
• If the engine fails to start (in very cold 
weather or if the battery is flat), the car can 
be jump started (manual gearbox only) or 
started using jump leads to a donor bat-
NOTE
If constant knocking occurs every time a 
load is put on the engine, this indicates a 
malfunction in the system. 
Have the car checked without delay by an 
authorized Saab dealer. 
WARNING
If the engine is being run with the car on a 
rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure 
adequate cooling, air must be blown into 
the engine compartment and under the 
car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air 
effect that would be obtained at the corre-
sponding road speed. 
NOTE
Use only unleaded gasoline. Leaded gas-
oline is detrimental to the catalyst and 
oxygen sensor and will seriously impair 
the function of the catalytic converter. 

153Starting and driving
tery. However, as soon as you have 
started the engine, it is important that it 
runs on all cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow 
it  to  idle  fo r u p to fi ve m inu tes  to give  it t ime 
to settle and run smoothly. If, after this 
time, the engine still fails to run properly, 
turn off the engine and get in touch with an 
authorized Saab dealer for advice. 
• Never park the car on dry grass or other 
combustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could therefore 
start a fire. 
• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring. 
• If you jump start the car when the engine 
is already up to normal temperature, the 
engine must start to run on all cylinders. 
Stop jump-starting if the engine fails to 
start immediately. 
Failure to follow these directions could 
result in the catalytic converter and associ-
ated components being damaged, and 
could represent a breach of the warranty 
conditions.
3.0t V6: When starting the engine from cold 
an electrical pump is activated. This pump 
pumps air into the exhaust system so that 
the catalytic converter will reach its normal 
operating temperature more rapidly. The 
pump is active for 30-60 seconds.
Fuel filler flap
The fuel filler flap is opened by means of a 
button on the driver’s door. The flap is 
spring-loaded, so it opens slightly automat-
ically when released.
NOTE
If the car runs out of fuel, it is possible for 
air to get into the fuel system. If this 
happens, the catalytic converter may 
overheat and be damaged.
IB1289
2
2
1
3
3
Oxygen-sensor-controlled 
injection system 
1 Engine control module 
2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe) 
3 Catalytic converters
B466
Button for releasing filler flap

154 Starting and driving
Refueling
Only fuel from well-known oil companies 
should be used.
All Saab gasoline engines can be driven on 
fuel of grade AON 87-93.
For optimum performance we recommend:
•AON 90 for 4-cylinder engines 
•AON 93 for 3.0t V6 and 2.3T Aero, (see 
page 252). 
If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is 
used, the following restrictions apply: 
Methanol: max. 5% by volume.
Ethanol: max. 10% by volume.
MTBE: max. 15% by volume.
The fuel filler cap is located in the right rear 
quarter panel.
Switch off engine.
Open fuel door
Insert the fuel-pump nozzle beyond the 
flange on the filler pipe. Do not withdraw the 
nozzle while filling is in progress. 
Cease refueling the first time the pump 
stops.
Fuel-tank capacity: 18.5 US gal. (70 liters)
Screw on the filler cap and keep turning until 
it has clicked at least three times. 
The most effective way to prevent conden-
sation forming in the tank (and thus avoid 
possible running problems) is to keep the 
tank well filled. 
Before the onset of freezing temperatures in 
winter, it may be advisable to add gasoline 
anti-freeze to the fuel a few times to dispel 
any condensation in the system. 
WARNING
• Never use fuel for any purpose other 
than as engine fuel. 
• Fuel is highly flammable and can 
cause severe burns. Never use an 
open flame in the vicinity of gasoline 
and do not smoke when refuelling. 
• Do not use the phone when refueling . 
Gasoline fuels are highly explosive.
NOTE
Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right 
up the filler pipe as expansion room is 
needed. 
IB470

155Starting and driving
Opening the fuel filler flap in an emergency, 
see page 145.
Recommended fuel:
The engine in your Saab 9-5 is designed to 
operate on unleaded gasoline that has an 
octane rating of 87 or higher. Octane rating 
is determined according to the formula:
where MON is the Motor Octane Number, 
and RON is the Research Octane Number.
The average of these two values is the 
octane rating of the gasoline as it appears 
on the pump at a retail gas station. This 
value is sometimes referred to as the 
"Anti-Knock Index" (AKI) or the "Average 
Octane Number" (AON).
To avoid deposit formation on the fuel injec-
tors which can cause poor driveability, use 
only quality gasolines that contain deter-
gents and corrosion inhibitors. Because 
gasolines sold at retail gas stations vary in 
their composition and quality, you should 
switch to a different brand if you begin expe-
riencing driveability and/or hard starting 
problems shortly after refueling your car. In 
recent years, a variety of fuel additives and 
alcohols or oxygenates have been blended 
with gasoline. These types of gasolines may 
be found in all parts of the United States and 
Canada, but particularly in geographic 
areas and cities that have high carbon mon-
oxide levels. Saab approves the use of such 
"reformulated" gasolines in its products, 
which help in reducing pollution from all 
motor vehicles, provided that the following 
blending percentages are met by such 
fuels:
• Up to 10% ethanol by volume, with corro-
sion inhibitors.
• Up to 15% MTBE by volume (methyl ter-
tiary butyl ether).
• Up to 5% methanol by volume, with an 
equal amount of a suitable co-solvent and 
added corrosion inhibitors.
Other, less common, fuel additives used by 
some gasoline dealers are also acceptable, 
provided that the resultant gasoline is not 
more than 2.7% oxygen by weight.
Some Canadian and U.S. gasolines contain 
an octane enhancing additive called meth-
lycyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl 
(MMT). If such fuel is used, your emission 
control system performance may deterio-
rate and the malfunction indicator lamp on 
your instrument panel may turn on. If this 
occurs, return to your authorized Saab 
dealer for service.
However, these blended gasolines are reg-
ulated and should never exceed these rec-
ommended blend percentages and service 
station operators should know if their gaso-
lines contain detergents and oxygenates, 
and have been reformulated to reduce vehi-
cle emissions. Nevertheless, if you begin to 
notice a problem with the way your car starts 
or runs shortly after it has been refueled, try 
a different brand of gasoline.
NOTE
• Fill to maximum filling capacity
• Stop filling after the first time that the 
nozzle trips to shut off the flow of fuel
• Filling capacity can differ between 
different fuel stations and outside 
temperature. Fuel tank volume when 
nozzle trips to shut off, may vary by 
0.5 gal. (2 liters).
• Do not fill fuel all the way up the filler 
pipe. The gasoline must be allowed 
room for expansion especially during 
hot weather.
MON + RON
2

156 Starting and driving
Fuel (Gasoline Engine)
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 
octane or higher. It is recommended that the 
gasoline meet specifications which were 
developed by the American Automobile 
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and 
endorsed by the Canadian Motor Vehicle 
Manufacturers Association for better vehi-
cle performance and engine protection. 
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification 
could provide improved driveability and 
emission control system performance com-
pared to other gasolines.
NOTE
Higher concentrations of methanol than 
listed above, or the use of methanol- 
blended gasoline without suitable 
co-solvents and corrosion inhibitors, 
can damage your car’s fuel system, 
leading to the need for repairs which are 
not covered by Saab’s product warranty.
NOTE
The engine control module (ECM) moni-
toring the engine parameters also stores 
fault codes.
Under certain circumstances, this may 
cause constant illumination of the 
”Engine malfunction (CHECK 
ENGINE)” lamp  , thus indicating a 
fault that must be checked by your Saab 
dealer.
NOTE: always observe the following two 
measures:
• Make sure that the fuel filler cap is 
screwed on correctly before the 
engine is started. Screw on the fuel 
filler cap until you hear 3 distinct 
clicks.
• Avoid driving with the fuel low level 
indicator illuminated. The symbol 
illuminates when less than approxi-
mately 2 gallons (8 litres) of fuel 
remains in the tank.
In Canada, look for the 
”Auto Makers’ Choice” label 
on the fuel pump.

157Starting and driving
Canada Only
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If 
the octane is less than 87, you may get a 
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If it’s 
bad enough, it can damage your engine. If 
you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or 
higher and you hear heavy knocking, your 
engine needs service. But don’t worry if you 
hear a little pinging noise when you’re accel-
erating or driving up a hill. That’s normal, 
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane 
fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, con-
stant knock that means you have a problem.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California 
Emission Standards (indicated on the 
underhood emission control label), it is 
designed to operate on fuels that meet Cal-
ifornia specifications. If such fuels are not 
available in states adopting California emis-
sions standards, your vehicle will operate 
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal spec-
ifications, but emission control system per-
formance may be affected. The ”Engine 
malfunction (CHECK ENGINE)” indicator 
on your main instrument panel may turn on 
and/or your vehicle may fail a smog-check 
test. See ”Engine malfunction (CHECK 
ENGINE)” indicator on page  51. If this 
occurs, return to your authorized Saab 
dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause 
of failure. In the event it is determined that 
the cause of the condition is the type of fuels 
used, repairs may not be covered by your 
warranty. 
Some gasolines that are not reformulated 
for low emissions may contain an 
octane-enhancing additive called methylcy-
clopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl 
(MMT); ask your service station operator 
whether or not the fuel contains MMT. Saab 
Automobile AB does not recommend the 
use of such gasolines. If fuels containing 
MMT are used, spark plug life may be 
reduced and your emission control system 
performance may be affected. The malfunc-
tion indicator lamp on your instrument panel 
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your 
authorized Saab dealer for service.
Engine Break-In Period
Pistons, bores and bearings need time to 
obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces. 
If a new engine is driven too hard, this grad-
ual process of bedding-in will not be possi-
ble and the life of the engine will be short-
ened. 
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), do 
not exceed 5,000 rpm.
In addition, refrain from driving the car at full 
throttle, other than for brief instances, 
during the first 1,800 miles (3,000 km). 
Wearing in new brake pads
New brake pads take time to bed in, about 
90 miles (150 km) if the car is driven largely 
under stop-and-go conditions or about 
300 miles (500 km) of highway driving.
To extend the useful life of the pads, avoid 
hard braking as much as possible during 
this period.

158 Starting and driving
Gear changing
Manual transmission
To start the engine the clutch pedal must 
be fully depressed.
The gear positions are marked on the gear 
lever. Before reverse (R) can be engaged, 
you must lift the ring underneath the 
gear-lever knob. 
To change gear, fully depress the clutch 
pedal and then release it smoothly. It is 
inadvisable to drive with your hand resting 
on the gear lever, as this can increase the 
wear on the transmission. 
When changing down from 5th to 4th gear, 
ease the gear lever straight back, without 
applying any lateral pressure. This will pre-
vent 2nd gear being engaged by mistake, 
which can result in overreving and possible 
damage to the engine.
Before engaging reverse, wait till the car is 
at a standstill, release the accelerator and 
fully depress the clutch. From neutral, press 
the gear lever firmly to the right before 
easing it back into reverse. 
Shift-up indicator for improved fuel 
economy (U.S. models only)
Cars equipped with a manual transmission 
have a "Shift-up" light on the instrument 
panel. The light begins to work after the 
vehicle is warmed up and provides you with 
a good indication when to shift to a higher 
gear.
It is not necessary or recommended to 
follow the shift-up recommendations in all 
driving conditions, for example, when driv-
ing in heavy urban traffic or steep downhill 
grades.
However, shifting with the light should result 
in improved fuel economy. Therefore, for 
reduced fuel consumption and better 
energy conservation, you should make a 
habit of shifting before or when the shift-up 
light comes on.
Towing 
Towing of cars with manual transmission, 
see page 181. 
IB471
13
2
5
R
4

159Starting and driving
Automatic transmission 
The electronic control module for the auto-
matic transmission receives information on 
engine torque and road speed, and also 
controls the hydraulic pressure in the trans-
mission to ensure that gear changing is as 
smooth as possible. 
The position of the selector lever is shown 
by the symbols adjacent to the lever and 
also by an indicator on the main instrument 
panel. 
The ignition key can only be removed when 
the selector lever is in the P position. 
When the car is stationary, the engine must 
be at idling speed when the selector lever is 
moved. You must have your foot on the 
brake pedal to move the lever out of park. 
If the accelerator is depressed while the 
lever is moved, this will result in abnormal 
wear in the transmission. 
WARNING
• Make it a habit to keep your foot on the 
brake when selecting a drive position, 
to prevent the car creeping forward (or 
backward if reverse is selected). 
• The car must be at a standstill before 
P, R or N is selected. You have to have 
your foot on the brake pedal to move 
the lever out of P. If the car is still 
moving when a drive position is subse-
quently selected, this could cause an 
accident or damage the automatic 
transmission. 
• Never park the car with the selector 
lever in a drive position, even if the 
parking brake is on. 
• Always select "P" position and apply 
the parking brake when leaving the 
vehicle unattended.
NOTE
After selecting a drive position, pause to 
allow the gear to engage before you 
accelerate. 
IB472
Selector lever 
IB1280
Selector-lever indicator on main instru-
ment panel 

160 Starting and driving
The detent button on the selector lever has 
to be pressed before the selector can be 
moved between certain positions. 
Three modes for the automatic transmis-
sion can be selected: Normal, Sport and 
Winter. 
The Normal mode, which provides the best 
fuel economy, is the default setting when 
the engine is started. 
When the Sport mode is selected, the 
throttle angle is altered to provide more 
power at the same throttle setting. The 
transmission also changes up later than in 
Normal mode to provide higher perfor-
mance. In this mode, the SPORT indicator 
will appear on the main instrument panel 
(see page 165). 
The Winter mode is intended for use when 
pulling away and driving on icy roads. In this 
mode, the transmission starts in 3rd gear, to 
provide better grip, and the WINTER indica-
tor appears on the main instrument panel. 
When the ignition is turned to OFF, the auto-
matic transmission will automatically revert 
to Normal mode (see page 165).
Adaptive gear-change pattern is a trans-
mission function in the Normal and Sport 
modes which matches gear changing to 
current driving conditions. The transmission 
control module senses the load on the 
engine and selects one of three available 
gear-change patterns, and so avoids 
unnecessary changing up or down.
Lock-up function 
The automatic transmission has a lock-up 
function, which renders the torque con-
verter inoperative in 3rd and 4th gears, the 
result of which is to reduce the engine speed 
and, hence, fuel consumption. 
When the lock-up function comes into oper-
ation, it may give the impression of an over-
drive being engaged.
Kick-down
When the accelerator is pressed down hard, 
a change-down to the next gear will be 
effected to provide maximum acceleration, 
e.g. for overtaking. 
The change-up to the next gear again will 
take place either when the accelerator is 
released or when maximum engine speed is 
reached. 
IB474
PRND321
Detent positions for selector movement 

161Starting and driving
Park Brake Shift lock
The transmission has a security function 
known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move 
the gear selector out of the P position, the 
brake pedal must be depressed at the same 
time as the gear selector catch (detente) is 
pressed in.
Shift Lock override
1 Apply the parking brake
2 Make sure the key is in position ON
3 Use a small tool such as a screwdriver 
and push the lever (see picture) down-
wards so that the detent button can be 
pressed approx. 10 mm
4 Move the selector out of position P to N
5 Remove the tool
6 Release the parking brake if the car is to 
be moved immediately; otherwise keep 
it applied
Check fuse No. 1 (see page 217). If the fuse 
is OK, check the battery regarding the volt-
age.
If the problem was cured by changing the 
fuse or battery, you do not have to contact a 
Saab dealer.
If the fuse blows again as soon as the Shift 
Lock feature is activated you should contact 
your Saab dealer.
Automatic transmission, 
fault indicator
If ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator” 
indicator appears on the main instrument 
panel, the system has detected a fault in the 
automatic transmission or its control 
module (see page 53). 
This also means that the Limp-home mode 
has been selected, to guard against further 
damage being done to the transmission. In 
this mode, the automatic transmission 
starts in 4th gear, and gear changes (if nec-
essary) will have to be made manually. 
It is not possible to select the SPORT or 
WINTER mode when the Limp-home mode 
is active. 
You should have the automatic transmis-
sion checked as soon as possible by an 
authorized Saab dealer. 
The following gears will be engaged in the 
respective selector positions when the auto-
matic transmission is in the Limp-home 
mode: 
NOTE
Due to electrical problems it may not be 
possible to move the selector out of the 
park position, even if the ignition is ON. If 
for some reason the selector has to be 
moved out of the park position (i.e. to tow 
the car a short distance) do as described 
below.
Position R  D  3 2 1
Gear  Reverse 4th 4th 3rd 3rd 
IB1122

162 Starting and driving
Overheated transmission fluid 
If the automatic-transmission fluid should 
overheat, the following message will appear 
on the SID: 
”TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING”. If this 
happens, stop the car and wait for the mes-
sage to be extinguished. Continue driving in 
a locked gear that produces an engine 
speed of about 3,000 rpm. 
Overheating of the automatic-transmission 
fluid can occur when the car is towing a 
heavy load, such as a camping trailer in hilly 
country, with the wrong gear selected, 
resulting in abnormally frequent gear 
changing. Try selecting position 1, 2 or 3. 
High ambient temperatures can also 
increase the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid or the oil cooler may be faulty. 
Contact an authorized Saab dealer (see 
also page 174).
Driving on hilly roads with a heavy 
load
The transmission fluid can overheat when 
the gearbox is strained, for example, when 
driving with a trailer on hilly roads with the 
wrong gear is selected, resulting in many 
extra gear changes. To avoid the transmis-
sion fluid overheating, always drive in 
Normal mode. The adaptive gear change 
patterns are then active.
High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler 
can also cause the transmission fluid to 
overheat. Overheating reduces the service 
life of the fluid. Contact an authorized Saab 
dealer (see also page 174.
Towing 
Towing of cars with automatic transmission, 
see page 181. 
NOTE
If the control module has actuated the 
Limp-home function for the automatic 
transmission, the car will remain in 4th 
gear when D is selected, making it very 
sluggish. To overcome this, move the 
selector lever to position 2. 
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes 
when you are driving on a long or steep 
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated 
brakes! 

163Starting and driving
Selector positions
P 
To shift out of the P position you must 
depress the brake pedal and the ignition 
must be ON. 
The parking position (P) must only be selected 
when the car is at a complete standstill. The 
selector lever is locked and the transmission is 
mechanically immobilized. Always apply the 
parking brake after parking the car.
The engine can be started. The key can be 
removed.
R 
The reverse (R) position must only be selected 
when the car is at a complete standstill. The 
detent-release button must be pressed before 
the selector lever can be moved to R. Wait until 
reverse gear has engaged (car starts to creep) 
before touching the accelerator. 
N 
In the Neutral position (N), the transmission is 
disengaged from the engine. The engine can be 
started, but first ensure that the parking brake is 
on, to prevent the car from moving off unexpect-
edly.
To prevent the engine and transmission from 
becoming hotter than necessary, select N for 
stops other than brief ones, e.g. if stuck in a traf-
fic jam.
The normal drive position (D) is recommended 
for waiting at traffic lights. 
D 
The Drive position (D) is the position for normal 
motoring. Gear changes between 1st and 4th 
will take place automatically, the timing of which 
is determined by the throttle (accelerator) posi-
tion and the speed of the car.
After moving the selector lever to D, pause to 
give the gear time to engage (car starts to pull). 
3
In position 3, 4th gear is locked out. The car will 
start in 1st gear and normal gear changing (up 
and down) will take place automatically between 
gears 1, 2 and 3. 
Moving the selector lever from D to 3 will effect 
a change-down to 3rd gear, which will give better 
engine-braking. 
Do not move the selector to position 3 at speeds 
in excess of 90 mph (150 km/h). 
2
Position 2 is recommended in hilly country as it 
provides effective engine-braking. Normal gear 
changing (up and down) between 1st and 2nd 
gear will take place automatically. Third and 4th 
gears are locked out. 
Do not move the selector to position 2 at speeds 
in excess of 70 mph (110 km/h). 

164 Starting and driving
If the gear selector lever is moved from position D to 1, a 
change-down to 3rd gear will occur at about 110 mph (180 km/h).
A change-down to 2nd gear will occur at about 75 mph (120 km/h) 
and to 1st gear at about 40 mph (65 km/h). 
When position 1 is selected, all the other gears will be locked out.
Manual gear-changing is not recommended on slippery roads.
Adaptive gear-change patterns
Adaptive gear-change patterns are selected automatically depend-
ing on the engine load and the present temperature of the transmis-
sion. The function is available in Normal and Sport modes.
The changes occur at a higher engine speed and the car remains in 
the same gear for longer, if the transmission control module senses 
that the load has not decreased. These gear-change patterns pre-
vent unnecessary changing up and down, when for example driving 
up long slopes with a trailer or caravan, and to prevent overheating 
the transmission oil. The adaptive gear-change function is also 
selected automatically when the transmission oil becomes too hot, 
to protect the transmission itself from damage and to lower the oil 
temperature.
The adaptive gear-change pattern function is deselected when:
• Winter mode is selected.
• The engine is switched off.
• The load is reduced so much that the function is no longer 
required.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”   appears on main 
instrument panel, see page 161.
1
Position 1 should be used when maximum 
engine-braking is required on steep downhill 
slopes.
Do not move the selector to position 1 at speeds 
in excess of 37 mph (60 km/h).

165Starting and driving
SPORT and WINTER modes
To select Sport mode, press the ”S” button on 
the selector lever when the selector lever is in 
position N, D, 3, 2 or 1. 
In this mode, gear changes will take place at 
higher engine speeds than in Normal mode, in 
other words, the transmission will change up 
later and change down earlier for the same throt-
tle (accelerator) position. 
The Sport mode will be deselected if: 
• The S button is pressed.
• The selector lever is moved to position P or R.
• The engine is switched off.
• The Winter mode is selected.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”   
appears on main instrument panel, see page 
161.
The Winter mode facilitates pulling away and 
driving on icy roads. Third gear is selected auto-
matically for pulling away to reduce wheelspin.
Winter mode can be selected when the engine 
is running by pressing the ”W” button on the 
selector-lever surround. It cannot be selected 
when the selector lever is in position 2 or 1. 
Note: It is still possible to use kick-down in the 
Winter mode, in which case a change-down to 
1st or 2nd will take place. 
The Winter mode will be deselected if: 
• The W button is pressed.
• The engine is switched off.
• The selector lever is moved to position 2 or 1.
• Kick-down is activated.
• The automatic-transmission fluid overheats.
• ”Automatic transmission, fault indicator”   
appears on main instrument panel, see page 
161.

166 Starting and driving
Cruise control
For safety reasons (brake system func-
tion) the brakes must be applied once, 
when the engine has started, before the 
cruise control system can be activated.
The system is operated by means of the 
controls on the stalk switch: 
• ON/OFF (switch on/off).
• RESUME/– (Resume preset speed).
• SET/+ (to set the desired speed).
• CANCEL (Cancel operation of system, 
e.g. to reduce speed temporarily).
When the system is ON, the CRUISE indi-
cator light will appear on the main instru-
ment panel and will be extinguished when 
the system is switched OFF. If CANCEL is 
selected, CRUISE will flash once. 
To set the desired speed 
Move the switch to ON. Accelerate to the 
desired speed (minimum speed: 25 mph 
(40 km/h)) and press SET/+. 
To increase the preset speed 
Accelerate to the desired speed and press 
SET/+. 
You can also increase the speed of the car 
using the SET/+ button. Press it once to 
increase the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) or 
hold it in and release when the desired 
speed is reached. 
Temporary increase in speed 
Press the accelerator to override the preset 
speed, e.g. for overtaking. 
When you release the accelerator, the 
system will revert to the preset speed. 
To cancel temporarily 
Move the control stalk to CANCEL 
(spring-loaded position before OFF posi-
tion). This will disengage the system but the 
preset speed will be retained in the system 
memory. (The memory is deleted when the 
engine is switched off.) 
To re-engage the system 
To revert to the preset speed, slide the 
switch to RESUME/–. This will only operate 
when the car’s speed is above 25 mph 
(40 km/h). 
To reduce the preset speed
The cruise-control system will always disen-
gage automatically the moment that either 
the brake pedal or the clutch pedal is 
depressed. 
It is also possible to reduce the speed by 
means of the RESUME/– button.
Sliding the button to RESUME/– once will 
reduce the speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). 
Holding the button in the RESUME/– posi-
tion will effect a gradual reduction in speed 
until the button is released. 
Disengaging the system 
The system will be disengaged: 
• When the brake or clutch pedal is 
depressed.
• When the switch is moved to CANCEL.
• When the switch is moved to OFF.
• When the engine is switched off.
• When the selector lever is moved to posi-
tion N (cars with automatic transmission).
WARNING
• Do not use the Cruise-control system 
on wet or icy roads, in dense traffic or 
on winding roads.
• Set the control to OFF when you do 
not want to use the system, to prevent 
the system being activated inadvert-
ently. 
IB475
Cruise-control switches 

167Starting and driving
Braking
To avoid the brakes becoming overheated, 
(e.g. when negotiating long descents with a 
drop of several hundred feet), select a low 
gear to use the braking effect of the engine. 
If the car has automatic transmission, move 
the selector lever to position 1 or 2. 
When driving fast, you can help to prolong 
the life of the brakes by thinking ahead and 
braking harder for short periods, rather than 
braking more moderately over long 
stretches. 
Brake pad wear indicators
The outboard brake pads on the front 
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators. 
When the lining is down to 3 mm, the pad 
will produce a screeching, squealing or 
scraping noise when the brakes are applied. 
New pads should be fitted without delay. 
Brake pads should only be replaced by 
an authorized Saab dealer. 
To ensure optimum brake performance, 
it is recommended that you use only 
Saab original brake pads.
 ABS brakes
ABS (antilock braking system) modulates 
the brake pressure to the respective 
wheels. Wheel sensors detect if a wheel is 
about to lock, and the control module 
reduces the pressure to that wheel and then 
increases it once more until the tendency is 
detected again. 
The brake system is equipped with an Elec-
tronic Brake-force Distribution device 
(EBD), which distributes the brake pressure 
between the front and rear wheels, in such 
a way as to achieve optimum braking perfor-
mance irrespective of the car’s speed and 
load.
The ABS system has a built-in diagnostic 
function which will switch on the Anti-lock 
brake warning light if a fault is detected in 
the system (see page 50). 
WARNING
• It is prudent to try your brakes from 
time to time, especially when driving in 
heavy rain, through water collected on 
the road, in snow, on a wet road sur-
face or in salty slush. In such condi-
tions, the brakes may take longer than 
normal to take effect. To rectify this, 
touch the brake pedal periodically to 
dry the brakes out.
• The same applies after the car has 
been washed or when the weather is 
very humid. 
• Avoid parking the car with wet brakes. 
Before parking, and if the traffic condi-
tions allow, brake quite heavily so that 
the brake discs and pads warm up and 
dry.
• The brakes are power assisted and it 
should be kept in mind that the servo 
unit only provides the power assis-
tance when the engine is running. 
• The brake pressure required when the 
engine is off,(e.g. when the car is on 
tow) is roughly four times the normal 
pedal force required. The pedal also 
feels hard and unresponsive. 
WARNING
• The additional safety afforded by the 
ABS system is not designed to allow 
drivers to drive faster but to make 
normal driving safer. 
• To stop as quickly as possible, without 
loss of directional stability, whether 
the road surface is dry, wet or slippery, 
press the brake pedal down hard- 
without letting up, declutching 
simultaneously, and steer the car to 
safety. 

168 Starting and driving
The ABS system will not reduce the braking 
distance on loose gravel or on snow or ice 
but, because the wheels cannot lock up, 
some steering control is retained. 
When the ABS system is working, i.e. mod-
ulation of the brake pressure is in progress, 
the brake pedal will pulsate and a ticking 
noise will be heard. All this is perfectly nor-
mal. 
Press the pedal down hard (you cannot 
press too hard) and steer the car to safety. 
Do not release the brake pedal before the 
car has come to a halt or the danger is 
past! 
That is critical. 
If the road is slippery, the ABS system will 
operate even when only light pressure is 
applied to the pedal. This means that you 
can brake gently to test the condition of the 
road and adapt your driving accordingly. 
It is well worth practicing the use of ABS 
brakes on a skid pan or other suitable facil-
ity. 
IB476
Braking with ABS brakes.
When the system is operating, the brake 
pedal will pulsate gently and the system 
will make a ticking noise.
IB477
Braking with ABS – evasive steering

169Starting and driving
Traction Control System
How the system works 
The traction control system (TCS) is 
designed to prevent wheelspin. This 
enables the car to achieve the best possible 
grip and, hence, maximum tractive effort, 
together with greater stability. 
The TCS system uses information from the 
ABS system’s wheel sensors to detect 
when the front (driving) wheels are rotating 
faster then the rear wheels. It then monitors 
whether one driving wheel is rotating faster 
than the other. If so, the faster wheel is 
retarded until both wheels are rotating at the 
same speed. 
If the two front wheels are rotating at the 
same speed but are turning faster than the 
rear wheels, the torque from the engine is 
reduced to eliminate the difference. 
The process continues until all the wheels 
are rotating at the same speed. 
The advantages of the TCS system become 
most apparent when the cohesion between 
the front wheels and the road surface is so 
low that one or both of the wheels would 
lose their grip were the car not equipped 
with the TCS, e.g.: 
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing with the front wheels on different sur-
faces (e.g. one slippery and one dry). The 
TCS then functions like an electronic dif-
ferential lock. 
• When the car is pulling away or accelerat-
ing on a slippery road, in which case the 
TCS eliminates wheelspin. The same 
applies when the car is reversing. 
• On cornering, if there is a tendency for the 
inner front wheel to rotate faster than the 
other wheels. 
• On overtaking. 
TCS OFF 
The TCS OFF indicator on the main instru-
ment panel will come on: 
• If a fault has been detected and the 
system has therefore been switched off. 
• If there is a fault in the ABS system. 
• If the system has been switched off man-
ually. 
The indicator light will also come on for 
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to 
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed. 
TCS indicator 
The indicator light will come on for 
4 seconds when the ignition key is turned to 
ON, while an internal system check is per-
formed. 
The TCS light in the tachometer comes on 
when the system is operative, i.e. when the 
wheels are not rotating at the same speed. 
The fact that the TCS system is operative 
indicates that the limit for grip has been 
exceeded and that the driver must exert 
greater care. 
WARNING
In normal driving, the TCS system 
enhances the safety of the car, but it does 
not mean that the car can be driven faster. 
The same care and prudence normally 
applied should be displayed on cornering 
and when driving on slippery roads. 

170 Starting and driving
Turning the TCS off 
The TCS is switched on automatically when 
the engine is started. 
The system can be switched off manually by 
the TCS button, whereupon TCS OFF on 
the main instrument panel will come on. The 
TCS system cannot be switched off if the car 
is travelling faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). 
It may be necessary to switch off the system 
if the car has become bogged down, for 
instance. Press TCS to switch it on again. 
If a fault is detected in the ABS system, the 
TCS will be switched off automatically. 
The cruise-control system will automatically 
be disengaged after one second if it is active 
when the TCS starts to operate. 
Economical motoring
Factors affecting fuel consumption 
Fuel consumption is greatly affected by the 
general driving conditions, the way in which 
the car is driven and at what speeds, the 
weather, the state of the road, the condition 
of the car, etc. 
Breaking-in 
Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher 
during the break-in period (the first 3,000–
4,000 miles (5,000–7,000 km) than stated 
under ”Technical data”. 
Weather conditions 
Fuel consumption can be as much as 10 % 
lower in summer than in winter. The higher 
consumption in cold weather is explained by 
the longer time it takes for the engine to 
reach normal operating temperature, and 
for the transmission and wheel bearings to 
warm up. Fuel economy is also affected by 
the distance driven: short journeys of 
3-5 miles (5-8 km) do not give the engine 
enough time to reach normal temperature. 
Strong winds can also affect fuel consump-
tion. 
How to read the graph on the right: 
If fuel consumption with the engine at 
normal temperature is 28 mpg 
(10l/100 km), the actual fuel consumption 3 
miles (5 km) after the engine has started 
from cold will be: 
– 23.5 mpg (12l/100 km) at outside temp. 
of 68°F (20°C) (increase of 20%).
– 17.7 mpg (16l/100 km) at outside temp. 
of 32°F (0°C) (increase of 60%).
– 14 mpg (20l/100 km)) at outside temp. of 
–4°F (–20°C) (increase of 100%).
As can be seen, both the distance travelled 
by the car and the outside temperature have 
IB478
IB311
Percentage increase in fuel consumption 
of engine starting from cold compared to 
engine at normal temperature.

171Starting and driving
a major impact on fuel consumption after 
the engine has started from cold. Thus, if the 
car is mainly used for short journeys of 
3–5 miles (5–8 km), the fuel consumption 
will be 60–80 % higher than normal.
Driving technique
• To obtain the best running economy, not 
only regarding fuel consumption but gen-
eral wear also, regular service is required.
• High speed, unnecessary acceleration, 
heavy braking and much low gear work all 
gives rise to higher fuel consumption.
• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting 
in cold weather, the use of studded tires 
and roof racks, and towing a trailer all 
increase fuel consumption.
• Do not run the engine when the car is sta-
tionary.
If idling, it will take much longer before the 
engine becomes hot. Engine wear is 
greatest during this warming-up phase. 
Therefore drive away as soon as possible 
after the engine is started and avoid high 
revving.
• Driving in a low gear results in higher fuel 
consumption than in a high gear because 
of the higher engine speed for a given 
road speed. Always change up to a higher 
gear as soon as traffic conditions allow 
and use the highest gear as much as pos-
sible.
• Check the air pressure in the tires once a 
month. Incorrect pressures increase tire 
wear. It is better to have slightly higher 
pressure than lower.
• Check fuel consumption regularly. 
Increased consumption can indicate that 
something is wrong and that the car 
needs to be checked by an authorized 
Saab dealer.
Practical trials on the roads have demon-
strated that substantial savings in fuel con-
sumption can be made if the above advice 
is heeded.
Road conditions 
Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do 
unpaved roads and driving in hilly country 
(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is 
less than the additional amount required to 
climb the hill). 
Engine block heater (standard 
equipment in Canada, accessory in 
U.S.)
The following are just some of the benefits 
to the car and the environment of using an 
engine block heater: 
• Lower fuel consumption.
• Reduced wear on the engine.
• Inside of car warms up faster.
• Exhaust emissions substantially reduced 
over short runs.
The engine heater is effective at outside 
temperatures up to +15-20°C. The warmer 
it is outside, the shorter the time the engine 
heater needs to be connected. Longer than 
1.5 hours is unnecessary.
If the car is equipped with a removable, 
electrical cabin heater that is not in use, this 
should be stored in the luggage compart-
ment.

172 Starting and driving
Driving in cold weather
Before starting a journey in cold weather 
you should check the following:
• That the wiper blades have not become 
frozen to the windshield/glass.
• Brush any snow away from the air intake 
for the heater system (opening between 
hood and windshield).
• It may be advisable to lubricate the 
door-lock cylinder (use molybdenum 
disulphide, MoS2) to prevent its freezing. 
If the lock has frozen, take care not to 
break the key (or use the remote control) 
– heat it first or spray it with de-icer.
• Periodically during the winter, add gaso-
line anti-freeze to the fuel to dispel any 
condensation in the fuel tank which could 
freeze and cause problems in the system. 
Keep the tank well filled to reduce the risk 
of condensation forming. 
If the car is parked outside in freezing 
weather, fuel additives (gasoline 
anti-freeze) will not do any good as it 
cannot remove water that has already fro-
zen. Park the car in a warm place so that 
any ice that may have built up melts, then 
add gasoline anti-freeze when filling up 
the tank. Condensation is caused by 
changes in the outdoor temperature or by 
the car being parked alternately in a 
garage and outside. 
• It is particularly important when the roads 
are slippery that the brakes and tires be in 
good condition.
• Check the anti-freeze in the engine cool-
ant, see page 196.
The car´s trip computer will warn you when 
there is a risk of slippery conditions. For fur-
ther information on this function, see page 
58.
The car is equipped with tires designed to 
provide optimum grip on both wet and dry 
roads, although this has been achieved at 
the expense of somewhat reduced grip on 
snow and ice. For regular driving on snow 
and ice, we therefore recommend that 
winter (snow) tires be fitted. 
Winter (snow) tires, particularly studded 
tires (where use is legally permitted), gener-
ally make driving safer on snow and ice. 
Acquaint yourself with the legal provi-
sions governing the use of different 
types of winter tires and snow chains. 
Studded tires are not allowed in some 
countries.
If winter tires are fitted, the same type must 
be fitted on all wheels. Your Saab dealer will 
be pleased to advise you on the best tires for 
your car. 
Remember that tires age. It may therefore 
be necessary to change them before they 
reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually 
lose their friction properties. 
The best response if the car gets into a 
front-wheel skid is to freewheel (manual 
gearbox only), i.e. disengage the clutch (so 
that the wheels are neither driven or 
retarded by the engine.
If the car has automatic transmission, ease 
up on the accelerator and steer carefully in 
the desired direction.
In a rear-wheel skid, steer in the same direc-
tion that the rear of the car is moving.

173Starting and driving
Tire chains
If you want to fit tire chains (where legally 
permitted) they should only be fitted to the 
tires recommended under ”Specifications” 
(see page 257).
Consult your Saab dealer for details of 
approved tire chains.
Driving in hot weather
• Always check the coolant level before 
starting a journey. The level should be just 
below the MAX mark. 
• At the end of a journey, if the engine has 
worked hard, allow it to idle for two or 
three minutes before switching it off. 
If the needle on the temperature gauge 
enters the red zone: 
1 Bring the car to a standstill but leave the 
engine running. Do not remove the cap 
on the expansion tank even if the tank is 
empty. If the needle on the temperature 
gauge continues to rise while the engine 
is idling, switch off the engine. 
2 Wait until the needle has dropped back 
to indicate normal temperature (roughly 
midway, in the white zone) before stop-
ping the engine. If the coolant needs top-
ping up, unscrew the cap on expansion 
tank carefully.
Top up, as necessary, ideally with a 
50/50 mixture of Saab-approved coolant 
and water. If only water is available, use 
that, but remember to have the coolant 
mixture checked as soon as possible. 
3 As soon as possible, have the cooling 
system checked by an authorized Saab 
dealer. 
WARNING
• Do not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) 
when tire chains are fitted. 
• Tire chains can reduce the directional 
stability of the car. 
• Tire chains must not be used on the 
rear wheels. 
NOTE
• Check the links frequently for wear. 
• Check that the chains do not contact 
the wheel-arch liner at full lock.
• See section ”Specifications”, page 
257, for information on allowable 
wheel dimensions for the fitting of tire 
chains.
WARNING
Always undo the expansion tank filler cap 
carefully, releasing the pressure and any 
vapor before removing the cap com-
pletely. 

174 Starting and driving
Towing a trailer
Trailer hitch attachment
Trailer hitch attachments are available as 
accessories. These are designed for a max-
imum trailer weight of 3500 lbs. (1588 kg), 
see also page 251. 
Use only the electrical trailer hitch socket 
provided in the trailer hitch kit.
Saab recommends:
• Use a Saab original hitch kit attachment 
which is designed and tested by Saab.
• Consult your Saab dealer as regards the 
right hitch kit for your car.
Trailer weight
Maximum recommended trailer weights for 
different gradients, with a view to comfort 
and drivability for manual and automatic 
cars, are shown on the drawing. 
Make sure you are familiar with the law 
regarding speed limits for towing, maxi-
mum trailer weights, trailer-braking 
requirements, and also any special 
driving-licence provisions 
(see also page 251). 
The specified trailer weights and gradients 
assume that the journey starts at the hill and 
therefore apply only to short periods. 
NOTE
Use only a genuine Saab trailer hitch and 
wiring, since other wiring methods can 
cause expensive damage to the car’s 
body and electrical system. 
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for 
guidance on how to connect the trailer 
hitch electrical system.
WARNING
When towing a trailer, do not attempt to 
negotiate a hill having a gradient in 
excess of 15%. The weight distribution 
over the front wheels of the car will be 
insufficient to prevent wheelspin, making 
further progress impossible. 
In addition, the parking brake may not 
always be able to hold the car and trailer 
securely, with the result that the wheels 
can start to slide downhill. 
IB1692
Maximum recommended trailer weights 
for different gradients

175Starting and driving
Recommendations for cars with auto-
matic transmission.
The following time limits are based on the 
capacity of the cooling system in warm 
weather, i.e. approximately 86°F (30°C).
The following time limits are based on the 
capacity of the cooling system in hot 
weather, i.e. approximately 104°F (40°C).
Use Normal mode when driving with a trailer 
or trailer on hilly roads. The adaptive gear 
change pattern function will prevent the 
transmission overheating.
Rises in coolant temperature are indicated 
by the temperature gauge in the main instru-
ment panel.
The following can also occur:
• the A/C-compressor can be shut off
• the gear-change pattern is changed
• the CHECK message TRANSMISSION 
OVERHEATING can appear on the SID
If TRANSMISSION OVERHEATING 
appears on the SID, stop the car as soon as 
it is safe to do so and wait until the warning 
has been extinguished. When continuing 
your journey, select a locked gear (1, 2 or 3) 
that will allow you to drive at an engine 
speed of about 3,000 rpm (see page 163). 
Do not drive continuously with the WINTER 
mode selected in hilly country when you are 
towing a trailer, as this will increase fuel con-
sumption and risk overheating the transmis-
sion.
Driving considerations 
Always take extra care when towing a 
trailer, as the car’s handling will be different 
and its braking effect reduced. The trailer’s 
braking system and suspension also have a 
considerable effect on these characteris-
tics, see also ”Driving with a load” page  179. 
If the car is equipped with automatic trans-
mission, select position 1 when ascending 
or descending steep hills.
Gradient 
of hill, %  Maximum 
trailer weight, 
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes 
6-7 3300 (1500) unlimited
8-9 3300 (1500) 15 max
10-15 1870 (850) 15 max
Gradient 
of hill, %  Maximum 
trailer weight, 
lbs. (kg)
Maximum dura-
tion, minutes 
6-7 2000 (900) unlimited
8-9 2000 (900) 15 max
10-15 1000 (450) 15 max. 
WARNING
Remember to use engine-braking (selec-
tor position 1, 2, or 3) to spare the brakes 
when you are driving on a long or steep 
downhill slope.
Brake failure can result from overheated 
brakes!
NOTE
If the ”Automatic transmission, fault indi-
cator” indicator   comes on, cease 
towing until the problem has been recti-
fied. 

176 Starting and driving
Trailer hitch load
The weight distribution on the trailer makes 
a lot of difference to the handling properties 
of the car and trailer combination. As 
regards single-axle trailers, whenever pos-
sible, concentrate the load over the wheels 
and keep it as low as possible. 
The trailer should be loaded so that the 
maximum load on the towbar ball is 5% to 
7% of the trailer weight with a maximum per-
missible tongue weight of 165 lbs. (75 kg).
Note that this load must be added to the total 
load for the car. If this now exceeds the 
specified load capacity, the load in the lug-
gage compartment will have to be reduced 
by a corresponding amount. 
Driving with a roof rack 
load
The maximum permissible roof load is 
220 lbs. (100 kg). 
Note that the roof load is included in the 
car’s maximum permissible load (see page 
250).
Strong, sturdy roof carriers designed spe-
cially for the car are available from your 
Saab dealer. Always secure the roof load 
safely. 
WARNING
• A roof load will affect the car’s center 
of gravity and aerodynamics. Be 
aware of this when cornering and driv-
ing in crosswinds.
• Suit your speed to the prevailing con-
ditions.
• Due to higher aerodynamic drag, fuel 
economy may suffer when driving with 
a roof rack.
IB106
Distribution of load in trailer 
aLight
b Moderate
cHeavy

177Starting and driving
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Sedan
The carrier feet are marked with a top view 
of the car and arrow indicating their posi-
tions. 
1 Slip the plastic cover onto the adjustable 
foot of the carrier (foot with knob for 
tightening) to protect the paintwork 
during assembly. 
2 Open all the doors.
Fold back the rubber strip and find the 
fixing holes. 
3 Start on the left-hand side of the car.
Rest the carrier carefully across the roof, 
with the rigid foot towards you. Hold the 
foot clear of the roof to avoid damaging 
the paintwork.
Fold back the rubber strip and insert the 
pins on the foot into the fixing holes. 
Make sure that the rubber strip comes 
inside the plastic cover on the carrier. 
Repeat the procedure with the other car-
rier. 
4 Close the doors on the left-hand side of 
the car gently, to hold the carrier feet in 
place. 
5 Now go around to the other side of the 
car and remove the plastic cover from 
the carrier’s adjustable foot. Fold back 
the rubber strip and insert the pins on the 
foot into the fixing holes. Do the same 
with the other carrier and close the doors 
gently. 
6 Tighten each carrier by turning the knob 
clockwise (by hand). Tighten just 
enough to bring the foot up against the 
edges of the fixing holes. 
Remove the carriers when not in use, as 
they increase fuel consumption. 
The instructions that accompany the carri-
ers also include advice on driving with a roof 
load - we strongly recommend that you read 
them carefully. 
IB480
IB481

178 Starting and driving
Fitting the roof carriers (accessory)
9-5 Wagon
1 Clean the car’s roof rails.
2 Check the markings on the cross mem-
bers to see which is the front and which 
is the rear roof carrier.
3 Place the cross members on the roof 
rails, on their respective sides of the 
center supports. The cross members 
must not be placed beyond the front or 
rear joint on the rail. Ensure that the dis-
tance between the cross members is at 
least 28 inches (700 mm).
If a roof box is to be fitted, the cross 
members must be positioned so that the 
tailgate can be opened fully without hit-
ting the roof box.
4 Using your thumb, press the bracket so 
that it lies snugly against the outside of 
the roof rail. Make sure that the roof car-
riers are seated centrally on the rubber 
spacers and that these sit correctly on 
the roof rail. Pull the spacers down 
slightly on the inside of the roof rail.
5 Center the roof carriers so that they pro-
trude equally on both sides.
6 Tighten the roof carriers by hand. 
Ensure that the tightening knobs are 
upright once the roof carriers have been 
tightened.
7 Make sure the roof carriers are securely 
in place.
IB1294
IB1295

179Starting and driving
Driving with a load
The driving characteristics of the car are 
affected by the way it is loaded.
• Place heavy loads as far forward and as 
low as possible in the trunk.
• Secure the load to the tie downs, see 
page  136.
• The load should be such that the car´s 
total weight or axle weight are not 
exceeded, see page  250.
• Heavy loads mean that the car’s center of 
gravity is further back. As a result, the car 
will sway more during evasive steering.
• Never exceed the permissible load in the 
roof box, even if there is room for more.
• Ensure that the tire pressure is correct – 
slight overinflation is preferable to under-
inflation.
• The braking distance of a loaded car is 
always greater. Keep your distance from 
the vehicle in front.
• Roof loads can negatively affect tele-
communication.
Tire pressure, see page  259 and back 
cover.
Tires
The tire pressure should match the current 
load and speed of the car; see the back 
cover or the tire pressure label on 
page 259.
The tire pressures given apply to cold tires, 
that is tires that are the same temperature 
as the outside air temperature.
The tire pressure increases as the tires 
become warm (e.g. during highway driving) 
with approximately 0.3 bar (4 psi). When 
the temperature of the tires changes by 50° 
(10°C), the tire pressure will change 0.1 bar 
(2 psi).
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the 
tires are hot when you check them, only 
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Underinflated tires wear more quickly than 
slightly overinflated tires.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit 
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire 
pressures if you change the load in the car 
or intend to drive at substantially lower or 
higher speeds than normal.
NOTE
Check the tire pressure at least once a 
month. Underinflation is the main cause 
of:
• Damage to the wheels.
• Premature tire wear.
• Damage to the sidewalls.

180 Starting and driving
Driving considerations 
with compact spare 
wheel/tire fitted
The following should be observed when the 
compact spare wheel (T115/70 R16) is 
fitted: 
The compact spare is light and easy to 
handle when changing the wheel. Do not 
drive further than necessary with the com-
pact spare fitted – the maximum life of the 
wheel is only just over 2000 miles 
(3,500 km). Have the standard wheel 
repaired and refitted as soon as possible. 
The car’s ground clearance is reduced with 
the compact spare fitted. Note that only one 
compact spare wheel may be used at any 
time. Take care not to hit the curb and do not 
fit snow chains. Leave the wheel cover off, 
so that the warning text is readily visible. 
Driving with the trunk 
lid/tailgate open
Avoid driving with the trunk lid/tailgate partly 
or fully open, since exhaust fumes can be 
drawn into the cabin.
If you must drive with the trunk lid/tailgate 
open, all windows and the sunroof (if fitted) 
must be closed and the cabin fan on at its 
highest speed setting.
Driving in deep water
WARNING
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) as the 
tire can overheat and adversely affect the 
handling of the car. 
The tire should be inflated to 60 psi 
(420 kPa). 
NOTE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy 
wheel it can be placed outside up in the 
spare-wheel well but only while driving to 
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must 
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 136 and 139.
NOTE
Do not drive in water deeper than 
12 inches (30 cm) and do not drive faster 
than at idling speed. Water can otherwise 
be sucked into the engine. The engine will 
be damaged if water enters the intake 
system. The car´s electrical systems may 
also be affected.
IB465

181Starting and driving
Towing the car
Transporting the car
Front towing eye 
The front towing eye is stored with the spare 
wheel. 
The attachment point (tapped hole) for the 
towing eye is midway along the engine sub-
frame at the front of the car. 
Remove the plastic plug and screw in the 
towing eye securely. 
To ensure that the towing eye is in far 
enough, insert the handle of the wheel 
wrench through the eye for additional lever-
age. 
WARNING
• Remember that the brake servo does 
not operate when the engine is off. 
Much greater pressure than normal 
will therefore be required to operate 
the brake pedal. 
• Nor does the steering servo operate 
when the engine is off. The steering 
will therefore be much heavier than 
usual. 
• The towing vehicle should always be 
heavier than the vehicle on tow. 
• Never allow passengers to ride in the 
car being towed. 
• Always seek professional help if the 
car needs to be towed.
NOTE
If a car with sports (lowered) chassis is 
transported, for example on a flat bed 
truck, take extra care not to damage the 
spoiler and/or underbody.
WARNING
• Make sure that the towing eye at the 
front is screwed in tightly. 
• The towing eye is only designed for 
use when the car is being towed on the 
road. It must not be used to pull the 
car out of a ditch, for example. If the 
towing eye were to shear suddenly, it 
could cause serious injury. 
• Always seek professional help if the 
car needs to be recovered. 
NOTE
• Do not drive the car with the front 
towing eye in position. If it catches the 
curb, for example, the engine sub-
frame could be damaged. 
• Refit the plastic plug in the hole when 
the towing eye has been removed, to 
keep dirt out of the threads.
IB482
Front towing eye 

182 Starting and driving
Rear towing eye
The car has a permanently mounted towing 
eye at the back. If the car is equipped with a 
trailer hitch, this can be used instead of the 
towing eye. 
Considerations when towing the car 
with manual transmission 
Gear lever in neutral and parking lights on. 
Drive carefully and do not exceed the 
speed limit for vehicles being towed. 
Always try to keep the towrope taut by 
gently applying the brake, as necessary. 
This will avoid the towrope being jerked 
violently. 
Considerations when towing the car 
with automatic transmission 
Selector lever at N (neutral) and parking 
lights on. 
Drive carefully and do not exceed the 
speed limit for vehicles being towed.
Always try to keep the towrope taut by 
gently applying the brake, as necessary. 
This will avoid the towrope being jerked 
violently. 
1 Selector lever in position N. 
2 Raise the oil level in the gearbox above 
normal by 2 extra quarts. Use oil of type 
Texaco Texamatic Dexron III. 
3 The local regulations on towing speeds 
must be followed.
The highest permissible towing speed is 
30 mph (50 km/h), unless the legal limit 
is lower. The longest permissible towing 
distance is 25-30 miles (40-50 km). If the 
car has to be transported farther than 
that, summon a tow truck. A flat bed tow 
truck is the preferred method to tow.
4 When the car is being returned to ser-
vice, check the gearbox oil, and reduce 
it to the prescribed amount if necessary.
Failure to follow these guidelines can result 
in damage.
Cars with automatic transmission cannot be 
bump started. In an emergency, it is possi-
ble to start the engine using jump leads (see 
the section, ”Jump starting” on page  183). 
NOTE
• The car must be towed front first.
• If the car is to be towed with the front 
wheels off the ground, make sure the 
parking brake is off, as this acts on the 
rear wheels. 
IB483
Rear towing eye 

183Starting and driving
Jump starting
If your battery has run down, you may want 
to use another vehicle and some jumper 
cables to start your Saab. Follow the steps 
below to do it safely.
To jump start your vehicle:
1 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 
12-volt battery with a negative ground 
system.
2 Get the vehicles close enough so the 
jumper cables can reach, but be sure the 
vehicles are not touching each other. If 
a poor connection on the negative 
jumper cable should exist, it is possible 
for damage to be caused to electrical 
systems/components of either vehicle 
should inadvertent contact be made. 
You would not be able to start your car 
and bad grounding could damage elec-
trical systems.
3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. 
Turn off all lights that are not needed, 
and radios. This will avoid sparks and 
help save both batteries and it could 
save your radio.
4 Open the hood and locate the battery.
Find the positive (+) and negative (-) termi-
nals on the battery.
WARNING
Batteries can cause injury. They can be 
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or 
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to 
injure you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, 
some or all of these things can hurt you.
NOTE
Ignoring these steps could result in costly 
damage to your vehicle that would not be 
covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your car by pushing or pull-
ing it could damage your vehicle, even if 
you have a manual transmission. If you 
have an automatic transmission, your 
vehicle cannot be started by pushing or 
pulling it.
NOTE
If the other system is not a 12-volt system 
with a negative ground, both vehicles can 
be damaged.
WARNING
You could be injured if the vehicles roll. 
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transmission in P 
(Park) or a manual transmission in Neu-
tral.
NOTE
If you leave your radio on, it could be 
badly damaged. The repairs would not be 
covered by your warranty.
+
–
+
–
IB484

184 Starting and driving
5 Check that the jumper cables do not 
have loose or missing insulation. If they 
do, you could get a shock and also the 
vehicles could be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are 
some basic things you should know. 
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and 
negative (-) will go to negative (-) or a 
major metal engine part with a good 
ground. Do not connect (+) to (-) or you 
will get a short that could injure you or 
would damage the battery and maybe 
other parts as well.
6 Connect the red positive (+) cable to the 
positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with 
the discharged battery.
7 Do not let the other end touch metal. 
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of 
the good battery. Use a remote positive 
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8 Now connect the black negative (-) 
cable to the good battery’s negative ter-
minal.
Do not let the other end touch anything 
until the next step. The other end of the 
negative cable does not go to the dead 
battery. It goes to a major metal part with 
a good ground on the engine of the vehi-
cle with the discharged battery.
9 Attach the cable at least 18 inches 
(45 cm) away from the discharged bat-
tery, but not near engine parts that 
move. The electrical connection is just 
as good there, but the chance of sparks 
getting back to the battery is much less.
10 Start the vehicle with the good battery 
and run the engine for a while.
11 Try to start the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery. If it does not start after 
a few tries, it probably needs service.
12 Remove the cables in reverse order to 
prevent electrical shorting. Take care 
that they do not touch each other or any 
other metal.
WARNING
An electric fan can start up even when the 
engine is not running and can injure you. 
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from 
any underhood electric fan.
WARNING
Using a match or flame of any kind near a 
battery can cause battery gas to explode. 
You can suffer burns or be blinded. Use a 
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. 
The battery installed in your new Saab 
has filler caps. Be sure the right amount 
of water is there. Add distilled or boiled 
water if the level is too low. If you don’t, 
explosive gas could be present.
Be sure the electrolyte in the battery is not 
frozen. Discharged batteries will freeze. 
When connecting jumper cables to a 
frozen battery, gas from the chemical 
reaction inside the battery can build up 
under the ice and cause an explosion.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn 
you. Do not get it on you. If you acciden-
tally get it in your eyes or on your skin, 
flush the area with water and get medical 
help immediately.

185Starting and driving
Parking brake 
The parking brake is situated between the 
front seats and acts on the rear wheels. 
When the parking brake is on, the indicator 
light on the main instrument panel will be on. 
To release the parking brake, lift the lever 
slightly, press the release button and 
release the lever by pushing down on it. 
Parking
WARNING
• Always apply the parking brake when 
parking. 
• Always apply the parking brake before 
removing the ignition key.
• Do not use the parking brake when the 
car is moving.
WARNING
• Park where the vehicle will not create 
an obstruction or a hazard to other 
road users.
• Do not park on dry grass or other com-
bustible material. The catalytic con-
verter gets very hot and could start a 
fire.
• Do not leave children or pets unat-
tended in the car. In warm, sunny 
weather, the temperature inside the 
car can reach 160–180°F (70–80°C). 
NOTE
• Apply the parking brake.
• Engage reverse (automatic transmis-
sion: move selector lever to P (Park)), 
and remove the ignition key. 
• Lock the car.
IB360

186 Starting and driving
Parking on a hill
When parking on a steep hill, turn the front 
wheels so that they will be blocked by the 
curb if the car should move. 
Long-term parking
If the car is not going to be used for some 
time, e.g. 3–4 months, the following steps 
are recommended: 
• Run the engine to normal temperature 
before long-term parking. 
• Drain the washer-fluid reservoir and 
hoses. 
• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber 
seals on the hood, luggage compartment 
lid and doors, and lubricate them with 
glycerol (glycerin). 
• After washing the car, dry the brake discs 
by taking the car out on the road and 
applying the brakes a few times. 
• Fill the fuel tank with fuel to prevent con-
densation forming in it. 
• Top up the coolant and check the anti-
freeze before the onset of winter. 
• Park the car in a dry, covered and 
well-ventilated building. Leave the park-
ing brake OFF! 
• Disconnect the negative (-) battery lead. 
If frost is likely to occur during the 
long-term parking, remove the battery 
and store it away from the frost. 
• Ideally, the car should be put up on 
blocks, with the wheels off the ground. If 
this is not possible, inflate the tires to 
about 43 psi (300 kPa). 
• Leave all the windows open a crack and 
cover the car with a fabric tarpaulin - not 
one made of plastic. 
123
IB485
1Pointing downhill and 
against the curb
– Turn the wheels into 
the curb and edge the 
car forward until the 
wheels touch the curb.
2Pointing uphill and 
against the curb
– Turn the wheels away 
from the curb and edge 
the car back until the 
wheels touch the curb.
3Pointing uphill or 
downhill – no curb
– Turn the wheels 
towards the edge of the 
road. If the car should 
start rolling, it will not run 
into the road.

187Car care and technical information
Car care and 
technical 
information
Hood release handle .......    188 
Engine compartment, 
4-cyl. engine...................    189 
Engine compartment, 
6-cyl. (3.0t V6).................    190 
Emission control systems   191 
Engine...............................   192 
Engine oil .........................    193 
Transmission fluid...........    195 
Coolant .............................   196 
Brake and clutch fluid.....    198 
Power steering fluid ........    199 
Battery ..............................   199 
Drive belts........................    202 
Wipers and washers .......    203 
Changing bulbs...............    205 
Fuses................................   215 
Wheels..............................   221 
Compact spare wheel .....    225 
Flat spotting.....................    229 
Air conditioning (ACC) ...    230 
Safety belts ......................    231 
Upholstery and trim ........    231 
Textile carpeting..............    232 
Washing the car ..............    232 
Waxing and polishing.....    233 
Engine compartment .......    233 
Touching up the paint .....    233 
Anticorrosion treatment..    234 
For long trips....................    236 
Recovery and/or recycling 
of automotive materials.    236 
Headlight aiming..............    238 

188 Car care and technical information
Hood release handle
The hood release handle is located under-
neath the instrument panel. To open the 
hood: 
1 Pull the release handle.
2 The front of the hood will now spring up, 
providing access to the secondary 
safety catch.
3 Push the catch upwards, lifting the hood 
at the same time. The hood can now be 
lifted right up.
To close the hood, release it from a height 
of about 8 in (20 cm). Do not press down on 
it.
In cold weather, when the mechanism is 
stiff, the hood might need to be released 
from twice the height to lock properly.
Check that the hood is now closed securely.
WARNING
Make sure not to hold your fingers 
between the hood and the hood safety 
catch if you lay the hood down but not 
closing it.
IB487
IB486
Hood release handle  Hood secondary safety catch 

189Car care and technical information
Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine
8 7910 6
2 43
5
IB488
1
Engine compartment, 4-cyl. engine 
1 Engine-oil dipstick/filler cap 
2 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid 
3 Fuse box 
4 Expansion tank, coolant 
5 Washer-fluid filler cap 
6Battery 
7 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid 
8 Turbo unit 
9 Ignition discharge module 
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid 

190 Car care and technical information
Engine compartment, 6-cyl. (3.0t V6)
10 79 8
1 32 54
6
IB576
Engine compartment, 6-cyl. (3.0t V6) 
1 Engine-oil dipstick 
2 Engine-oil filler cap 
3 Reservoir, brake/clutch fluid 
4 Fuse box 
5 Expansion tank, coolant 
6 Washer-fluid filler cap 
7Battery 
8 Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid 
9 Ignition discharge module 
10 Reservoir, power-steering fluid 

191Car care and technical information
Engine families
Saab cars imported into the United States 
and Canada meet all applicable emission 
control standards. The engine family and 
appropriate tune-up specifications are iden-
tified on a label affixed to the left front inner 
fender.
These engine families meet applicable EPA 
Federal Standards, California State Stan-
dards and Canadian Federal Standards and 
are equipped with the following systems:
• Sequential multiport fuel injection system.
• Three way catalytic converter.
• Crankcase emissions control system.
• Evaporative emission control system.
• On-Board diagnostic (OBD II) system.
Emission control 
systems
The systems for controlling emissions to the 
atmosphere require regular checking and 
adjustment at the intervals specified in the 
service program.
In addition to meeting the exhaust emission 
regulations and thereby helping to keep the 
environment clean, a correctly tuned engine 
will also give maximum fuel economy.
Saab Trionic engine management 
system
The Saab Trionic engine management 
system is a unique Saab development that 
combines sequential multiport fuel injection, 
electronic distributorless ignition and turbo-
charger boost pressure control into one sys-
tem.
The Trionic engine control module (ECM) 
monitors many different engine parameters 
such as: 
• Intake manifold pressure.
• Intake air temperature.
• Crankshaft position.
• Engine coolant temperature.
• Throttle position and
• The oxygen content of the exhaust gases.
The ECM receives information regarding 
engine knocking from a sophisticated feed-
back function in the ignition discharge unit.
By processing all of this information, the Tri-
onic system can control fuel injector open-
ing duration, ignition timing and turbo-
charger boost pressure to provide excellent 
engine performance while maintaining low 
emissions and fuel consumption.
NOTE
The Trionic engine management systems 
continuously monitors the operation of 
these systems and have on-board diag-
nostic capabilities (OBD II). 
If the ”Engine malfunction (CHECK 
ENGINE)” lamp   in the main instru-
ment illuminates, this indicates that the 
Trionic ECM has detected a problem. The 
car will continue to operate, but perfor-
mance may be diminished. You should 
have your car checked by a Saab dealer 
as soon as possible.

192 Car care and technical information
ORVR (Onboard Refueling Vapor 
Recovery)
Hydrocarbon vapors formed when refueling 
will be recovered by the car and not 
released into the atmosphere. The hydro-
carbons are absorbed in a evaporative 
emission canister. When the engine is sub-
sequently started, the evaporative emission 
canister is gradually purged as air is sucked 
into it through a shut-off valve. The hydro-
carbon/air mixture passes through the evap 
canister purge valve and into the engine 
where it is burned.
When refueling, make sure you screw the 
filler cap on and keep turning until it has 
clicked at least 3 times. Otherwise, it is pos-
sible for the CHECK ENGINE light to illumi-
nate and a ”TIGHTEN FUEL FILLER CAP” 
message to appear on SID.
Refueling, see page 154.
Engine
2.3-liter engine
The 2.3-liter model is a transverse, 4-cylin-
der in-line engine with twin overhead cam-
shafts and 4 valves per cylinder.
This engine is equipped with balance shafts 
that reduce engine vibration to a minimum.
The balance shafts are chain driven and 
rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.
They produce forces and torques that are 
opposed to those generated by the pistons 
and connecting rods, an effect that occurs 
twice for each revolution of the engine. 
Engine noise is also reduced as the 
counter-rotating shafts counteract the vibra-
tion from the moving parts of the engine.
The transmission, located on the right 
(viewed from the front), is integrated with 
the engine. All models have front-wheel 
drive.
3.0t V6 engine 
The 3.0-liter engine is a transverse, V6 
engine with each bank of cylinders having 
double overhead camshafts and 4 valves 
per cylinder.
The transmission, located on the right 
(viewed from the front), is integrated with 
the engine. All models have front-wheel 
drive.
IB601
Balance shafts, 4-cyl. engine 

193Car care and technical information
Engine oil
Checking the oil level 
Check the engine-oil level regularly. This 
should be done after the engine has been 
run to normal temperature and then allowed 
to cool for 2–5 minutes, with the car stand-
ing on level ground. Remove the dipstick 
and wipe it clean before checking the level.
4-cylinder engine 
The oil level must not be allowed to drop 
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor 
should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as 
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX 
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a 
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
When necessary, add oil of the recom-
mended grade via the dipstick tube.
3.0t V6 engine 
The oil level must not be allowed to drop 
below the MIN mark on the dipstick, nor 
should oil be filled beyond the MAX mark, as 
this can lead to excessive oil consumption.
The distance between the MIN and MAX 
marks on the dipstick corresponds to a 
volume of approximately 1.05 qts (1 liter).
Top up, as necessary, with oil of the recom-
mended grade.
IB491 
Engine-oil filler cap and dipstick, 
4-cylinder engine 
IB1123
Engine-oil dipstick and filler cap, 3.0t V6 

194 Car care and technical information
Oil changing
The engine oil must be changed in accor-
dance with the service program, see page  
242.
Oil volume and grade, see page  253.
Oil changing should be carried out on a 
warm engine. 
1 Unscrew the drain plug in the bottom of 
the sump and leave the oil to drain into 
an oil tray or other suitable receptacle for 
at least ten minutes. Take care, as the oil 
may be hot.
2 After the oil has been drained, unscrew 
and remove the oil filter. 
3 Fit a new filter and tighten it by hand.
4 Refit the drain plug with a new washer.
5 Fill with new engine oil.
Run the engine to normal temperature and 
check the oil level. 
NOTE
Change of engine oil and oil filter may be 
required more frequently (5000-mile 
intervals (8,000 km)) if any one of the fol-
lowing conditions apply to the car:
• Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 
to 16 km). This is particularly important 
when outside temperatures are below 
freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling 
(such as frequent stop-and-go driving).
• Most trips are through dusty areas.
• You frequently tow a trailer or use a car-
rier on top of your vehicle.
• If the vehicle is used for delivery ser-
vice, police, taxi or other commercial 
applications.
IB493
Drain plug and oil filter, 4-cylinder engine 
IB494
Drain plug and oil filter, 3.0t V6 

195Car care and technical information
Transmission fluid
Manual transmission 
Check and top up the fluid in accordance 
with the service program.
If original fluid cannot can be obtained for 
topping up (see page  255), automatic trans-
mission fluid Dexron III (synthetic fluid) can 
be used. If so, the car should be taken to an 
authorized Saab dealer as soon as possible 
to have the reason for low fluid level cor-
rected and original fluid installed.
Automatic transmission 
Check the fluid level as follows: 
1 Stand the car on level ground and apply 
the parking brake. The automatic trans-
mission fluid must be at normal running 
temperature, approximately 175°F 
(80°C). This can be achieved by driving 
the car for about 30 min on the open 
road.
2 With the engine idling, move the selector 
lever to D and wait for at least 
15 seconds. Next, move the selector 
lever to R and wait for 15 seconds again. 
Finally, move the selector lever to P. Let 
the engine idle.
3 Wipe the dipstick clean with a lint-free 
cloth and put it back.
4 With the fluid at normal temperature, the 
level should be between the MAX and 
MIN marks on the dipstick. Top up, as 
necessary, with Texaco Texamatic 
Dexron III automatic transmission fluid 
(mineral oil-based), adding it through 
the dipstick pipe. The distance between 
the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick 
corresponds to a volume of approxi-
mately 0.4 qts (0.4 liter). 
If the outside temperature is below 50°F 
(10°C), the fluid will not reach the specified 
temperature of 175°F (80°C). In this case, 
the correct fluid level may be 0.8 in (20 mm) 
below the MAX mark.
WARNING
• Prolonged and repeated exposure of 
the skin to engine oil can cause seri-
ous skin disorders.
• Avoid prolonged skin contact when-
ever possible. Wash the affected area 
thoroughly with soap and water after 
any contact.
• Keep oil out of reach of children.
• Do not touch the turbocharger or 
manifold. These get very hot when the 
engine has been running.
• Do not spill oil on hot parts of the 
engine as this could cause a fire. Used 
engine oil is particularly flammable.
• Protect the environment. Do not dis-
pose of oil in the ground or down a 
drain. Dispose of all used oil and oil fil-
ters at an appropriate disposal facility.
NOTE
If there is a smell of burning fluid or the 
fluid is black, change the fluid. 
+80°
MIN
MAX
+80°
IB495
Dipstick for automatic-transmission fluid 

196 Car care and technical information
Coolant 
The expansion tank is transparent to facili-
tate checking of the coolant level. 
When the engine is cold, the coolant must 
not lie over the KALT/COLD mark on the 
expansion tank.
If the message ”FILL COOLANT FLUID” is 
displayed on the SID, check the level of fluid 
in the expansion tank.
Top up, as necessary, with equal parts of 
clean water and Saab-approved coolant.
If the expansion tank is empty when coolant 
is added, run the engine to normal temper-
ature and top up again, as necessary.
Coolant 
The cooling system is charged at the factory 
with coolant containing a 50% concentra-
tion of a combined antifreeze and corrosion 
inhibitor. A weaker mixture will result in 
reduced anticorrosion protection. For pro-
tection against freezing in very cold 
weather, a stronger concentration will be 
needed.
A 60% concentration of antifreeze will pro-
vide protection at temperatures down to 
-58 F (-50°C).
The corrosion-inhibiting properties of the 
coolant deteriorate over time, but 
Saab-approved coolant can be used for 
year-round protection. Change the coolant 
as specified in the service program and use 
only Saab-approved coolant – other makes 
may need changing more frequently and 
may damage the system.
WARNING
• Proceed with caution if the radiator is 
boiling when you open the hood. 
Never remove the expansion-tank 
filler cap when the radiator is boiling. 
Loosen the cap carefully, and let the 
engine cool before removing the cap.
• The cooling system is pressurized – 
hot coolant and vapor can escape 
when the filler cap is released.
NOTE
Always mix the antifreeze with the 
appropriate volume of water before 
adding it to the cooling system.
If pure antifreeze is added, the engine 
could still freeze and be damaged. This is 
because the antifreeze will not mix 
properly with the coolant before the 
thermostat has opened to allow full 
circulation.
IB1338
Coolant expansion tank 

197Car care and technical information
Changing the coolant 
(Usually carried out as part of the Saab orig-
inal service by an authorized Saab dealer) 
1 If the engine is hot, open the expan-
sion-tank filler cap carefully to release 
the pressure, but do not remove it com-
pletely. Place a suitable receptacle 
under the radiator and undo the drain-
cock.
2 Remove the filler cap on the expansion 
tank.
3 The system takes about two minutes to 
drain. Close the draincock.
4 Mix the antifreeze and water to the 
required strength in a suitable container. 
Use only Saab-approved coolant.
5 Add the coolant slowly to the expansion 
tank. This will take about two minutes, 
as the air needs time to escape.
6 Screw on the filler cap and fully tighten 
the drain cook. Run the engine to normal 
temperature. Top up the coolant, as nec-
essary, until the level is just below the 
MAX mark on the tank.
7 Check the coolant again after a few days 
and top up as necessary.
IB498
Radiator draincock 

198 Car care and technical information
Brake and clutch fluid 
Checking the fluid level 
The combined brake and clutch-fluid reser-
voir is transparent to facilitate checking of 
the fluid level.
The level should be between the MAX and 
MIN marks. Top up, as necessary, with 
DOT 4 fluid. Do 
not
 use DOT 5 brake fluid.
Use only new brake fluid from a sealed con-
tainer.
Check that there are no leaks in the brake 
system.
The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as 
the brake pads wear. The MAX level in the 
reservoir corresponds to the amount of 
brake fluid required with new brake pads. If 
the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to 
normal brake pad wear, topping up is not 
necessary.
Changing of the brake fluid should be 
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
The vehicle´s regular braking system is 
adjusted automatically, but the parking 
brake has to be adjusted manually. This 
work, involving adjustment of the parking 
brake cables and brake pads, must only be 
carried out by an authorized Saab dealer.
It is not possible to detect, through abnormal 
pedal or parking brake-lever travel, whether 
brake pads are worn and need replacing. It 
is therefore essential that brake pads be 
checked regularly, as specified in the ser-
vice program.
Brake pad wear indicators 
The outboard brake pads on the front 
wheels incorporate pad-wear indicators. 
When the lining is down to 0.11 in (3 mm), 
the pad will produce a screeching, squeal-
ing or scraping noise when the brakes are 
applied. New pads should be fitted without 
delay.
Brake pads should only be changed by 
an authorized Saab dealer. To ensure 
optimum brake performance, use only 
Saab original brake pads.
WARNING
Brake fluid deteriorates as it becomes 
old. Because it is hygroscopic, it absorbs 
water from the air and, in time, could allow 
vapor to form in the brake system, thus 
reducing its performance. It is therefore 
important that brake fluid be changed reg-
ularly, as specified in the service pro-
gram.
NOTE
Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork, 
since it can cause the paint to bubble and 
lift. If any brake fluid is spilled, the area 
should be flushed with large quantities of 
water as quickly as possible. 
IB1188
Brake and clutch-fluid reservoir 

199Car care and technical information
Power steering fluid
Check the level of the power steering fluid in 
the reservoir regularly, in accordance with 
the service program.
The wheels should point forward during the 
check.
Clean around the cap before it is 
unscrewed. Clean the dipstick. Screw in the 
cap completely again before checking the 
level.
The oil should lie between the MAX and MIN 
marks when the oil temperature is about 
70°F (+20°C). If the oil is colder the level can 
be lower, and in higher temperatures the 
level can be higher, both of which are 
acceptable.
Top up with ”Power Steering Fluid 
CHF 11S” (part number 8996860).
Battery
The battery is provided with a cover to pro-
tect it from radiated heat. If the battery is 
exposed to high temperatures, its life will be 
shortened. To remove the cover, pry out the 
edge a little, located at the rear of the cover.
The cover fits the standard battery installed 
in the car. If a new battery is to be fitted, 
make sure that its dimensions are the same 
as the standard one.
The fluid level and the charge level should 
be checked regularly.
The best way to check the charge is to use 
a hydrometer.
WARNING
Do not fill the power steering fluid to 
above the MAX mark. Too much fluid can 
result in leakage.
Power steering fluid on hot engine com-
ponents constitutes a fire risk.
WARNING
• The battery emits hydrogen which, 
when mixed with the oxygen in the air, 
forms a highly explosive gas. Avoid 
causing sparks and keep open flames 
well away from the vicinity of the bat-
tery.
• The battery contains corrosive sulfuric 
acid. Always wear a face mask or 
goggles when working on the battery.
• If battery acid gets into the eyes or 
splashes the skin or clothing, wash 
affected area liberally with water.
If acid gets into the eyes or a large 
quantity makes contact with the skin, 
seek medical help.
IB501
Power steering fluid reservoir 

200 Car care and technical information
Tap water contains salts and minerals that 
accelerate the corrosion of the battery elec-
trodes, which can shorten the life of the bat-
tery.
The specific gravity of the electrolyte when 
the battery is fully charged is 1.28. A specific 
gravity of 1.18 roughly indicates a 50% 
charge (see also page 254).
If frequent short journeys are made, the bat-
tery may need to be given a booster charge. 
This can be done either using a battery 
charger or by taking the car for a long run.
A car with a standard equipment specifica-
tion and a fully charged battery can be left 
for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient 
charge for starting. If extra equipment is fit-
ted, such as a car phone, the charge may 
only be sufficient for about 15 days.
NOTE
Never use tap water to top up the battery.
NOTE
A discharged battery can freeze and frac-
ture. Batteries should therefore always be 
stored away from frost. 
IB1173
Correct fluid level in battery
IB1125
Battery 

201Car care and technical information
Charging/replacing the battery
Connect the positive lead to the positive (+) 
battery terminal (red), and the negative lead 
to a good ground point, e.g. the lifting lug at 
the front of the engine.
To remove the battery, always disconnect 
the negative (black) lead first and reconnect 
it last when fitting the new battery.
The battery size must comply with DIN 
53735 MFI 230/2.16.
NOTE
To avert the danger of short-circuiting 
between the positive (+) terminal on the 
battery and the inlet manifold on the 
engine, always disconnect the negative 
(-) battery lead first and reconnect it last.
NOTE
• Never reverse the polarity of the bat-
tery by connecting the leads to the 
wrong terminals. The red, positive 
lead connects to the positive (+) termi-
nal, and the black, negative lead to the 
negative (-) terminal. 
• Serious damage can be done to the 
car’s electrical system if a battery or 
alternator lead is disconnected while 
the engine is running. 
• The nut on the battery clamp should 
be tightened to a torque of 10 Nm. 
IB564
Correct position for battery clamp 

202 Car care and technical information
Drive belts 
The alternator is situated on the right-hand 
side of the engine, adjacent to the bulkhead. 
It is driven via a Poly-V-belt from the crank-
shaft pulley.
The Poly-V-belt also drives the water pump, 
the A/C compressor and the steering servo 
pump.  
The belt tension is critical and is adjusted 
automatically by the belt tensioner.
See also page 49, ”Warning, charging”.
WARNING
• Keep hands and clothing well clear of 
drive belts when engine is running.
• Always stop engine before inspecting 
drive belts.
• The fan can start even when the 
engine is switched off.
NOTE
Serious damage can be done to the car’s 
electrical system if an alternator lead is 
disconnected while the engine is running.
IB542
Routing of the Poly-V-belt: 
4-cylinder engine 
IB543
Routing of the Poly-V-belt: 
3.0t V6 

203Car care and technical information
Wipers and washers
Check and clean all wiper blades regularly. 
We recommend Saab washer fluid for 
cleaning.
If poor wiper performance is experienced, 
clean the windshield with Saab washer fluid. 
This is particularly important if the car has 
been through an automatic car wash, as 
these sometimes leave a wax coating on the 
windshield.
If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory, 
fit new blades.
Changing the windshield wiper 
blades
Lift the wiper arm off the windshield
1 Depress the catch.
2 Pull the complete blade assembly down 
to free it from the wiper arm, and then lift 
it off the arm.
Changing headlight-wiper blades 
1 Lift the wiper arm off the headlight.
2 Release the wiper blade by pulling it 
straight down, at right angles to the 
wiper arm.
To fit the new blade, slot the blade into the 
retainer on the wiper arm, and press it firmly 
home.
IB506
2
1
IB505

204 Car care and technical information
Washers
The washer-fluid reservoir holds 6.4 quarts 
(6 liters). When "WASHER FLUID LEVEL 
LOW" comes up on the SID, the reservoir is 
down to about 1 quart (1 liter) of fluid. Add 
at least 50% of washer- fluid to water to pre-
vent freezing and for effective cleaning.
Washer jets 
The washer jets can be adjusted and, if 
necessary, unclogged by means of a pin.
IB507
Washer-fluid filler cap 
IB1126
Cleaning/adjusting the washer jets 

205Car care and technical information
Changing bulbs  
Check that the new bulb is working when finished.
Some bulbs are of the ”Long-Life” type. Make sure the same type is 
fitted when changing one of these.
Headlight aiming, see page  238. Headlight bulb for high beam
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with 
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover.
WARNING
Before changing a bulb in the engine bay, switch off the engine to 
avoid danger of fingers and hands being injured by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when the engine is switched off.
NOTE
• Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W, since the head-
light reflector and the wiring of the car are not designed for a 
higher wattage.
• Switch off the ignition before changing a bulb, to avoid possible 
short-circuiting.
IB510

206 Car care and technical information
Headlight bulb for low beam
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the lamp unit.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 To remove the spring clip, push it in and then move it to the right.
4 Remove the bulb.
5 Without touching the glass with your fingers, insert the new bulb.
6 Line up the bulb with the guide in the reflector and secure it with 
the spring clip.
7 Plug in the connector.
8 Screw on the cover.
IB509

207Car care and technical information
Parking-light bulb 
The parking-light bulb is adjacent to the bulb 
for low beam.
1 Unscrew the cover from the back of the 
lamp unit.
2 Withdraw the bulb holder.
3 Change the bulb.
Front fog lights / cornering lights
1 From under the front bumper, grip the 
bulb holder and twist counterclockwise.
2 Unplug the connector.
3 Change the bulb.
Refit in the reverse order.
Front turn signal bulbs
To change the bulb, the complete lamp unit 
has to be removed.
1 Loosen the screw (1). There is no need 
to remove it completely.
2 Carefully pull out the lamp unit.
3 The bulb holder has a bayonet fitting. 
Grip the holder and twist it counterclock-
wise. 
4 Withdraw the bulb holder from the lamp 
unit.
5 The bulb also has a bayonet fitting. 
Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6 Fit the new bulb and check that it is cor-
rectly seated.
WARNING
Never crawl under a car that is supported 
only by a jack.
IB511
Parking-light bulb 
IB512
IB1128
12
3
Front turn signal bulb
1 Retaining screw 
2 Bayonet pin 
3 Plastic lugs
Front fog lights

208 Car care and technical information
When refitting the lamp unit, check that the 
bayonet pin and the two plastic lugs engage 
their respective slots. Hold the lamp unit in 
position, and tighten the screw (1).
Rear light cluster, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs for the lamps in the rear light clus-
ter are accessed from the luggage compart-
ment.
1 Lower the flap (Velcro fastening).
2 Squeeze the two plastic lugs and 
remove the bulb holder.
3 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in 
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
4 Change the bulb.
IB1129
IB1296
1
2323
5
6
41
4
Rear light clusters 
1 Direction indicators 
2 Tail lights 
3 Stop lights 
4 Reversing lights 
5 Rear fog light 
IB516
IB1234
14
2 3 2
61
4
25 23

209Car care and technical information
Trunk lid light and taillights, 
9-5 Sedan
Before changing bulbs in the trunk, you 
must first release the trim at the foot of the 
trunk. This involves removing the handle 
and the three trim fasteners (studs).
1 Unscrew the handle on the inside of the 
tailgate.
2 Using the peg in the top of the screw-
driver handle, push in the button in the 
centre of the studs.
3 Remove the studs.
Changing bulbs 
1 Squeeze the plastic lug and electrical 
connector together and remove the bulb 
holder.
2 The bulb has a bayonet fitting. Press in 
the bulb and twist it counterclockwise.
3 Change the bulb.
Refitting the trim 
1 Reset the studs by pushing back the 
center buttons so that they protrude by 
0.2 inch (5 mm).
2 Insert the studs through the trim and tail-
gate panel. Press the center buttons in, 
flush with the collar.
3 Screw the handle back onto the trunk.
High-mounted stop lights, 9-5 Sedan
The bulbs can be accessed after the panel 
in the rear headlining has been removed.
1 Remove the panel by carefully pushing 
in the two clips, one at the time.
2 Release the bulb holder, which is 
retained by a clip at either end.
3 Withdraw the bulb gently straight back.
4 Push in the new bulb.
5 Refit the bulb holder.
6 Replace the panel by carefully pushing 
the panel towards the headlining so that 
the two clips engage their respective 
slot.
IB517
IB518
32 23
1
IB519
High-mounted stop lights
1 Panel
2 Retaining clips
3 Bulbs

210 Car care and technical information
Tailgate bulbs, 9-5 Wagon
1  Turn the lock a quarter turn (90°) with a 
screwdriver or the ignition key.
2  Open and remove the cover.
3  Take out the bulb holder by twisting it 
slightly counterlockwise.
4  Press in the bulb and twist it 
counterclockwise.
5  Change the bulb.
6  Check that the new bulb is working.
Reassembly:
1  Place the two ”hinges” in the recess in 
the tailgate.
2  Then push the ”hinges” into the recess 
and close the cover.
3  Turn the lock a quarter turn.
Rear lights clusters, 9-5 Wagon
1  Open the tailgate.
2  Remove the two covers and undo the 
screws.
3  Grip the screw mounting and pull the 
whole lamp unit sideways until it is 
loose (it can be quite tight).
4  Take out the bulb holder by twisting it 
slightly counterclockwise.
5  Press in the bulb and twist it counter-
clockwise.
6  Change the bulb.
7  Check that the new bulb works.
IB1227
IB1228
IB1229

211Car care and technical information
Reassembly:
1  Locate the two front attachments and 
press the front part of the light unit 
straight into the body panel.
2  Tighten the screws and replace the 
cover.
Loading lighting, 9-5 Wagon
1  Pull down the glass cover at the outer 
edge.
2  Bend one of the contacts so that the 
bulb can be removed.
3  Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the 
lamp fitting first.
License-plate light 
1 Undo the two screws and remove the 
lamp glass.
2 Withdraw the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
4 Check the seal before fitting the glass.
IB1230
IB1335
IB520

212 Car care and technical information
Side direction indicators 
1 Slide the lamp fitting forward and pull out 
the back.
2 Remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, make sure that the spring in the 
lamp fitting engages the edge of the open-
ing in the body panel.
Courtesy lights (doors and floor) 
and luggage-compartment lighting 
1 Insert a screwdriver carefully into the 
slot in the end of the lamp fitting. Ease 
the fitting off to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and 
remove the bulb.
3 Change the bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the 
lamp fitting first.
Dome light, front 
1 Ease the leading edge of the glass out 
of the overhead panel by inserting a 
small screwdriver alternately in each of 
the two slots.
2 Release one of the contacts and remove 
the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
IB521
IB522
IB523

213Car care and technical information
Dome light, rear 
1 Remove the entire overhead panel: 
ease out the trailing end first, and then 
both front edges.
2 Fit the new bulb.
Glove-compartment illumination 
1 Insert a small screwdriver in the slot in 
the end of the lamp fitting and ease it out 
to gain access to the bulb.
2 Bend out one of the contacts and 
remove the bulb.
3 Fit the new bulb.
On refitting, insert the connector-end of the 
lamp fitting first.
Other bulbs 
If any other bulbs need changing, you are 
advised to take the car to an authorized 
Saab dealer.
IB524
IB525

214 Car care and technical information
Bulb table
A special kit containing spare bulbs and fuses is available as an 
accessory from your Saab dealer. A storage space for this is pro-
vided adjacent to the toolkit and jack, under the panel in the luggage 
compartment.
# Wattage Cap 
1 55 H7 Headlight 
2 55 H1 Fog light 
3 21 Ba 15s  Reversing lamp; side reversing 
lamp; rear fog lamp; cornering lamp
4 21/5 BAY 15d  Stop/tail lamp 
5 PY 21 yel  BAU 15s  Direction indicator, front/rear 
6 10 SV 8.5  Dome light; courtesy lights; glove 
compartment; luggage compartment 
7 5 SV 8.5  Safety belt reminder 
8 5 halogen  Reading light, overhead panel 
9 4 Ba9 Reading light, rear
10 5 W 2.1 x 
9.5d  Side indicators (yellow); 
high-mounted stop light (9-5 Sedan); 
parking lights; number-plate illumi-
nation 
11 1,2 W 2 x 4.6d  Switches; front ashtray 
NOTE
Do not interchange. Always use the correct Wattage bulb accord-
ing to application.
IB1336
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

215Car care and technical information
Fuses
The fuses are housed in two fuse panels: 
one at the end of the instrument panel on the 
driver’s side, and one under the hood.
To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it 
from the panel (see below). If the filament is 
broken, the fuse has blown.
A special tool for removing fuses is provided 
at the bottom of the fuse panel. Simply push 
the tool onto the fuse, squeeze and remove 
the fuse. 
WARNING
To avert the risk of short-circuiting and/or 
fire breaking out in the electrical system, 
the following advice should be heeded: 
• Always consult an authorized Saab 
dealer before modifying or adding any 
electrical equipment. Failure to do so 
can result in the electrical system 
being damaged. 
• Never replace a fuse with one having 
a higher/lower rating than specified 
(see page 217). The color of the fuse 
indicates its amperage. 
• If the same fuse blows repeatedly, 
have the electrical system checked by 
an authorized Saab dealer. 
• If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major 
fault in the electrical system. Have the 
car checked by an authorized Saab 
dealer.
IB527
Fuse panel in instrument panel 
IB528
Fuse box under the hood 
IB144
Sound fuse / Blown fuse 

216 Car care and technical information
Maxi fuses
The Maxi fuses are housed in the fuse box 
under the hood. These fuses can be 
checked in the same way as the other fuses.
The Maxi fuses are designed to protect the 
car’s electrical system from being dam-
aged. Each Maxi fuse protects a number of 
electrical circuits and functions and there-
fore has a higher rating (amperage) than the 
standard fuses. No spare Maxi fuses are 
supplied with the car. 
DICE / TWICE
DICE = Dashboard Integrated Central Elec-
tronics 
TWICE = Theft-Warning Central Electronics 
DICE and TWICE are electronic control 
modules that monitor and control a variety 
of functions, including: 
DICE controls (among other things):
• Front lights and interior lighting.
• Instrument illumination.
• Intermittent wiper operation.
• Electric heating of rear window and door 
mirrors.
• Cooling fans.
TWICE controls (among other things):
• Central locking.
• Car alarm (Anti-theft system).
• Engine immobilizer.
• Autochecking of lights.
• Electric heating of rear seat.
• Safety belt reminder.
• Electrically adjustable passenger seat.
The DICE and TWICE control modules are 
linked to a data bus, which is basically an 
information carrier that allows information to 
be exchanged between all the control mod-
ules and components connected to the bus.
If a fault occurs in any of these components, 
diagnostic faults codes are set in the rele-
vant control module, which facilitates fault 
diagnosis at the Saab dealer.
The scan tool connector for fault diagnosis 
is located under the instrument panel on the 
drivers side.
NOTE
If a Maxi fuse blows, it means that there 
is a major fault in the electrical system. 
Have the car checked without delay by 
an authorized Saab dealer.
IB529
Maxi fuses under the hood 

217Car care and technical information
Fuse panel in instrument panel
# Amp Function 
A 30 Trailer lights 
B 10 Automatic transmission 
C  7,5 Electric door mirrors; DICE 
1 15 Brake lights; shift-lock override
2 15 Reversing lights 
3 10 Parking lights, left 
4 10 Parking lights, right 
5 7,5 DICE / TWICE 
6 30 Electric windows, right 
6B  5 Stop lights, trailer 
7 10 Fuel injection 
8 15 Trunk lighting; trunk lock; door lighting; SID; car 
phone 
9 15 Audio System; diagnostic instrument; CD changer
10 15 Memory function, door mirrors; heating, rear seat 
11 30 Central locking; electrically adjusted passenger seat 
12 7,5 Automatic transmission 
13 20 Audio System, amplifier 
14 30 Ignition system, engine 
15 15 Preheated oxygen sensor (catalytic converter) 
16 20 DICE (direction indicators)
16B – –
17 20 Engine-management system 
18 7,5 Door-mirror heating 
19 20 Fuel pump 
20 15 ACC; interior lighting; rear fog light
21 10 Audio System; rear-view mirror with auto dimming 
function; telematics
22 40 Interior fan; air pump (3.0t V6 only)
23 15 Sunroof 
24 40 Rear-window heating 
25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat; fuel-filler flap 
26 7,5 ABS brakes; ACC
27 10 Engine-management system
28 7,5 Airbag (SRS) 
29 7,5 Automatic transmission 
IB530
BC123456
A
14
12
11
10
9
8
713
6B 15 16
23 24
22
21
20
19
18
17
16B
54 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
36
35
34
33
32
39
38
37
55
52
53
56

218 Car care and technical information
Relay panel under instrument panel  Relay panel under instrument panel (cont.)
30 7,5 Starter motor 
31 7,5 Cruise control; water valve; fog lights, front 
32 15 Ventilated front seats 
33 7,5 Direction-indicator switch 
34 30 Cigarette lighter 
35 15 Daytime running light 
36 30 Electric windows, left 
37 30 Windshield wipers; rain sensor
38 30 Electric heating, front seats 
39 20 Limp-home solenoid (automatic transmission) 
52-5
6Spare fuses
# Function 
A 
B  Electric heating of rear seat 
C 
D 
E  Main relay (engine management system) 
F  Fuel filler flap 
G Fuel pump 
H Ignition switch 
I Rear-window / door mirrors heating
J Reversing lights
KStarter relay
L Limp-home function
IB531
ABC
D
G
EF
HI
KL
J

219Car care and technical information
Fuse box under hood
Fuses 
# Amp Function 
1 60 ABS (Maxi fuse) 
2––
315Horn 
4 10 Rear window wiper (9-5 Wagon)
5 15 Fog lights (front spoiler) 
6 30 Radiator fan, high speed 
7 15 Low beam headlight, right 
8 15 High beam headlight, right 
9 15 Low beam headlight, left 
10 15 High beam headlight, left 
11 10 Headlight beam-length adjustment (certain markets 
only); headlight washers / wipers
12 Spotlights (accessory) 
13 15 High beam flasher 
14 10 A/C; car alarm siren 
15 30 Radiator fan 
16 – –
17 – –
18 – –
IB532
18 17 16 15
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
6 5 4 3
1
2
10.1
3
5.2
5.1
2
9 8 7
11
1213

220 Car care and technical information
Relays
# Function 
1 Washer, front/rear
2 Low beam headlight
3 High beam headlight
4 Extra lights (accessory) 
5.1 Horn 
5.2 Rain sensor
6 Wiper, rear (9-5 Wagon)
7 Radiator fan, low speed 
8 Radiator fan, high speed, left fan
9 A/C-compressor 
10.1 Front fog lights 
10.2 Headlight wipers
11 Windshield wipers
12 Radiator fan, high speed, right fan
13 Autochecking of headlights 

221Car care and technical information
Wheels 
Alternative wheels and tires
If you wish to fit other tires or wheels than 
those supplied with the car, consult your 
Saab dealer first as to the possibilities avail-
able.
Wheels/tires combinations that are not 
approved by Saab can negatively affect the 
car´s directional stability, steering and brak-
ing in both wet and dry conditions.
Do not assume that a wheel/tire combina-
tion will function properly just because it will 
bolt on.
The wheels and tires have been carefully 
matched to the characteristics of the car and 
play a key role in its outstanding roadhold-
ing and handling.
Tire pressure
Tires need to be inflated to suit the load car-
ried and the maximum speed the car will be 
driven (see the recommended tire pres-
sures on the back cover). Note that all 
values apply to cold tires. For tires with an 
aspect ratio less than /60, increase the tire 
pressure by 3 psi (20 kPa) for rough roads 
with potholes to minimize the risk of rim 
damage.
Never reduce the pressure of a hot tire. If the 
tires are hot when you check them, only 
increase the pressure, if necessary.
Soft tires will cause faster wear than 
over-pressurized tires. They also increase 
fuel consumption.
If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit 
a new one.
Important! Remember to adjust the tire 
pressures if you change the load in the car 
or intend to cruise at a substantially higher 
or lower speed than normal.
NOTE
For wide wheels and/or low-profile tires, 
bear in mind the following:
• Tires and wheels can be damaged in 
potholes etc.
• Springs, shock absorbers and wheel 
bearings can be overloaded.
• The wheels can come into contact with 
chassis and body components.
• The speed and load limits for the tires 
must not be exceeded; see page  222.
• Wheels larger than 17” must not be fit-
ted. The maximum permissible offset 
is 49 mm.
NOTE
Check the tire pressures at least once 
per month.
Underinflation is the main cause of:
• Tires wearing out prematurely.
• Damage to the sidewalls.
• Damage to the wheels.

222 Car care and technical information
Rotating tires
Because the car has front-wheel drive, the 
front tires tend to wear faster than the rear 
ones. New tires should always be fitted in 
pairs, so that tires on the same axle have the 
same amount of tread.
If swapping the complete set, e.g. winter 
tires for summer tires, mark the tires 
removed to ensure that they go back in the 
same position (e.g. FL for front left, RL rear 
left, etc.).
Store wheels lying flat or hanging – never 
standing upright.
Tire markings
An example of the meaning of the different 
markings in a tire size is given below for a 
tire size of:
205/65 R15 94 V  
Winter tires
Winter (snow) tires are recommended for 
winter climates where the majority of your 
driving will be done on snow and ice. Winter 
tires should be fitted to all four wheels to 
maintain a proper balance. Your Saab 
dealer can advise you as to the correct size 
tire for your car (if different from the original 
size) and also supply Saab approved winter 
tires.
Tire quality grading (cars sold in 
U.S.)
New tires must be graded and labeled in 
accordance with new Federal regulations. 
Standard tests are conducted to measure 
performance in the areas of traction and 
temperature resistance. Refer to the tire 
sidewall for the specific quality grades of the 
tires provided on your new Saab. Compact 
spare tires are exempt.
DOT QUALITY GRADES
• Treadwear
• Traction AA, A, B, C
• Temperature A, B, C
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed-
eral safety requirements in addition to these 
grades.
WARNING
When fitting just one new pair of tires, 
these should be fitted to the rear wheels, 
as these are more critical to the direc-
tional stability of the car (e.g. on braking 
or in a skid). The existing rear wheels 
should therefore be moved to the front. 
Always move left rear to left front and right 
rear to right front, so that the direction of 
rotation remains the same.
205 Tire section width, mm 
65 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height 
is 65% of the section width 
R Radial ply 
15 Wheel rim diameter 15 in at bead 
seats 
94 Tire load code 
V Speed marking 
Speed ratings 
S Tire approved for speeds up to 
100 mph (180 km/h) 
T Tire approved for speeds up to 
118 mph (190 km/h) 
H Tire approved for speeds up to 
130 mph (210 km/h) 
V Tire approved for speeds up to 
150 mph (240 km/h) 
W Tire approved for speeds up to 
167 mph (270 km/h) 
Y Tire approved for speeds up to 
186 mph (300 km/h) 

223Car care and technical information
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (US)
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-
der and maximum section width. For exam-
ple:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA 
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative 
rating based on the wear rate of the tire 
when tested under controlled conditions on 
a specified government test course. For 
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The 
relative performance of tires depends upon 
the actual conditions of their use, however, 
and may depart significantly from the norm 
due to variations in driving habits, service 
practices and differences in road character-
istics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, 
are AA, A, B and C. These grades represent 
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as 
measured under controlled conditions on 
specified government test surfaces of 
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may 
have poor traction performance. Wear indicators
The tires incorporate wear indicators in the 
form of smooth, treadless strips across the 
width, which become visible when only 
1.6 mm of tread remains. As soon as the 
indicators become visible, new tires should 
be fitted without delay.
Make sure you are familiar with the legal 
limit for minimum tread depth in your 
country and also any regulations gov-
erning the use of winter tires.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to a tire is 
based on straight-ahead braking, traction 
test and does not include acceleration, 
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction 
characteristics.
SG840
Wear indicators 

224 Car care and technical information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), 
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance 
to the generation of heat and its ability to dis-
sipate heat when tested under controlled 
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory 
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can 
cause the material of the tire to degenerate 
and reduce tire life, and excessive temper-
ature can lead to sudden tire failure. The 
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must 
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle 
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of 
performance on the laboratory test wheel 
than the minimum required by law.
Date code
Tires should be regarded as perishable 
goods. As the tires age, the rubber becomes 
progressively harder, and the roadholding 
ability of the tires diminishes. This is partic-
ularly on winter tires.
Tires now have a date-code marking for the 
year of manufacture. The first two digits 
denote the week number and the two last 
digits the year. The ”<” symbol points to the 
year.
Accordingly, a date code of 0200 signifies 
that the tire was manufactured in week 02, 
2000.
WARNING
The temperature grade for a tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated 
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, 
underinflation, or excessive loading, 
either separately or in combination, can 
cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
IB1564
Date code 

225Car care and technical information
Compact spare wheel
The compact spare is light and easy to 
handle when changing the tire. Its use is 
only permitted when a standard tire has sus-
tained a puncture. The maximum life of the 
tire is only 2000 miles (3,500 km).
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) with the 
compact spare fitted.
The compact spare should be inflated to 
60 psi (420 kPa). Carry the punctured tire in 
the spare-wheel well under the luggage-
compartment floor.
Have the standard tire repaired and refitted 
as soon as possible (see also page  180).
The spare wheel, together with the jack and 
jack handle, front towrope attachment eye 
and toolkit, is stowed away underneath a 
panel in the luggage-compartment floor.
If you need to change a wheel, remove the 
tool kit first and then the spare wheel.
The panel over the spare wheel can be held 
open by hooking the handle onto the rubber 
seal.
In the Saab 9-5 Sedan, there is a holder for 
a warning triangle in the luggage compart-
ment trim. In the Saab 9-5 Wagon, there is 
space for a warning triangle underneath the 
panel in the luggage compartment floor.
NOTE
To avoid damaging a punctured alloy 
wheel it can be placed outside up in the 
spare-wheel well but only while driving to 
the closest workshop.
A general rule is that all heavy loads must 
be well secured in the luggage compart-
ment, see page 136 and 139.
IB534
Panel hooked back, 9-5 Sedan
IB1232
Hanging up the cover and spare wheel 
compartments mats, 9-5 Wagon
IB1186
Spare wheel (under panel in luggage 
compartment) 

226 Car care and technical information
Changing a wheel 
WARNING
• The car jack is designed solely for use 
in changing a wheel or fitting snow 
chains. It must not be used to support 
the car during repair work or servicing.
• Never crawl under a car that is 
supported only by a jack.
• Special care must be taken if the car is 
on a slope – use wheel chocks! 
• Position chocks, one ahead and one 
behind, the wheel that is diagonally 
opposite to the one to be changed.
• Switch on the hazard warning lights if 
the car is on a road.
• Apply the parking brake and leave the 
car in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic 
transmission: move selector to the 
P position.
• Ensure that everybody is out of the car 
before jacking it up.
• Never start the engine while the car is 
jacked up.
• The jack must stand on a firm, level 
surface.
• Stow the jack in the place provided for 
it under the panel in the floor of the lug-
gage compartment. Secure it properly 
to avert injury to passengers in the 
event of an accident.
• Do not use the jack for any purpose 
other than for jacking up the car.

227Car care and technical information
To jack up the car, apply the jack to one of 
the special jacking points under the sills.
Position for jack 
IB536
IB1553
Positioning the jack
IB1554
Jack location, between spare wheel and 
sill

228 Car care and technical information
If a floor jack is used, it can be applied to the 
standard jacking points used by the dealer.
A floor jack can lift both front wheels or both 
rear wheels off the ground simultaneously. 
A jack stand must then be applied under-
neath the front of the engine subframe (at 
the fixing point for the towrope-attachment 
eye) or to the rear towrope-attachment eye 
(or under the trailer hitch, if fitted).
1 Put the car in 1st gear (automatic trans-
mission: move selector to the P position) 
and apply the parking brake.
2 Wind the jack up to a suitable height 
before placing it under the recess in the 
sill.
Make sure that the jack fully engages 
the recess in the sill and that the base of 
the jack is steady and flat on the ground.
3 Remove the wheel cover (where appli-
cable).
Loosen the wheel bolts by half a turn.
4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of 
the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and 
lift off the wheel.
5 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the 
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts 
and wheel to be seated correctly.
6 Lower the car and tighten the wheel 
bolts to the correct torque in the 
sequence shown (opposite pairs).
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Do not overtighten the bolts using a per-
cussion nut tightener: not only can this 
damage the wheels but it can also make 
it impossible to undo the bolts using the 
wheel wrench in the car’s toolkit. 
7 Check-tighten the wheel bolts after a 
few miles.
Tightening torque
Light-alloy wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
Steel wheels: 80 ft.lbs. (110 Nm)
NOTE
Apply the jack only to the jacking points 
indicated.
NOTE
When refitting wheel covers (where 
applicable), make sure that the valve 
protrudes through the hole in the wheel 
cover. 
IB1130
Jacking points for a trolley jack 

229Car care and technical information
Flat spotting
All tires get hot, especially on long journeys 
or when the car is driven hard. After the car 
has been parked with hot tires and the tires 
have cooled down, a flat spot can appear in 
the tire, where it is in contact with the 
ground. The same can occur if the car has 
not been moved for a long time.
Flat spots can give rise to vibration that can 
be felt through the steering wheel, similar to 
that experienced when the wheels need bal-
ancing. Flat spots of this type disappear 
once the tires get hot again, usually after 
10–15 miles (20–25 km) of driving at cruis-
ing speed.
IB539
Tightening sequence, wheel bolts 
IB538
Removing the wheel cover

230 Car care and technical information
Air conditioning 
(ACC) 
Fault diagnosis 
If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are 
a number of checks you can perform your-
self. If the fault persists, however, have the 
system checked by an authorized Saab 
dealer.
Important! 
When the A/C system is running, the intake 
air is dehumidified, and the resultant con-
densation is drained off through two outlets 
underneath the floor of the car in the vicinity 
of the front doors. It is therefore perfectly 
normal for water to be seen dripping from 
these outlets when the car is parked. The 
warmer the ambient air and the higher the 
humidity, the greater will be the amount of 
condensation formed.
Inadequate cooling: 
a Check that the condenser (forward of 
the radiator) has not become clogged 
with dirt and insects.
b Make sure that the drive belt for the com-
pressor is not slipping.
c Check the fuses for the ventilation fans 
and compressor.
Maintenance 
• The drive belt for the compressor should 
be inspected under the regular service 
program.
• Clean dirt and insects away from the con-
denser and radiator to prevent clogging. 
When washing the car, use the hose to 
spray the radiator and condenser (located 
forward of the radiator) from both sides 
(both from the front of the car and from 
inside the engine bay). Do not use a pres-
sure washer.
Caution: Do not use the hose when the 
engine is hot.
Other than in extremely cold weather, do not 
screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this 
will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.
Note: The A/C system will only operate 
when the outdoor temperature is above the 
freezing point (0°C, 32°F).
NOTE
• The A/C system is designed for use 
with R134a refrigerant.
• Refrigerant handling requires special 
equipment and special procedures for 
charging and draining the system.
• All repairs and adjustments on the A/C 
system must be carried out by a Saab 
dealer authorized for this kind of work.
• Never mix R134a and R12 refriger-
ants.
WARNING
• The A/C system is pressurized. Do not 
break any connections or undo A/C 
system components.
• Escaping gas can cause blindness or 
other injury.

231Car care and technical information
Safety belts
Regularly check the function of the safety 
belts as follows:
• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply. 
The safety belt should lock and it should 
not be possible to withdraw it further.
Check the anchorage points in the floor. 
They must not have suffered rust damage. 
There must be no frayed threads in the web-
bing.
Safety belts must not come into contact with 
substances such as polishes, oils or other 
chemicals. If the straps are dirty, wash them 
with warm water and a detergent or have 
them replaced.
Upholstery and trim
To remove fluff or hairs from the seat uphol-
stery or headlining, use a moist, lint-free 
cloth or a special lint remover (brush or 
roller). Remove any dirty marks using a 
cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy 
water.
When using a stain remover, always work 
from the outside towards the center to avoid 
leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should 
remain, it can usually be removed using 
lukewarm soapy water or water alone.
Wet patches left by spilt soft drinks or thin oil 
must be wiped off immediately using an 
absorbent material, such as kitchen paper, 
and treated with stain remover.
Alcohol is recommended for removing 
grease or oil stains, and a semi-stiff brush 
may also be used.
Cleaning and caring for leather 
upholstery
The principal reason for treating leather 
upholstery is to maintain its elegant appear-
ance and to provide it with a protective film. 
Discoloration caused by dust and wear 
mainly affects the lighter shades, although 
this is not detrimental to the leather – 
indeed, the patina resulting from use is often 
considered desirable in leather. But if the 
leather is allowed to become too grubby, it 
can start to look shabby.
It is a good idea to clean and recondition the 
leather twice a year – in conjunction with a 
general spring-cleaning of the car – after the 
winter and in the autumn, for instance. In 
hot, dry climates, the leather will need to be 
treated more frequently.
Moisten a soft cloth in a mild soap solution. 
Carefully apply this damp (not wet) cloth to 
the leather, working in light, circular move-
ments until the leather is clean. Repeat the 
procedure using clean water and then leave 
the leather to dry thoroughly. Finally, treat 
the leather with a leather conditioner.
WARNING
If the car is involved in a collision, the 
safety belts, belt pretensioners and other 
components must be inspected by an 
authorized Saab dealer.
Never make any alterations or repairs to 
the safety belt yourself but visit an autho-
rized Saab dealer.

232 Car care and technical information
Apply the leather conditioner using a soft 
cloth and the same circular movements as 
described above. After it has dried, polish 
the leather with a soft, dry cloth. Follow the 
directions given above. Do not use hot 
water, unknown abrasive polishes, sol-
vents, sprays or soaps that might scratch 
the leather.
Textile carpeting
Vacuum clean the carpeting regularly. Car-
pets can also be cleaned using a brush, or 
carpet shampoo applied with a sponge. Do 
not use vacuum cleaners outdoors unless 
they are properly grounded.
Washing the car
The bodywork must be washed frequently. 
When the car is new, the body should be 
washed by hand using plain cold water and 
a clean, soft brush, or in a brushless car-
wash that uses mild detergent. Automatic 
car washes with brushes should be avoided 
when the car is new. Do not use automatic 
car washes for the first five or six months, 
before the paintwork has hardened prop-
erly. Thereafter, use a high quality car wash 
soap added to lukewarm water.
Do not use a pressure washer at close 
range on stone chip damage, scratches or 
other damage to the paintwork. The paint 
can otherwise start to flake.
Remove any bird droppings without delay, 
as these can discolor the paintwork and 
prove difficult to polish out.
Use a soft cloth moistened with methyl alco-
hol to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do 
not use strong cleaners, as these can dry 
out the paintwork. 
The underside of the car also needs wash-
ing regularly, and this should be done extra 
thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean the 
underside of the car by hand if the car is usu-
ally washed in an automatic car wash with-
out special facilities for underbody cleaning.
Never wash or leave the car to dry in the 
sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather 
immediately after washing to avoid smears 
and streaks.
Clean the window glass inside and out using 
a high quality window cleaner. This is partic-
ularly important when the car is new, as 
upholstery and trim have a tendency to 
sweat a little at first.
Keep the glass well cleaned, as this helps to 
prevent misting. 
NOTE
Avoid using any alcohol-based cleaners 
on the front and rear light clusters, as 
these can cause cracking of the lenses. 
NOTE
• The door mirrors must be fully 
retracted before the car enters an 
automatic car wash.
• Remove fixed antennas, e.g. for 
mobile phone, before putting car 
through an automatic car wash.
• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash. 
Wet brake discs reduce the braking 
effect.

233Car care and technical information
Waxing and polishing
Do not wax a new car during the first three 
or four months. In fact, there is no need to 
polish the car before the paintwork has 
started to go dull through oxidation. Other 
than in exceptional cases, do not use abra-
sive polishes containing a cutting agent on 
a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly 
before waxing or polishing.
Engine compartment
Clean the engine compartment using an 
engine detergent and rinse with hot water. 
Cover the headlights. If using a high-pres-
sure washer do not aim the spray nozzle on 
the:
•Radiator.
• Throttle cable.
• Throttle housing.
• Other engine controls.
• The alternator.
• Ignition system and other electrical com-
ponents.
Additional care should be taken if using a 
high-pressure washer. Hold the nozzle at 
right angles to the area to be cleaned, which 
is particularly important when spraying 
labels.
Do not use gasoline as a cleaning agent or 
solvent when carrying out repairs or mainte-
nance. Saab recommends the use of envi-
ronmentally safe degreasing agents.
Touching up the paint
Damaged paintwork should be treated as 
soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left, 
the greater the risk of corrosion. The 
anti-perforation warranty does not cover 
corrosion resulting from untreated defects.
Paintwork damage sustained in a collision is 
usually extensive and can only be properly 
restored by professionals.
However, you can repair small scratches 
and stone-chip damage yourself. The nec-
essary tools and materials, such as primer, 
touch-up paint and brushes, are available 
from your Saab dealer.
In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork, 
where the metal has not been exposed and 
an undamaged layer of paint remains, 
touch-up paint can usually be applied 
directly, after any dirt has been scraped 
away using a pointed knife.
If corrosion has already set in, e.g. as a 
result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed 
knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possi-
ble, the damaged area should be taken 
back to the bare metal. The metal should 
then be primed with two thin coats of primer 
applied by brush.
After the primer has dried, apply several thin 
layers of topcoat enamel until the surface of 
the repaired area is flush with the surround-
ing paintwork.
Stir both primer and touch-up enamel thor-
oughly before use and allow each coat to 
dry before applying the next.

234 Car care and technical information
Two-coat enamel 
As the name implies, two-coat enamel is 
applied in two operations. The first coat, the 
base color, contains the pigment, metal 
flakes and binder. The second coat consists 
of a clear enamel, which provides the final 
gloss for the paintwork and protects the 
base from moisture and environmental con-
taminants.
Touch-up stone-chip damage as follows:
1 Thoroughly clean the damaged area.
2 Apply the primer, base color and finally, 
the enamel. To achieve the best finish, 
apply two or three coats of primer.
Anticorrosion treatment
The entire car is corrosion-protected at the 
factory in different stages by an electrolytic 
immersion coating and a polyester-based 
protective coating to protect against corro-
sion caused by stones flung up by the 
wheels. A thin penetrating anti-rust oil is 
also applied in cavities and body members.
In addition to conventional anti-corrosion 
treatment like painting, underbody treat-
ment and cavity treatment, most of the body 
panel surfaces are galvanized. These 
include the hood, the doors and the under-
body.
The anti-corrosion treatment on the under-
side of the car and inside the wheel arches 
is particularly exposed to constant wear and 
possible damage, the degree of which will 
obviously depend on driving conditions.
IB1334
Surface-treatment composition 
1 Body panel 
2 Zinc (certain panel sections only) 7.5 µm 
3 Phosphate coating 
4 Cathodic ED 28 µm 
5 Intermediate coat 35 µm 
6 Metallic base 15 µm 
7 Clear enamel /solid enamel 40 µm 

235Car care and technical information
What causes rust?
Steel body panels of automobiles are sub-
ject to rusting whenever air and moisture 
manage to penetrate the protective finish, 
and body panels may rust through if the pro-
cess is unchecked. Rusting can occur wher-
ever water is trapped or where the car’s 
panels are continuously damp. Damage to 
paint and undercoating by stones, gravel 
and minor accidents immediately exposes 
metal to air and moisture. Road salts used 
for de-icing will collect on the bottom of the 
car and promote rusting. Areas of the coun-
try with high humidity have great potential 
for rust problems, especially where salt is 
used on roads or there is moist sea air. 
Industrial pollution (fallout) may also 
damage paint and promote rusting.
Preventive maintenance
The following procedures are necessary to 
help protect against rusting. Refer also to 
the terms and conditions of the Sheet Metal 
Coverage described in the warranty book-
let.
1Wash the car frequently, and wax at 
least twice a year. Under adverse con-
ditions, where there is a rapid buildup of 
dirt, sand or road salt, wash your car at 
least once a week. After extreme expo-
sure to salted snow or slush, evidenced 
by a white film on the car, wash the car 
immediately. Frequent washing will pre-
vent paint damage from acid rain and 
other airborne contaminants such as 
tree sap and bird droppings. If any of 
these contaminants are noticed on the 
car the finish should be washed immedi-
ately.
• Begin washing by rinsing the entire car 
with water to loosen and flush off heavy 
concentrations of dirt (include the 
underbody).
• Sponge the car with a solution of either 
a good quality car soap or mild general 
purpose (dish washing) detergent and 
water.
• Rinse car thoroughly with clean water.
• After washing, check and clear all 
drains in doors and body panels.
• Wipe the car dry, preferably using a 
chamois.
2Clean the underside of the car during 
the winter. Use high pressure water to 
clean the car’s underside (floor panels, 
wheel wells) at least at mid- winter and 
in the spring.
3Inspect the car frequently for leaks or 
damage, and arrange for needed 
repairs promptly. After washing or after 
heavy rain, check for leaks. When wash-
ing the car inspect body surfaces for 
paint damage. While checking for leaks, 
lift the floor mats and check beneath 
them. Water can collect in these areas 
and remain for prolonged periods. Dry 
any wet areas including the floor mats. 
Have leaks repaired as soon as possi-
ble.
Use touch-up paint to repair small 
scratches or minor finish damage. Areas 
where metal is exposed will rust quickly 
and MUST be repaired immediately by 
touch-up or professional repainting. 
Rust must be removed, the bare metal 
primed and painted. Major body 
damage should be repaired immediately 
and new panels or exposed areas 
should be undercoated with anti- corro-
sion material.
Repairs of this type are the owner’s 
responsibility and are not covered under 
warranty.

236 Car care and technical information
4Inspect the undercoating and touch 
up if necessary. Pay particular atten-
tion to the fenders and wheel housings, 
which are exposed to abrasion by flying 
gravel, etc. If the composition has worn 
or flaked off, the steel must be thor-
oughly cleaned and dried before a fresh 
coat is applied. The cleaning is best 
done with a scraper and a steel wire 
brush, followed by washing with solvent. 
Apply the new coating thinly, as other-
wise it may run off or fall off when dry.
For long trips
Before setting off on a long journey, it is 
advisable to have your car checked over by 
your Saab dealer.
Obtain a few important items to take along 
on your journey such as spare bulbs, wiper 
blades, fuses, a Poly-V-belt and the like. 
You can check some points yourself before-
hand:
• Make sure that the engine is in good con-
dition.
• Check that no oil or gasoline leaks out of 
the engine or gearbox/transmission.
• Check the coolant and power steering 
fluid levels. Check also for leaks.
• Inspect the Poly-V-belt and replace it if it 
shows any signs of hard wear.
• Check the battery charge.
• Check the tires for tread pattern and air 
pressure, including the compact spare 
wheel.
• Check the brakes.
• Check all bulbs.
• Check for the presence of the tool kit and 
the jack in the car.
Recovery and/or 
recycling of automotive 
materials
A typical car consists of metals (65–75%), 
plastics (10–14%), rubber (5%) and small 
quantities of glass, wood, paper and tex-
tiles.
Some of these materials can be recycled, 
while others can be recovered in chemical 
processes for reuse in new products or as a 
source of energy.
While the Saab 9-5 was still at the draw-
ing-board stage, Saab engineers were 
giving serious consideration to how the 
maximum quantity of materials could be 
reclaimed from the car on its eventual 
scrapping. To facilitate sorting, plastic parts, 
for instance, have been marked to identify 
the precise nature of the plastic.
Approximately 90% of the materials in the 
car can be recycled or recovered, where 
facilities exist.
Before the car is scrapped, all the oils and 
other fluids that could pollute the environ-
ment should be recovered from the car. It 
may be of interest in this context to learn that 
the refrigerant used in the Saab 9-5’s ACC 
systems (R134a) contains neither CFCs nor 
any other chlorine compounds.

237Car care and technical information
1 A-pillar trim: PP, PP/EPDM 
2 Windshield trim: PP, PP/EPDM 
3 Seals: EPDM 
4 C-pillar trim: PP 
5 Rear light cluster: PMMA 
6 Corner infill panel: PPO/PA 
7 Rear bumper, cellular core: expanded PP; 
sheathing: PP/EPDM 
8 Side-window casing: PP/EPDM 
9 Fuel tank: PE 
10 Side trim: PVC 
11 A-pillar upholstery trim: PC/ABS, textile 
12 Rearview mirror: ABS 
13 Sill scuff plate: PP/EPDM 
14 Wheel-arch liner: PP 
15 Wheel cover: PA 
16 Direction-indicator lamp lens: PMMA 
17 Washer-fluid reservoir: PE 
18 Front spoiler: PP/EPDM 
19 Front bumper, cellular core: expanded PP; 
sheathing: PP/EPDM 
20 Fan shroud: PP 
21 Radiator grille: ABS 
22 Scuttle panel finisher: PC/ASA 
IB526
ABS Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene 
ASA Acrylonitrile-styrene (acrylic 
plastic) 
EPDM Ethylene-propylene rubber 
PA Polyamide (plastic) 
PC Polycarbonate (plastic) 
PE Polyethylene 
PMMA Polymethyl methacrylate 
POM Acetal plastic 
PPO  Polyphenylene oxide (plastic) 
PP Polypropylene 
PUR Polyurethane 
PVC Polyvinyl chloride 
1
2
34
5
6
7
9
8
10
11
12
13141516
19
18
20
21
17
22

238 Car care and technical information
Headlight aiming
The vehicle is equipped with vertical and 
horizontal aim indicators. The aim has been 
preset at the factory and should normally 
not need further adjustments. This is true 
even though your vertical and horizontal 
aim indicators may not fall exactly on the "0" 
(zero) marks on their scales.
If your headlights are damaged in an acci-
dent, the headlight aim may be affected. If 
you believe your headlights need to be 
re-aimed, we recommend that you take it to 
your Saab dealer for service, however, it is 
possible for you to re-aim your headlights as 
described in the following procedure.
To check the aim, the vehicle should be 
properly prepared as follows:
• Place the vehicle on a level pad or sur-
face.
• The vehicle should be unladen and fuel 
tank full, and one person or 160 lbs. 
(75 kg) on the drivers seat.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice 
or mud attached to it.
• Tires should be inflated to the prescribed 
pressure.
• Rock the vehicle to stabilize the suspen-
sion.
WARNING
Before checking/adjusting the headlight 
aiming, switch off the engine to avoid 
danger of fingers and hands being injured 
by moving parts.
The radiator fan can start up even when 
the engine is switched off.
NOTE
To make sure that your headlights are 
aimed properly read all instructions 
before beginning. Failure to follow these 
instructions could cause damage to 
headlight parts or a not correctly aimed 
headlight.
IB1168
A B
Vertical adjustment
A  Vertical aiming device
B  Vertical aim level
IB1167
12
Horizontal adjustment
1 Horizontal aim
2 Horizontal aiming device

239Car care and technical information
Open the hood and locate the vertical aim 
level (B) that you can see through the top of 
the headlight lens.
If you find that the headlight needs adjust-
ment follow these steps:
1 Locate the vertical aiming device (A).
2 Turn the vertical aiming screw with a 
0.24 in. (6 mm) Hexagonal Allen socket 
until the bubble inside the level is cen-
tered between the two red lines (zero).
3 Check the horizontal aim (1) and adjust 
as necessary with a 0.24 in. (6 mm) 
Hexagonal Allen socket. Turn the hori-
zontal aiming device (2) until the arrow 
aligns with the zero (0) mark.
4 Recheck the vertical aim to make sure it 
is still correct after the horizontal aim 
adjustment. Readjust as necessary.

240 Car care and technical information
(This page has been left blank)

241Maintenance and owner assistance
Maintenance and 
owner assistance
Maintenance schedule.....    242 
Owner assistance ............    243 
Reporting Safety Defects 
(U.S.A.) ............................   244 
Reporting Safety Defects 
to the Canadian 
government ....................   244 
Saab Original Service 
Program M2001 USA, 
Canada, 9-5 Models) ......    245 
IB1131

242 Maintenance and owner assistance
Maintenance schedule
The Maintenance Schedule prescribes a 
service program to the purchaser/operator 
of a Saab that is reasonable and necessary 
to ensure the proper emission control sys-
tems function, safety and reliability of the 
Saab automobile in normal use. Additional 
maintenance is recommended for specific 
components when the car is operated under 
certain severe conditions. Proper mainte-
nance is always good advice!
Authorized Saab dealers are equipped and 
trained to meet your Saab’s service needs. 
They regularly receive up-to-date Saab ser-
vice manuals and parts and technical ser-
vice bulletins from Saab and are able, 
through their franchise agreement, to attend 
Saab service schools, obtain Saab special 
tools and technical assistance and pur-
chase original equipment service and 
replacement parts.
Today’s complex automobiles should only 
be entrusted to the most knowledgeable 
service professionals. A Saab dealer is your 
best choice.
Service intervals
The maintenance schedule is comprised of 
a Check -up 30 days after retail delivery, fol-
lowed by services at every 10,000 miles 
(16,000 km) thereafter (10,000, 20,000, 
30,000 miles/16,000 32,000, 48,000 km 
etc.)
.
Engine oil and filter changes
Changing the engine oil and filter is required 
at every service point. Use only a Saab 
approved long-life oil filter and engine oils 
meeting the SAE viscosity ratings and API 
service classifications stated in the Specifi-
cation section of this Owner’s Manual. The 
use of extra additives in the oil is not neces-
sary and is not recommended, and may be 
harmful to turbochargers.
More frequent oil changes are recom-
mended if your vehicle is operated under 
the following conditions:
• Extensive idling
• Stop-and-go driving
• Driving in cold climates over repeated 
short trips without sufficient engine 
warm-up, see page 194.
If your driving habits match this description, 
have the engine oil and filter changed in- 
between normal services at 5,000 mile 
(8,000 km) intervals. The Warranties and 
Service Record Booklet has provisions to 
record extra oil changes.
NOTE
The Check-up will be done by your Saab 
dealer at no charge and should be done 
as close as possible to the scheduled 30 
days.

243Maintenance and owner assistance
Service record retention
Service instruction coupons and record 
stubs are provided in the Saab Warranties 
and Service Record Booklet which accom-
panies this Owner’s Manual. The coupons 
are arranged in the order that normal ser-
vice should be performed. The edge of each 
coupon is shaded to correspond to the type 
of service point:
• Striped - "Check Up"
• Blue - Oil change/inspection service
• Black - Major service
Note that in Canada a combined service 
and warranty book is used, but not service 
coupons.
When scheduled services are performed, 
your dealer will tear out the applicable 
coupon and use it to check off the opera-
tions performed and enter it into the service 
file at the dealership. The servicing dealer’s 
stamp, along with the date and mileage at 
which the service was done, should be 
entered on the corresponding stub which 
remains in your booklet. The booklet is your 
permanent record of the services per-
formed. It also includes a log sheet for 
unscheduled repairs.
It is advisable to retain receipts and, if pos-
sible, copies of shop work orders for all ser-
vice and repair work, wherever performed.
Service costs
Dealer pricing practices and labor for ser-
vice work vary. Saab’s recommended ser-
vice times for each service point do not 
include the labor required to replace wear 
items, such as wiper blades, brake pads or 
tires. Nor is labor to perform other service or 
repairs found to be necessary as a result of 
the inspections included in these times. 
Additional labor and parts will be charged 
for such work when necessary, except as 
covered under an applicable Saab warranty 
or any optional extended service contract. 
Transmission fluid changes or suspension 
alignment, when necessary, are also addi-
tional.
Dealer charges for general shop material, 
regulated hazardous waste removal, recy-
cling expenses or other operation costs may 
also be applied to service and repair 
invoices and are apt to vary by dealer and 
locality.
Owner assistance
Warranties and service problem 
assistance
For complete information about all applica-
ble warranties, including the New Car War-
ranty, Perforation Warranty, Vehicle Emis-
sion Warranty and Emission Perforation 
Warranty, consult the Warranties and Ser-
vice Record Booklet which accompanies 
this Owner’s Manual. It also contains owner 
assistance information including Saab 
Roadside Assistance. If the booklet is lost or 
misplaced, a new one may be ordered 
through a Saab dealer or by contacting 
Saab.
In the U.S. there is a national Customer 
Assistance Center at Saab Cars USA, Inc. 
The toll-free number to call from all 50 states 
is 1-800-955-9007.
In Canada, please call the Saab Customer 
Assistance Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A list of authorized Saab sales and service 
dealers is available for those planning to 
travel in the United States and Canada.
Canadian or U.S. travelers may call the 
Customer Assistance Center in the country 
in which they are traveling.

244 Maintenance and owner assistance
Change of Address Notification 
(U.S. and Canada)
Two change of address cards are provided 
at the end of the Warranties and Service 
Record Booklet. Knowing your current 
address allows Saab to contact you in the 
event of a recall or service campaign. 
Please help us keep our records up to date 
for your own peace of mind.
Service information
Factory Service Manuals for the Saab 9-5 
car line can be ordered through the dealer. 
These are comprehensive manuals on CD 
rom, geared to use by professional techni-
cians.
Consult your Saab dealer for prices and for 
a listing for your model
Reporting Safety 
Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect 
which could cause a crash or could cause 
injury or death, you should immediately 
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety 
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying Saab Cars USA, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it 
may open an investigation, and if it finds that 
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, 
it may order a recall and remedy campaign. 
However, NHTSA cannot become involved 
in individual problems between you, your 
dealer, or Saab Cars USA, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the 
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424- 
9393 (or 202/366-0123 in Washington D.C. 
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department 
of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. 
You can also obtain other information about 
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Reporting Safety 
Defects to the Canadian 
government
If you live in Canada, and believe that your 
vehicle has a safety defect, you should 
immediately notify Transport Canada, in 
addition to notifying General Motors of 
Canada Limited.
You may write to Transport Canada at Box 
8880, Ottawa, Ontario, K1G 3J2.
In addition to notifying Transport Canada in 
a situation like this, we certainly hope you 
will notify us. In Canada, please call our 
Saab Customer Assistance Centre at 
1-800-263- 1999.
Or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Assistance Centre,
1908 Colonel Sam Drive,
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7.

245Maintenance and owner assistance
Saab Original Service Program M2001 USA, Canada, 9-5 Models)
* These are the minimum required Emission Control System maintenance steps. Saab urges that all recommended maintenance procedures be performed 
according to this program.
(a.) Engine oil and filter should be changed at least once a year. Intermediate oil and filter changes (halfway between indicated intervals) suggested for 
cars primarily used for driving in dense city traffic or for repeated short trip operation without sufficient warm up.
*** Camshaft drive belt replacements (V6) prior to 100,000 miles will be performed at no charge by an authorized U.S. or Canadian Saab dealer.
** Service intervals: Refer to the Warranties & Service Record Book for service intervals beyond 100,000 miles (160,000 km).
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
30 day
10,000
(16,000 km)
20,000
(32,000 km)
30,000
(48,000 km)
40,000
(64,000 km)
50,000
(80,000 km)
60,000
(96,000 km)
70,000
(112,000 km)
80,000
(128,000 km)
90,000
(144,000 km)
100,000
(160,000 km)
Service # 1234567891011
Engine and engine compartment
E Engine oil and filter (a.) !!!!!!!!!!!
R Engine coolant freezing point and level """ "" "" "
R Engine coolant flush and replace (max. 3-year intervals) !!!
R Engine coolant system, hoses and cap " """""""""
R Drive belt, condition """"" ! """"
R Camshaft drive belt (V6) *** !
E Spark plugs !*!*!*
Application/type of service (col. 1) Service Procedure
E = emission service "= Check - top up, adjust or replace if necessary
R = regular maintenance != Replace
#= Lubricate

246 Maintenance and owner assistance
* These are the minimum required Emission Control System maintenance steps. Saab urges that all recommended maintenance procedures be performed 
according to this program.
(b.) Change automatic transmission fluid at more frequent intervals (20,000; 50,000; 80,000 miles, etc.) if car is driven in dense city traffic where the outside 
temperature regularly reach 90°F or higher, or if car is used in a mountainous/high altitude area or for trailer towing.
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
30 day
10,000
(16,000 km)
20,000
(32,000 km)
30,000
(48,000 km)
40,000
(64,000 km)
50,000
(80,000 km)
60,000
(96,000 km)
70,000
(112,000 km)
80,000
(128,000 km)
90,000
(144,000 km)
100,000
(160,000 km)
Service # 1234567891011
Engine and engine compartment (cont.)
E Evaporative emission system including filler cap, vapor 
lines, EVAP canister and canister purge valve
"
R Fuel system: leaks and damage """"""""""
E Fuel filter !
E Engine air cleaner element !*!*!*
R Exhaust system and mountings; leaks and condition """"""""""
Electrical
R Battery: state of charge and electrolyte level; clean termi-
nals if necessary
"""""""""""
R Head, fog, brake, tail, turn signal, warning lights instru-
ment panel, backup and marker lamps
"""""""""""
Transmission
R Automatic transmission fluid change (b.) !!!
R Automatic transmission oil level """""""""""
R Manual transmission oil level """
R Outer and inner driver joint boots """"""""""

247Maintenance and owner assistance
(c.) Check wheel alignment if irregular or premature tire wear is apparent.
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
30 day
10,000
(16,000 km)
20,000
(32,000 km)
30,000
(48,000 km)
40,000
(64,000 km)
50,000
(80,000 km)
60,000
(96,000 km)
70,000
(112,000 km)
80,000
(128,000 km)
90,000
(144,000 km)
100,000
(160,000 km)
Service # 1234567891011
Chassis
R Ball joint clearance, outer and inner steering joints and 
rubber boots
""""""""""
R Shock absorbers and bushes; tightness and condition """
R Tire pressure, tread depth and wear (c.) """""""""""
R Rotate tires, front to rear """"""""""
R Brake pads and discs; wear and condition """"""""""
R Brake lines and hoses """""""""""
R Brake fluid level and renewal (max. 2-year intervals) """ ! "" ! "" ! "
R Check handbrake function """""""""""
R Power steering fluid level """""""""""

248 Maintenance and owner assistance
Service Intervals **
Miles = U.S. Cars
Kilometers = Canadian Cars
30 day
10,000
(16,000 km)
20,000
(32,000 km)
30,000
(48,000 km)
40,000
(64,000 km)
50,000
(80,000 km)
60,000
(96,000 km)
70,000
(112,000 km)
80,000
(128,000 km)
90,000
(144,000 km)
100,000
(160,000 km)
Service # 1234567891011
Chassis (cont.)
RToe-in """
R Cabin air filter !!!
R Cabin air absorptive filter !
R Door hinges, stops and locks ###
R Airbag system, SRS warning lamps, visual inspection """""""""""
R Safety belts; operation and visual inspection of belt for 
tears and fraying
"""""""""""
RWipers """""""""""
R Washer system: check and top-up """""""""""
R Reset service indicator """"""""""
Customer programming
R Carry out systems programming per customer request "
Road test
R Check performance of drive train, steering and brakes 
and verify tire balance. 
Check function of instruments and controls, including 
horn, windshield wipers, cruise control and climate sys-
tem.
Note any noises or problems for correction.
"""""""""""

249Specifications
Specifications 
General..............................   250 
Engine...............................   252 
Fuel....................................   252 
Engine oil..........................    253 
Engine variants ................    254 
Electrical system..............    254 
Drive belts.........................    255 
Manual gearbox................    255 
Automatic transmission..    256 
Suspension.......................   256 
Steering.............................   256 
Brake system....................    257 
Wheels and tires ..............    257 
Plates and labels..............    259 
IB603

250 Specifications
General 
Overall length, including bumpers:  
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 189.2 in (4805 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 189.3 in (4808 mm)
Overall width, including door mirrors ____ 80.4 in (2042 mm) 
Maximum height:  
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 57.0 in (1449 mm)
9-5 Wagon ______________________ 58.9 in (1497 mm)
Wheelbase  _______________________ 106.4 in (2703 mm) 
Ground clearance __________________ approx. 6.6 in 
(167 mm)
Track:
Front  __________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *) 
Rear  ___________________________ 59.9 in (1522 mm) *) 
Turning circle (curb to curb) ___________ 35.4 ft (10.8 m) 
Turning circle (measured at vehicle extrem-
ities) ___________________________ 37.4 ft (11.4 m) 
Number of seats (incl. driver)  _________ 5
*)
 Specified track applies to wheel sizes: 
6 x 15 & 6.5 x 16 
Gross vehicle weight 
(GVW) 
Maximum train 
weight 
(GVW + max. trailer 
weight) 
Maximum axle load, 
front 
Maximum axle load, 
rear 
Permissible load (in addition to driver) = GVW minus curb weight 
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded. 
The maximum permissible axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded. 
Chassis number in engine bay 
Weight ready for driving (i.e. with full fuel 
tank, washer-fluid reservoir, standard 
tools and spare wheel) ______________  3470–3820 lbs. 
(1575–1735 kg) 
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) ___________ 4480–4750 lbs. 
(2030–2155 kg) 
Maximum axle load:
Front  ___________________________ 2500 lbs. (1135 kg) 
Rear, 9-5 Sedan___________________ 2310 lbs. (1050 kg) 
Rear, 9-5 Wagon __________________ 2480 lbs. (1125 kg)
Weight distribution: 
Curb weight, front/rear ______________ 60/40% 
GVW, front/rear  ___________________ 50/50% 
Maximum roof load  __________________ 220 lbs (100 kg) 
IB541

251Specifications
Trailer:
Luggage compartment 
Volume (SAE):  
9-5 Sedan_______________________ 15.9 cu.ft. 
(450 litres)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat upright ________ 31.4 cu. ft.
(890 litres)
9-5 Wagon, rear seat folded _________ 73.0 cu. ft.
(2067 litres)
Maximum permissible luggage-compart-
ment load: 
At curb weight + 4 passengers at 154 lbs. 
(70 kg)  _________________________ 176 lbs (80 kg) 
or each passenger fewer in the rear seat, the load may be 
increased by 110 lbs (50 kg).
With entire rear seat lowered ________ 594 lbs (270 kg)
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Sedan:
Rear seat upright _________________ 43.0 in (1092 mm)
Rear seat folded down _____________ 67.5 in (1714 mm) 
Luggage compartment, length, 9-5 Wagon:
Rear seat upright _________________ 42.8 in (1087 mm)
Rear seat folded __________________ 61.2 in (1732 mm)
WARNING
The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded. Note 
that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are fitted, the 
available load capacity is reduced by the weight of these.
When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure that 
it is tied down securely, particularly when part or all of the rear seat 
is folded down.
Maximum towing speed, trailer with brakes  60 mph (100 km/h) 
Trailer with brakes  _________________ Maximum weight: 
3500 lbs (1588 kg) 
Trailer without brakes  ______________ Maximum weight: 
1000 lbs (450 kg) 
Maximum load on ball hitch __________ 165 lbs (75 kg) 
The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by 
Saab Automobile AB.
Note that local restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and 
weights (see page  174). 

252 Specifications
Engine     Fuel
4-cylinder  ________________________ Four cylinders, twin 
overhead cam-
shafts, 16 valves 
and two balancer 
shafts. 
3.0t V6 ___________________________ V-6 engine, double 
overhead cam-
shafts on each cyl-
inder bank, 
24 valves 
Cylinder bores ___________________ 3.54 in (90 mm) 
Stroke:
4-cylinder engine  _________________ 3.54 in (90 mm) 
3.0t V6 _________________________ 3.34 in (85 mm) 
Swept volume:
4-cylinder engine  _________________ 139.7 cu.in
(2.290 litres)
3.0t V6 _________________________ 180.6 cu.in
(2.962 litres)
Idling speed:
4-cylinder _______________________ 825 rpm 
3.0t V6  _________________________ 700 rpm 
Antifreeze ________________________ Saab-approved 
antifreeze 
Coolant capacity:
4-cylinder _______________________ 7.6 qts (7.4 litres) 
3.0t V6 _________________________ 7.4 qts (7.2 litres) 
Fuel grade  ________________________ Unleaded gasoline
AON 87–93. 
For optimum performance Saab recom-
mend the following fuel grades:
2.3t_____________________________ AON 90
2.3 Turbo Aero and 3.0t V6 __________ AON 93 *)
*) If AON 90 is used and the ambient temperature is above 
77 – 86°F (25– 30°C) some decrease in engine power can occur 
to some extent.
Fuel-tank capacity  __________________ 18.5 gal. (70 litres) 

253Specifications
Engine oil
Oil specification
: 
We recommend the use of oils that are available from your Saab 
dealer, for the regular oil changes.
These oils fulfill the most stringent requirements set by API and 
ACEA classifications.
Oil for gasoline engines is classified by the API standards 
(American Petroleum Institute) into the grade classes SH (since 
1993) and SJ (since 1996). The SJ class fulfils more stringent 
requirements and has a lower phosphorous level.
These grade classes are most often combined with the corre-
sponding classes for diesel engines. The class designations for 
diesel engines begin with the letter ”C” (Commercial). For exam-
ple a grade combination suitable for both types of engine could 
be API SH/CD or SJ/CF.
Under ACEA nomenclature, oils are divided into Class A for gas-
oline engines and Class B for diesel-engined passenger cars. 
There is a further class for heavy diesel engines. Each class is 
divided into three grades: 1, 2 and 3, where grades 2 and 3 nor-
mally encompass semi and fully-synthetic oils. The diesel class 
B also has a fourth grade, B4, which encompasses tests and 
regulations aimed at improving the performance of direct injec-
tion engines.
In the same way as in the API system, gasoline and diesel 
engine specifications are combined for products that can be 
used in both types of engine. For example, a grade designation 
could be ACEA A2/B2 or ACEA A3/B3/B4.
To afford Saab engines the best protection, with regard to lubri-
cation, the ability to dissolve residues and the neutralization of 
combustion products, we recommend the following oil grades:
• API SH/CD/CF or SJ/CD/CF.
• ACEA A3/B3/B4.
These oils contain the additives required for the engine to 
function well. We advise against the use of further addi-
tives.
Viscosity
: 
The viscosity of oil is classified according to the SAE standard. 
Nowadays, multigrade oils are always used in cars. The proper-
ties of these oils facilitate starting the car in cold weather but 
mean that the oil is also viscous enough to coat all moving parts 
under high pressures and with high outside air temperatures.
Multigrade oils are graded with two viscosities, e.g. 10W-30, 
where the 10W meets certain viscosity requirements at -4°F 
(-20°C), while the 30 fulfills requirements at a temperature of 
212°F (100°C).
Basic recommendations for Saab engines:
•SAE 5W-30 or 5W-40.
The oil should be semi or fully synthetic and fulfil the grade 
requirements for ACEA A3/B3 or API SJ.
Oils which are less viscous, such as 0W/-40/50 are becoming 
more common and may be used. However, the oil must be 
fully-synthetic, of a well known brand, and fulfil ACEA grade 
requirements A3/B3.
This viscosity makes starting in cold weather easier.
Oil capacity incl. filter (on changing): 
4-cylinder ________________________ 4.1 qts (4.0 litres) 
3.0t V6 __________________________ 4.6 qts (4.5 litres) 

254 Specifications
Engine variants  Electrical system
2.3t Ecopower 
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________   185 hp (136 kW) 
Maximum torque, EEC at 1800 rpm ___   207.2 ft.lb 
(280 Nm) 
Compression ratio  ________________ 9.3:1 
2.3 Turbo Ecopower (”Aero” model engine), 
manual transmission
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 230 hp (169 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm 259.0 ft.lb. 
(350 Nm)
Compression ratio ________________ 9.3:1
2.3 Turbo Ecopower, (”Aero” model engine)
automatic transmission
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________ 230 hp (169 kW)
Maximum torque, EEC at 1900 rpm 244.2 ft.lb. 
(330 Nm)
Compression ratio ________________ 9.3:1
3.0t V6 Ecopower 
Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ___________   200 hp (147 kW) 
Maximum torque, EEC at 2500 rpm ___   229.4 ft.lb 
(310 Nm) 
Compression ratio  ________________ 9.5:1 
Voltage ___________________________ 12 V 
Battery capacity  ____________________ 60 Ah or 70 Ah 
Starter motor  ______________________ 1.4 kW 
Alternator rating  ____________________ 130 A/14 V 
Firing order:
4-cylinder ________________________ 1-3-4-2
3.0t V6 __________________________ 1-2-3-4-5-6
Spark plugs:
2.3t ____________________________ NGK
BCPR 6ES-11 
Electrode gap_____________________ 0.0414 in (1.05 mm)
2.3 Turbo Aero ____________________ NGK
PFR 6H-10
Electrode gap_____________________ 0.0374 in (0.95 mm)
3.0t V6 __________________________ NGK
BKR 7ES-11 
Electrode gap  ____________________ 0.0414 in (1.05 mm)

255Specifications
Drive belts Manual gearbox
Engine variants Outside length
4-cylinder, poly-V-belt  _______________ 102.84 in 
(2612 mm) 
3.0t V6, poly-V-belt  _________________ 79.53 in 
(2020 mm) 
Drive belt, 4-cylinder  Drive belt, 3.0t V6 
IB542
IB543
Type _____________________________ All-synchromesh 
5-speed with final 
drive and differen-
tial 
Oil _______________________________ Saab synthetic 
manual gearbox oil
Oil capacity ________________________ 1.9 qts (1.8 litres) 
Oil volume (on changing)  _____________ 1.6 qts (1.5 litres) 
Clutch type  ________________________ Hydraulic, single 
dry-plate clutch of 
diaphragm-spring 
type 
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 5th gear:
4-cylinder ________________________ 27–28 / 43–44

256 Specifications
Automatic transmission Suspension
Steering
Type ____________________________ Electronically con-
trolled 4-speed, 
fully automatic with 
hydraulic torque 
converter, planetary 
gear set and inte-
gral final drive 
Lock-up function in 
selector positions 3 
and 4 
Selector-lever positions ______________ P R N D 3 2 1 
Transmission-fluid capacity, dry transmis-
sion (incl. torque converter and oil cooler)  7.5 qts (7 litres)
If fluid change required, approximately 
3.5 litres can be drained through the drain 
plug in the transmission casing 
Transmission fluid  __________________ Texaco Texamatic 
Dexron III (mineral 
oil based)
Clutch type  _______________________ Hydraulic plate 
clutches, brake 
bands and one-way 
couplings 
Speed (mph / km/h) at 1000 rpm in 4th gear:
4- cylinder engines and 3.0t V6  ______ 29 / 46–47
Spring type, front and rear  ____________ Coil springs 
Maximum deflection of springs: 
Front  ___________________________ 7.09 in (180 mm) 
Rear  ___________________________ 7.87 in (200 mm) 
Dampers, front and rear  ______________ Gas-filled dampers 
Steering __________________________ Power-assisted 
steering of 
rack-and-pinion 
type; telescopic 
steering-column 
shaft with universal 
joints 
Number of turns, lock to lock ___________ 2,9
Power-steering fluid  _________________ Power-steering 
fluid CHF 11S 

257Specifications
Brake system Wheels and tires
Footbrake (ABS)  ___________________ Hydraulic disc 
brakes with vacuum 
servo unit. Diago-
nally split circuits; 
ventilated discs on 
front wheels. EBD 
function, see page  
167.
Handbrake  _______________________ Acts on rear wheels
Brake fluid  ________________________ DOT 4 
Brake-fluid capacity _________________ 0.925 qts (900 ml)
Disc diameter: 
Front  __________________________ 11.34 in (288 mm)
Front, 2.3 Turbo Aero ______________ 12.05 in (306 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 11.26 in (286 mm)
Total friction area of brake pads: 
Front __________________________ 36.3 in2 (234 cm2)
Rear ___________________________ 15.5 in2 (100 cm2)
Wheel size  ________________________ 6.5 x 16 or 7 x 17
2.3 Turbo Aero______________________ Use 6.5 x 16 or 
7 x 17 only
Contact an authorized Saab dealer if you 
wish to fit other wheels than those fitted 
as standard.
Tire size (summer tires):
6.5 x 16 wheels  ___________________ 215/55 R16
7 x 17 wheels _____________________ 225/45 R17
Tire size (winter tires):
6 x 15 wheels (not 2.3 Turbo Aero)_____ 195/65 R15 M+S
6.5 x 16 wheels ___________________ 205/55 R16 M+S
Recommended wheels for snow chains_ 6 x 15 (not 9-5 2.3 
Turbo Aero) or 
6.5 x 16
Compact spare:
Wheel___________________________ 4 x 16
Tire_____________________________ T115/70 R16
Pressure_________________________ 60 psi (420 kPa)
Maximum life _____________________ 2,200 miles 
(3500 km) 
Maximum speed  __________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)

258 Specifications
NOTE
Snow chains:
Snow chains must not be fitted to the rear wheels, and may only 
be used with the following wheel-tire combinations:
Wheels Tires
6.5 x 15________195/65 R15 M+S (not 2.3 Turbo Aero)
205/65 R15 (not 2.3 Turbo Aero)
6.5 x 16________205/55 R16 M+S or
215/55 R16
Snow chains must not be fitted to 17" wheels.
Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph 
(50 km/h).
Contact an authorized Saab dealer for advice on snow chains.
NOTE
Wheels larger than 17” must not be fitted.
The wheel offset must not exceed 49 mm.
Vehicles with 12.05 in (306 mm) front brake discs must not use 
15” rims.
Front-wheel alignment: toe-in, measured 
between rims: 
Front __________________________ 0.0585±0.0195 in 
(1.5±0.5 mm)
Rear ___________________________ 0.0866±0.0585 in 
(2.2±1.5 mm)

259Specifications
Plates and labels   
When consulting your Saab dealer, it may be 
necessary to quote the car’s V.I.N., engine 
and gearbox numbers. 
1 Modification identity plate.
2 V.I.N. number, inside windshield.
3 Certification label.
4 Gearbox number.
5 Engine number.
6 Tire pressures and color codes 
(body & trim), label.
7 Chassis number plate.
8 Chassis number, stamped on body.
9 Vehicle Emission Control Information.
10 Spark ignition system information 
(Canada only).
4728473
CANADAUS
IB1551

260 Specifications
1 Region ___________ Y =  Northern Europe
2 Country __________ S =  Sweden
3 Manufacturer _____ 3 =  Saab Automobile AB
4 Product line  ______ E =  9-5
5 Model series  ______ D =  9-5 with driver’s and 
passenger-side airbags
F =  9-5 SE with driver’s and 
passenger-side airbags
H = 9-5 Aero with driver’s and 
passenger-side airbags
6 Body version  _____ 4 = 
5 = 4-door
5-door
7 Gearbox __________ 5 =  Manual 5-speed
8 =  Automatic 4-speed
8 Engine variant  _____ E = 
G =
Z =
2.3t
2.3 Turbo
3.0t V6
9 Check digit  ________ 0-9/X 
10 Model year  ________ 1 =  2001
11 Factory ___________ 3 =  Trollhättan
12 Serial number ______ 000001-999999
position:1234567891011 12
||||||||||| |
V.I.N.: YS3EF48E613045842
| | ||||
1 23456= identification codes for certain chassis details
IB541

261Specifications
Several of the systems in your Saab 
car can be adjusted to better fit your 
individual needs
Some functions are governed by legal 
requirements and cannot therefore be 
reprogrammed.
Consult an authorized Saab dealer for fur-
ther information.
Car alarm/central locking system:
• The sound level of the siren when locking/ 
unlocking, HIGH or LOW.
• The number of blinks when locking/ 
unlocking, 1 to 7.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when the 
car is driven, 1 to 8 mph (2-14 km/h), YES 
or NO.
• Preclude the unlocking of the trunk while 
the car is driven, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of the trunk after 
1 second-4 minutes if it has not been 
opened, YES or NO.
• Automatic locking of the trunk when it is 
closed, YES or NO.
Saab Information Display:
• Outdoor temperature display can be 
adjusted.
Miscellaneous:
• Select the on-time for heated rear seat.
• Coolant temperature gauge adjustment 
can be increased/decreased.
• Fuel level gauge adjustment can be 
increased/decreased.
• Additional sweep of the wipers after wind-
shield washer function (ON or OFF).
• Follow me home on-time can vary from 20 
to 50 seconds.
• Night panel illumination deactivation 
speed for the speedometer can be 
adjusted.
Following adjustments can be done 
by the driver:
Automatic Climate Control (ACC):
To alter the preprogrammed ”AUTO” start 
up mode with your own preferences you can 
manually select the desired settings for:
• Temperature.
• Fan speed.
•Air distribution.
See ”Programming I” on page  76 and ”Pro-
gramming II” on page  77.
Saab 9-5 Audio System (see page  97):
• Maximum starting volume (when the 
radio is switched on).
• Telephone volume (if the car is equipped 
with a phone connected to the audio sys-
tem).
• Speed dependent volume (volume 
increases or decreases with vehicle 
speed).
• Loudness.
Alarm system:
The glass breakage sensor can be tempo-
rarily disabled, see page  42.
Daytime Running Lights:
To disable, turn off the ignition and pull out 
fuse 35, see page  217.

262 Specifications
(This page has been left blank)

263Index
Index
A
A/C system, fault diagnosis _______230
A/C system, maintenance _________230
ABS brakes ____________________167
ACC __________________________70
ACC functions ___________________73
ACC, automatic climate control _____70
ACC, calibration _________________78
ACC, condensation _______________79
ACC, programming _______________76
ACC, useful tips _________________78
Adjusting the steering wheel _______124
Adjustment, seats _______________120
Afterheater, V6-engine cars ________80
Air conditioning (A/C), fault diagnosis 
and maintenance ______________230
Air distribution, ACC ______________75
Airbag _________________________26
Alarm _________________________41
Alarm functions __________________44
Alarm signals _______________ 41, 44
Alternator _____________________202
Alternator drive belt _________ 202, 255
Alternator rating ________________254
Anticorrosion treatment ___________234
Antidazzle rear-view mirror ________126
Ashtrays ______________________130
Audio System ___________________81
Audio System, quick guide _________83
Autochecking of lights on starting ____54
Automatic climate control (ACC) _____70
Automatic transmission, 
technical data _________________256
B
Battery ________________________199
Battery charging/replacing ________201
Battery, boost starting ____________183
Belt guide ______________________12
Boost starting using jump leads ____183
Booster cushion _________________24
Brake and clutch fluid ____________198
Brake-fluid reservoir _____________198
Brakes, technical data ____________257
Bulbs, changing ________________205
Bulbs, table of __________________214
C
CD changer _____________________93
CD player ______________________91
CHECK messages _______________61
CHECKING _____________________61
Calibration, ACC _________________78
Cancelling the programmed settings _76
Car alarm ______________________41
Car care ______________________187
Car phone, installation ___________103
Cargo net, 9-5 Wagon ____________141
Carpeting, care of _______________232
Cassette player _________________ 88
Catalytic converter, 
important considerations ________ 152
Central locking __________________ 34
Change language in SID __________ 62
Change of address notification ____ 244
Changing a wheel ______________ 226
Changing bulbs ________________ 205
Changing the coolant ___________ 197
Changing the wheels round _______ 222
Changing wiper blades __________ 203
Chassis number _______________ 259
Chassis number, key to __________ 260
Child safety ____________________ 19
Child safety locks, rear doors ______ 37
Child seat, integral _______________ 24
Cleaning, engine bay ____________ 233
Clock ______________________ 61, 62
Colour code, body ______________ 259
Colour code, trim _______________ 259
Compact spare wheel ___________ 225
Condensation, ACC ______________ 79
Coolant ______________________ 196
Coolant, changing ______________ 197
Courtesy Headlight Feature _______ 64
Cruise control _________________ 166
Cup holder ____________________ 133
D
DICE/TWICE __________________ 216
Dampers _____________________ 256

264 Index
Date code, tires _________________224
Dim-dipped beam ________________63
Direction indicators _______________65
Door handles ___________________34
Door mirrors ___________________125
Doors, locks & luggage compartment _33
Drive belt ______________________255
Drive belt, alternator _____________202
Drive belts _____________________255
Drive belts, length _______________255
Driver’s seat, programmable _______122
Driving in hot weather ____________173
Driving with a load ______________179
E
Electric heating seat _____________123
Electric heating, front seats _______123
Electric windows ________________127
Electrical system, technical data ____254
Electrically heated rear seat _______123
Electronic starting interlock _________35
Emergency operation of sunroof ____129
Emission control systems _________191
Engine bay, 3.0t V6 _____________190
Engine bay, 4-cyl _______________189
Engine bay, cleaning ____________233
Engine number _________________259
Engine oil, grade ________________253
Engine, description _________ 192, 193
Engine, technical data ___________252
Engine, temperature gauge ________55
Engine-oil level, checking _________193
Expansion tank, coolant __________196
F
Fault codes, Audio System ________104
Flat spot, tire ___________________229
Fluid level, automatic transmission __195
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Sedan ___134
Folding the rear seat, 9-5 Wagon ___137
Frequently asked questions on airbag 30
Front fog lights __________________66
Frost warning ___________________58
Fuel __________________________154
Fuel consumption ________________57
Fuel filler flap ___________________145
Fuel gauge _____________________55
Fuel grade _____________________252
Fuse box under hood ____________219
Fuse panel ____________________215
Fuses ________________________215
G
Gearbox number ________________259
Gearbox oil, checking ____________195
Gearbox, technical data, __________255
Glove compartment ______________131
H
Handbrake ____________________185
Hazard warning lights _____________66
Head restraint __________________ 18
Headlight flasher ________________ 63
Headlights _____________________ 63
Holidaying abroad ______________ 236
Hood ________________________ 188
Horn _________________________ 124
I
Ignition switch _________________ 148
Immobilizer ____________________ 35
Indicator and warning lights ________ 48
Indicator lights __________________ 48
Instrument illumination ___________ 65
Instruments and controls __________ 47
Integral child seat _______________ 24
Interior equipment ______________ 119
Interior lighting __________________ 67
Interior rearview mirror __________ 125
K
Key __________________________ 34
Key to chassis number __________ 260
Key, remove __________________ 148
L
Labels _________________________ 8
Leather upholstery, care of _______ 231
Light horn _____________________ 63
Light switches __________________ 63
Luggage-compartment lighting _____ 67

265Index
M
Main instrument panel ____________48
Main/dipped beam _______________63
Maintenance schedule ___________242
Manual gearbox, technical data ____255
Maxi fuses _____________________216
Milometer ______________________54
Motoring abroad ________________236
N
Night Panel _____________________61
O
Oil capacity, engine _____________252
Oil change, engine ______________194
Oil specification _________________252
OnStar _______________________107
Outdoor temperature _____________57
Owner assistance _______________243
P
Paintwork, touching-in ___________233
Parking lights ___________________63
Plates and labels _______________259
Poly-V-belt ____________________202
Power steering _________________199
Power-steering fluid _____________199
Pressure gauge _________________56
Programming I, ACC ______________76
Programming II, ACC _____________77
Programming the ACC ____________76
Q
Questions on function of airbag _____30
Quick guide, Audio System _________83
R
Radio __________________________86
Rear fog light ____________________64
Rear seat, 9-5 Sedan, folding ______134
Rear seat, 9-5 Wagon, folding _____137
Rear-seat head restraints __________18
Rear-view mirror, antidazzle _______126
Rearview mirrors ________________125
Reclamation ___________________236
Refuelling _____________________154
Relay panel ____________________218
Remote control __________________34
Remote-control battery, changing ____37
Remove the key ________________148
Reporting safety defects __________244
Reprogramming of systems _______261
Reservoir, power-steering fluid _____199
Rev counter _____________________54
Reversing lights _________________66
Roof load ______________________176
Running-in _____________________170
S
SID __________________________ 57
SRS (airbag) ___________________ 26
SRS, supplementary restraint system 26
Saab 9-5 Audio System ___________ 81
Saab Information Display (SID) _____ 57
Safety belts ____________________ 12
Safety belts, care of _____________ 231
Safety-belt pretensioners _________ 13
Safety-belt reminder _____________ 12
Seats ________________________ 120
Securing a load _________________ 38
Selector lever indication, 
automatic transmission __________ 57
Service costs __________________ 243
Service information _____________ 244
Service intervals _______________ 242
Service record retention _________ 243
Settings, seats _________________ 120
Side airbags ___________________ 28
Signalling, horn ________________ 124
Sliding floor, 9-5 Wagon _________ 142
Snow chains __________________ 172
Spare wheel __________________ 225
Spare wheel and tools ___________ 144
Spark plugs ___________________ 254
Speed rating __________________ 221
Speedometer ________________ 54, 55
Starting in cold weather, ACC ______ 76
Starting in hot weather, ACC _______ 76
Steering wheel adjustment _______ 124

266 Index
Steering, technical data __________256
Stone-chip damage, repairing ______233
Storage compartments ___________131
Sun visors _____________________130
Sunroof _______________________128
Suspension ____________________256
Suspension, technical data ________256
Switches _______________________63
Systems, adjustment ____________261
T
TCS OFF ______________________53
Table of fuses __________________217
Tachometer _____________________54
Tailgate, opening ________________38
Tank gauge _____________________55
Technical data _________________249
Telematics ____________________107
Temperature control, ACC _________72
Temperature gauge, engine ________55
Temperature zones, ACC __________72
Textile carpeting ________________232
Through-load hatch ______________136
Tie Downs _____________________136
Tightening torque, wheel studs _____226
Tire markings _____________ 221, 222
Tire pressure ______________ 179, 221
Tires ____________________ 221, 257
Tools _________________________144
Touching-in the paintwork _________233
Towbar attachment ______________174
Towbar load ___________________176
Towing the car _________________181
Towing, automatics ______________181
Traction _______________________169
Trailer weights __________________251
Trionic ________________________191
Trip computer ___________________57
Trip meter ______________________54
Trunk _________________________134
Trunk lid, opening ________________38
Turbo gauge ____________________56
Turbo, points to note _____________151
U
Under the hood, 3.0t V6 __________190
Under the hood, 4-cyl ____________189
Upholstery and trim ______________231
Upholstery and trim, care of _______231
Useful tips, ACC _________________78
V
Vanity mirrors __________________130
Ventilated front seats ____________123
Viscosity, engine oil _____________252
W
Warning labels ___________________8
Warning light, AIR BAG ___________30
Warning lights ___________________48
Warning triangle ________________144
Washers _____________________ 203
Washers, windshield ____________ 204
Washing the car _______________ 232
Waxing and polishing ___________ 233
Wear indicators, tires ____________ 223
Wheels and tires ___________ 221, 257
Wheels and tires, sizes __________ 257
Window-glass sensor, car alarm ____ 42
Windshield washers _____________ 68
Windshield wipers _______________ 68
Wiper blades, headlamp _________ 203
Wiper blades, replacing __________ 203
Wipers and washers _________ 68, 203

267Notes
Notes

268 Notes

269Notes

270 Notes

271Notes

272 Notes

